Informa Middle East Course Catalogue 2014

Course Catalogue 2014

HUMAN RESOURCES

INDUSTRIAL

FINANCE

HEALTHCARE

LEGAL

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

PROJECT MANAGEMENT

MARKETING, SALES and PR

BUSINESS and MANAGEMENT

AUDIT

ADMINISTRATION/ SECRETARIAL

PROPERTY

ICT www.informa-mea.com

T: +971 4 3352437 F: +971 4 3352438 E: register-mea@informa.com W: www.informa-mea.com

Informa Middle East (formerly IIR Middle East), has been a global leader in facilitating business knowledge and skills through cutting edge training, conferences and industry led exhibitions for more than 40 years.

Operating in the Middle East since 1993, key expertise allows us to identify trends ahead of the curve by responding quickly to market needs to bring global thought leaders and industry experts into the region.

About

About Informa Middle East

We are part of the Global Events division of Informa plc (www.informa.com). Informa provides academics, businesses and individuals with unparalleled knowledge, up-to-the minute information and highly specialist skills and services. Informa has some 100 offices in 25 countries, employs over 6,000 staff globally and is one of the largest publicly-owned organiser of exhibitions, events and training in the world.

Informa Middle East researches and organises more than 450 public training courses annually. These are short, practical courses aimed at developing effective managers through a deepening of knowledge, skills and confidence. Our division’s mission is to develop managers’ knowledge, skills, behaviours and practices in order to enhance their managerial and leadership potential, personal success of their organisations and of wider society. To achieve this, we offer a portfolio of qualification and endorsed public training courses, tailor made in-house programmes, consulting, facilitation, and coaching that is directly applied to the realities and challenges being faced by organisations.

Our relentless pursuit for excellence is reflected through renowned industry experts and consultants with experience gained at the world’s biggest and most forward thinking organisations. Informa brings you seasoned practitioners who have the solutions to the challenges facing your business today.

AFRICA South Africa AMERICAS Argentina Brazil Canada Chile Mexico USA

ASIA China Hong Kong India Indonesia Japan Malaysia Philippines Singapore Taiwan Thailand Vietnam

AUSTRALASIA Australia New Zealand MIDDLE EAST Qatar UAE

EUROPE Austria Belgium CzechRepublic Denmark Finland France

Germany Greece Hungary Italy Monaco Netherlands

Norway Poland Portugal Romania Russia Spain

Sweden Switzerland UK

3

Dear Colleague, I would be stating the obvious if I say, “Giving your staff access to training is more than providing a ‘nice-to-have’ benefit.”

Welcome

A well-trained workforce is productive and has the skills to do the job effectively and efficiently.

But the benefits of staff training don’t stop there. Just some of the tangible benefits that companies that invest in training have reported include: • Improved levels of staff retention • Increased motivation and enthusiasm • Greater staff buy-in to organisational goals.

To help you build the skills of your workforce, Informa Training offers you a comprehensive catalogue of training courses, ranging across all aspects of business.

Whether you have one person, a handful of people, or an entire division needing skills development, our open course calendar, with more than 450 programmes, will help you meet the management, technical and core skills improvement needs of your workforce.

Through partnership agreements and established relationships with key awarding bodies and industry associations, we offer you access to quality training with recognised certification.

Our exclusive training programmes and interventions are provided by renowned industry experts—leaders in their respective fields.

Each of the trainers bring a solid background in theory coupled with extensive practical experience at the highest levels of their chosen fields.

We are honoured to have been able to assist you with your training needs during the past 20 years and look forward to witnessing your success.

Warmest regards

4

With appreciation to Prof. Patching for taking the photo

Farzaneh Majed Divisional Director – Training

Training Production Team

We are the leading provider of training programmes across the region, boasting the largest and most diverse range of training courses with more than 450 public programmes covering management, technical and core-skills improvement programmes.

About

About Our Training

Our Expertise Covers: Management Development and Leadership Business and Strategy Personal and Professional Development Audit Banking, Finance and Accounting Project Management ICT and Telecoms

HR and Training Supply Chain Industrial Healthcare Sales, Marketing and PR Real Estate Legal

Our association with key partners and awarding bodies allows us to provide cutting edge information with recognised certification through public seminars, customised in-house training, consultancy, distance learning, workshops and blended solutions.

The Informa Middle East experience promises a superior solution with renowned industry experts and leaders in their field.

Who Attends Our Training Seminars

By Seniority

By Industry

5%

CEO/ Vice President

14%

Government 19%

16%

20%

Electricity, Power, Oil and Gas

General Manager/MD

Banking and Finance

4% 25%

40%

Head of Department Middle Management Non-Managerial

10%

7%

Real Estate and Construction IT And Telecommunication

10% 30%

Healthcare Other

5

Clients

Our Clients Since opening our Dubai office in 1993 more than 150,000 professionals have benefited from our training, through our public course schedule and in-house programmes. Informa Middle East has been privileged to work with most leading organisations in the region, covering all aspects of development from strategic leadership to patient flow to financial modeling. With our carefully screened instructors and our excellent team, we have shaped a superior training experience that has been a privilege to share with top tier institutions all over the Middle East. Below is a selection of our clients: Abdulla Fouad Group Abu Dhabi Distribution Company Abu Dhabi Pensions A. Abunayyan Group ADCO ADIA ADNOC ADTA ARASCO Bank Dhofar Barwa Bank DEWA Dolphin Energy Dubai Holding

Dubai Properties Egyptian Banking Institute El Seif Engineering ENEC ENOC Etisalat GASCO KPC Kuwait Oil Company Marafiq Oryx Qatar Foundation Qatar Petroleum Ooredoo

Riyadh Bank RasGas Royal Commission Jubail and Yanbu SABIC Saudi Aramco Saudi Electricity Saudi Food and Drug Authority Saudi Telecom SEHA Supreme Council of Health Tawazun Union of Investment Companies United Real Estate Zain

Our clients rely on Informa Middle East’s dedication to service, flexibility and passion for quality as they focus on building a performance culture that matches the region’s commitment to progressive growth.

To learn how your organisation can benefit from a partnership with us, please email membership@informa.com or call 04 407 2536

6

Membership is designed for companies and organisations that are looking to obtain maximum value from their training budget with greater cost savings and incentives through a formal partnership arrangement. Your company could benefit from: • • • • • • • • • • •

Discounts on published course prices – save up to 40% Complimentary passes for multiple bookings Facilitated brainstorming for your training team with one of our experts Individual assessment reports on your delegates A dedicated account manager providing first class service and help to maximise your membership benefits Face-to-face visits to ensure you have that personal touch Exclusive Breakfast Networking Sessions with subject matter experts Invoicing and credit flexibility Flight and accommodation incentives Hotel reservation assistance First option on sold out and popular events

Membership

Membership

The membership consists of varying ties to ensure you can obtain maximum value within your annual scope: • • • •

Up to 20 delegates a year Up to 40 delegates a year Up to 60 delegates a year 60+ delegates a year

For more information on membership costs and how a partnership with us can benefit your company please contact the membership team on membership@informa.com or call 04 407 2536

7

In-Company Training

In-Company Training customised training solutions is the in-company training division. Any of the topics and subjects covered in this catalogue can be adapted to suit your business, together with all areas of professional development, banking and finance, management development and leadership. Our association with key partners and awarding bodies allows us to provide cutting edge content and recognised certification to improve motivation and ultimately, business performance. Our approach includes: Customised Training Blended Solutions 1-on-1 Coaching Consultancy

-

adapted to suit your business environment and objectives training is preceded by focused onsite needs-analysis and stakeholder interviewing focused and impactful interventions for senior managers an analysis of existing business problems and the development of a strategy for enhanced performance

Informa Middle East offers you proficiency across a variety of specialist subjects, offering a superior experience with renowned industry experts and leaders.

Our expertise covers: • Personal & Professional Development • Management Development & Leadership • Business & Strategy • Finance & Banking • Project Management • IT & Telecoms

• HR & Training • Industry & Healthcare • Health & Safety • Sales & Marketing • Public Relations • Real Estate

We are proud to be the leading training provider of choice across the Middle East and we would welcome an opportunity to discuss your company’s training and development initiatives.

Please contact us on cts@informa.com for one of our training specialists to get in touch.

Phone Email Web

8

+971 4 407 2624 cts@informa.com www.informa-mea.com/cts

The certified courses are cutting-edge events which are brought to you in association with our academic partners.

Discover the benefits of these certified courses:

Partners

Certified And Specialised Courses

• Gain an in-depth understanding of every issue impacting your organisation and ensure you walk away with the confidence and experience to handle any situation • Earn a certificate in your chosen topic area that will attest to your proficiency, enhance your value to your organisation and further your professional development • Discover best practice and critical strategies in your chosen field that will ensure organisational compliance and improve your job performance • Exchange ideas and discuss practical solutions to common (and not so common) dilemmas with colleagues and leading specialists

9

Partners

AIPMM The Association of International Product Marketing and Management (AIPMM) is the world’s largest professional organisation of product managers, brand managers, product marketing managers and other individuals responsible for guiding their organisations and clients through a constantly changing business landscape. It is the only organisation that represents those who manage the entire product life-cycle throughout any industry. Currently over 8000 members strong, it has offerings in North America, Europe and the Middle East, and is expanding soon into Southeast Asia.

Aston University Founded in 1895 and a University since 1966, Aston is a long established research-led University known for its world-class teaching quality and strong links to industry, government and commerce.

EFQM EFQM helps to prepare a new generation of business leaders by offering training and development opportunities built on practice-based learning and exchange between organisations. Initially focusing on training business excellence professionals how to assess an organisation using the EFQM Excellence Model, the EFQM portfolio has expanded to include courses on how to start your organisation’s “Journey to Excellence”, to business management training for senior managers and high potentials through the Pegasus programme.

The Balanced Scorecard Institute The Balanced Scorecard Institute, a Strategy Management Group company provides training, certification and consulting services to commercial, government, and non-profit organizations in applying best practice in Balanced Scorecard, strategic performance management and measurement, and transformation and change management.

Products and services include public and on-site courses, facilitation and consulting services, and information and tools used by executives, managers and analysts to transform their organizations into “performance excellence” organizations.

The Institute also provides, through the balancedscorecard.org website, a resource to obtain information, ideas and best practice based on lessons learned from extensive experience in building strategic management and performance measurement systems using the award-winning Nine Steps to Success® Balanced Scorecard methodology.

(Certification and training related to the Nine Steps to SuccessTM methodology is for internal facilitation and personal use only. Any use of the Nine Steps to SuccessTM or other Institute intellectual property beyond internal facilitation use without a formal affiliate or associate agreement with the Institute is prohibited.)

Bond University Australia’s Bond University was established in 1989 and over its 20 year life has provided an educational experience of the highest international standards under the tutelage of Australia’s leading academics. Since its inception Bond has adapted to the needs of the workplace. By ensuring that education is more than scientific theory and text book case studies, Bond’s practical professional development approach means that its graduates are able to make an immediate impact in the workplace.

Bond is the only university to earn a 5 star rating in every category of evaluation in a recent review of Australian Universities.

British Institute of Facilities Management (BIFM) British Institute of Facilities Management (BIFM) is the national professional body for FM in the UK. Formed in 1993 it currently serves over 12,000 members, including overseas practitioners. BIFM also supports an international specialist interest group of more than 1,000 members who wish to keep up-to-date with international best practice.

10

BIFM Training is managed on behalf of the BIFM by Quadrilect Ltd, and the current programme features over 40 courses including health and safety and a range of accredited options and qualifications. BIFM Training courses are benchmarked against the Institute’s professional standards, and offer an unparalleled range of professional development opportunities for FM’s looking to improve their knowledge, skill and professionalism. This course provides access to leading edge thinking and skilled practitioner experience in line with the Institute’s commitment to providing high quality information, education and networking services for individual professionals and organisations involved in FM. This course also carries a certificate which is recognised under the BIFM’s Continuing Professional Development programme.

BIFM Training also offers a range of essential learning and development services, including skills profiling and training needs analysis. For further information on BIFM, please visit www.bifm.org.uk

The Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport - United Arab Emirates

For more information on CILT, please visit www.ciltuae.org or www.cilt-international.com

ESI International ESI International is the recognised leader in innovative project management, contract management, business analysis, sourcing management training and business skills training. ESI have served Fortune Global 500 companies worldwide and nearly every major agency of the US government. For further information on ESI, please visit www.esi-intl.com

Partners

The Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport (CILT) is a worldwide organisation with an established international pedigree. With over 33,000 members working in over 100 countries, the CILT spans the globe. CILT is the pre-eminent independent professional body for individuals associated with logistics, supply chains and all transport throughout their careers. It offers significant benefits to all its members, as well as a complete suite of educational courses internationally.

George Washington University (GWU) The George Washington University School of Business is dedicated to excellence in its teaching and research about management within the United States and internationally. The school has a 75-year history of preparing men and women for leadership in both the private and public sectors. Known internationally for its dedication to academic excellence, the school draws students from all parts of the US and around the world. For further information on George Washington University School of Business, please visit their website www.sbpm.gwu.edu As Informa Middle East’s academic partner, GW reviews a selected range of the business and finance certificate courses and programmes. Delegates successfully completing these courses receive an Informa/GW Certificate of Completion.

Centre for Administrative Management Studies Formed in 2013, Centre for Administrative Management Studies (CAMS) is the global professional body for practitioners, academics and students in Administrative Management. With clear stated charitable aims, CAMS undertakes to promote the science of administrative management for the public benefit.

Institute of Leadership and Management (ILM) The Institute of Leadership and Management (ILM) is the UK’s largest awarding body for leadership and management qualifications. ILM partners with over 2,000 ILM-approved centres, comprising private training providers, further and higher education colleges, and employers delivering in-house management training.

The Institute of Sales & Marketing Management (ISMM) The Institute of Sales & Marketing Management (ISMM) is the UK’s only professional body for salespeople. Founded in 1911 to promote standards of excellence in sales and sales management and to enhance the status and profile of sales as a profession, the ISMM has been the authoritative voice of selling and the custodian of sales standards, ethics and best practice for over 35 years.

The ISMM is also responsible for establishing benchmarks of professionalism in sales. It is the only membership body recognised by the UK Government regulatory body Ofqual as an awarding organisation to offer qualifications in Sales, Marketing and Sales Management.

ISMM members are drawn from every sector of industry and commerce. From those just embarking upon a sales career through to senior and experienced sales managers and directors, they share a commitment to upholding the standards of professionalism and integrity that are all hallmarks of sales success.

Project Management Institute (PMI) Informa Middle East is an approved Registered Education Provider (REP) with the Project Management Institute ((PMI). PMI is the world’s leading not-for-profit association for the project management profession. PMI is recognised for the advocacy programmes that are conducted with governments, organisations and industries around the world as they recognise and embrace project management to achieve business results. For further information on PMI, please visit www.pmi.org As an REP Informa Middle East is approved by PMI to issue Professional Development Units (PDU) for our training courses.

The REP programme has been designed to enhance the ongoing professional development of PMI’s members, those credentialed through PMI and others in the project management profession.

11

The Chartered Institute of Purchasing and Supply (CIPS)

Partners

The Chartered Institute of Purchasing and Supply (CIPS) is an international organisation serving the purchasing and supply profession.

Established in 1932, they have grown to become the central reference for industry best practice and their code of conduct is the standard around the world. In 1992 they were awarded a Royal Charter in recognition of our status as a centre of excellence and support for the profession. is a Registered International Study Centre for CIPS

Dedicated to promoting good practice, CIPS provides a wide range of services for the benefit of members and the wider business community. CIPS exists to promote and develop high standards of professional skill, ability and integrity among all those engaged in purchasing and supply chain management.

CIPS programmes provide professionals with practical knowledge and skills that can be used immediately back at work. Their trainers are experts in the field and have a track record in delivering innovative, interactive, stimulating and practical learning.

The Institute Of Healthcare Management (IHM) The Institute of Healthcare Management (IHM) in the United Kingdom is recognised as one of the most influential healthcare management organisations in the world. The IHM’s membership reflects the diversity of healthcare management from within primary and acute care as well as from the public and private sectors. Since 1902, the IHM has played an important part in the lives of thousands of healthcare managers. It provides opportunities to enhance the careers of those involved in the health and care sectors through professional development opportunities, robust and effective networks and influencing relevant policy decisions.

When you register for the Professional Diploma or Professional Certificate programme you receive membership of the IHM for one year. Membership is a recognition of your commitment to the IHM’s standards and its Healthcare Management Code. It gives the individual membership of an international community of professional health and social care managers who are committed to improvement and excellence in healthcare.

By successfully completing either the Professional Certificate or Professional Diploma programme you will be gaining an internationally recognised professional managerial qualification, entitling you to become a full member of the IHM and to use the designatory letters ‘MIHM’ after your name.

Society for Human Resource Management (SHRM) Founded in 1948, the Society for Human Resource Management (SHRM) is the world’s largest association devoted to human resource management. Representing more than 250,000 members in over 140 countries, the Society serves the needs of HR professionals and advances the interests of the HR profession. SHRM’s motto is, leading people, leading organisations. Professional development programs offered by SHRM are created using proven global standards of best practice with an applied focus. Today, theory is not enough, the application is crucial.

One of SHRM’s four strategic pillars is to be a global organisation. SHRM’s global growth increased by 32% in 2011 and over 8,500 members currently reside outside of the US. SHRM is also leading in the development ISO Standards for HR and competency models, by the profession, for the profession.

A SHRM learning experience delivers the confidence of value and brand recognition that can only come from the world’s largest HR association.

The KPI Institute The KPI Institute is the global authority on Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) research and education, providing through its publications and training courses insights on how to measure and learn with KPIs. It developed the KPI Management Framework and runs five main research programs, dedicated to performance management, the Balanced Scorecard, KPIs, analytics and organisational strategy. The main program, dedicated to documenting and cataloguing how KPIs are used in practice, resulted in the establishment of www.smartKPIs.com, the largest online database of well documented KPI examples, with over 7000 examples from 15 functional areas and 24 Industries. The most visited examples are included in the popular “Top 25 KPIs” series of reports. Over the last 8 years, The Institute assisted over 3,000 organizations in finding solutions to their KPI needs.

12

Informa Middle East Supports: Al Noor Training Centre for Children with Special Needs is a non-profit organisation which falls under the Ministry of Social Affairs. For the past 30 years, Al Noor has been providing high quality professional training to the special needs community in Dubai. Their purpose-built facility has been donated by HH Sheikh Mohammed Bin Rashid Al Maktoum, Vice President and Prime Minister of UAE, Ruler of Dubai and through the benefaction of HRH Princess Haya Bint Al Hussein.

The Centre can accommodate up to 300 special children with various physical and cognitive challenges such as Downs Syndrome, Cerebral Palsy and Autism. Al Noor uses a trans-disciplinary approach to implement its training programmes and in addition to teaching, it offers physiotherapy, occupational therapy, speech and language therapy, psychological services, sports and music. Al Noor also has its own Work Placement Unit which trains students with a capability for open employment.

Partners

Al Noor Training Centre

13

Social Media

Be part of our community!

Informa Middle East is on Social Media and you can now continue networking , discussing and sharing insights with delegates and speakers online.

Get Connected www.facebook.com/informaMEA Join our group - informa middle east www.twitter.com/informaMEA www.youtube.com/informaMEA

14

Five Ways To Register +971 4 335 2437 +971 4 335 2438 register-mea@informa.com

For Further Information And Group Discounts Contact +971 4 335 2483 info-mea@informa.com

Registration

General Registration Information

Informa Middle East, P.O Box 9428, Dubai, UAE www.informa-mea.com

Payments A confirmation letter and invoice will be sent upon receipt of your registration. Please note that full payment must be received prior to the event. Only those delegates whose fees have been paid in full will be admitted to the event. You can pay by company cheques or bankers draft in Dirhams or US$. Please note that all US$ cheques and drafts should be drawn on a New York bank and an extra amount of US$ 6 per payment should be added to cover bank clearing charges. In any event payment must be received not later than 48 hours before the Event. Entry to the Event may be refused if payment in full is not received.

Cancellation If you are unable to attend, a substitute delegate will be welcome in your place. Registrations cancelled more than 7 days before the Event are subject to a $200 administration charge. Registration fees for registrations cancelled 7 days or less before the Event must be paid in full. Substitutions are welcome at any time.

All registrations are subject to acceptance by Informa Middle East which will be confirmed to you in writing.

Due to unforeseen circumstances, the programme may change and Informa Middle East reserves the right to alter the venue and/or speakers or topics.

Avoid Visa Delays – Book Now Delegates requiring visas should contact the hotel they wish to stay at directly, as soon as possible. Visas for non-GCC nationals may take several weeks to process.

15

Hospitality

Hospitality Dubai is extremely busy at all times of the year and failure to reserve your flight and accommodation early may result in them being unavailable.

We have negotiated special delegate rates for you at selected hotels. We highly recommend you secure your room reservation at the earliest to avoid last minute inconvenience. You can contact the Hospitality Desk for required assistance on: Tel: +971 4 4072693 Email: Hospitality@informa.com

16

Table Of Contents Administration/Secretarial _______________________________________________________________________ 19 Audit _______________________________________________________________________________________ 27 Business and Management ______________________________________________________________________ 35 Finance _____________________________________________________________________________________ 87 Healthcare __________________________________________________________________________________ 115 Human Resources ____________________________________________________________________________ 129 ICT _______________________________________________________________________________________ 151 Industrial ___________________________________________________________________________________ 165 Legal ______________________________________________________________________________________ 179 Marketing, Sales and PR _______________________________________________________________________ 191 Project Management _________________________________________________________________________ 205 Property ___________________________________________________________________________________ 223 Supply Chain Management ____________________________________________________________________ 233

/ N O I T A R IAL T S I R N A I ET M AD SECR

ADMINISTRATION/ SECRETARIAL

Business Writing For Administrative Professionals _______________________________________________________________________

22

Certificate In Administrative Management (In association with Centre for Administrative Management Studies)_________________________________

22

Certificate In HR Administration (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)_____________________________________

23

Finance For Administrative Professionals ______________________________________________________________________________

23

ILM Endorsed Advanced Executive Secretaries And PAs (In association with Institute of Leadership and Management)__________________________

24

Management Skills For Administrative Professionals ____________________________________________________________________

24

Office Manager __________________________________________________________________________________________________

25

Project Management For Administrative Professionals ___________________________________________________________________

25

Administration/Secretarial

Table Of Contents

21

Administration/Secretarial

Business Writing For Administrative Professionals

Certificate In Administrative Management

Course Overview

Course Overview

This course will help administrative professionals develop their writing skills and learn how to write more effectively. They will discover how to structure effective emails and letters, and there will be a session on writing tasks such as writing agendas and minutes for meetings.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • •

This course is designed for administrative professionals (executive assistants, personal assistants, administrators, etc.) who would like to refine their writing skills and acquire a portfolio of techniques to enhance their professional written communication in a variety of formats and business situations.

1. Improve your writing confidence by using current business standards for English usage and clarity 2. Write effective correspondence that get the results you want 3. Ensure your written communication gets your message across clearly

= Earned Training Hours

•

Inside Organisations o Understanding your organisation o Managing the organisation o A systems view of the organisation

•

Working With People o Work, jobs and people o Dealing with change o Working in teams

•

Administrative Practice o Managing information resources o Technology in administration o Improving administrative practice

Who Should Attend?

This course is suitable for anyone who is preparing for a career in business administration.

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending

24 Hrs

This is a practical course designed to increase delegates’ understanding of the professional administrator in organisations. They will examine the different structures that organisations adopt and how these affect the system’s procedures, culture and the people who work in organisations.

Course Content

The ABC of good business writing Barriers to good writing Writing for your reader Writing in plain English How to structure your sentences Paragraphs Punctuation The clarity index Style and tone Using the correct tense Producing business letters Email etiquette Producing agendas and minutes of meetings

Who Should Attend?

22

(In association with Centre for Administrative Management Studies)

E

1. Develop and apply new and enhanced skills in self management and time management, information retrieval and evaluation, written communication and the use of standard office IT systems and software 2. Reflect and review your own administrative practices and contribute to improving the performance of systems and resources within your organisation, whilst understanding the requirements of your role in supporting management 3. Maximise your own personal development and equip yourself for promotion

E I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Finance For Administrative Professionals

Course Overview

Course Overview

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

HR administrators often function as the first point of contact for employee enquiries and requests. This course provides a ‘best practice’ approach to the key administrative activities and on the practical application of key HR administrative activities. The course leader will provide you with the insight, knowledge and skills to manage potentially sensitive issues and situations with tact, discretion and confidence.

Gain an overall understanding of human resources as it relates to an organisation’s goals and strategic objectives. You will examine the issues of human resources management and its various functions, activities and processes.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • •

The role of HR administration in your organisation Bringing creativity to the HR administration role Advantages and disadvantages of HR systems Developing a ‘can do’ attitude for your customers The stages of recruitment Record keeping Tracking key internal HR records Orientation Carrying out training administration Performance appraisal Developing interpersonal and communication skills Emotional intelligence and how to use it to give great service

Who Should Attend?

This course has been designed and developed for HR professionals requiring specialised knowledge and skills. The course is intended for individuals who are either new to HR or have little experience in HR, but have a keen interest to develop a career in the HR profession. HR administrators and assistants will benefit from attending.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Deliver a high level of service to both the operational HR team and the wider business and provide administrative support concerning employee matters, ensuring alignment with company values and goals 2. Design and implement effective HR procedures and administrative systems to support business needs and deliver business results 3. Develop your interpersonal communication skills so that you can successfully deal with difficult situations

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I

Being able to understand financial information is an essential skill for Administrators, PAs, Executive Assistants, Departmental Managers and Leaders. This course will provide you with the skills to read and interpret financial statements, understand key concepts, and use these to improve your administrative performance and your personal professional development.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Financial Documents And The Organisation Accounting Concepts And How Accountants Think How Financial Figures Are Used Assets And Their Treatment In Accounts The Concept Of The Margin Cost classification Cost centres How costs are apportioned Preparing budgets and forecasts.

Managing budgets Explaining variances Presentation Of Financial Information Improving Organisational Performance Cost Of Capital, And Introduction To The Concept Of Return On Investment (ROI) Budgeting And Budget Challenges Negotiation with the accountant The link to quality approaches Sharing financial information: benefits and drawbacks Identifying and managing business financial risk Business projects and use of financial information and argument

Administration/Secretarial

Certificate In HR Administration

Who Should Attend?

Suitable for Business Administrators, Managers, those working within financial departments; HR Professionals; Department heads, PAs and Executive Assistants.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Demystify finance jargon Understand key documents; the balance sheet and profit and loss statements Implement cash management in administration – managing debtors, suppliers, settlement discounts, buying and stocking effectively

E I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

23

Administration/Secretarial

ILM Endorsed Advanced Executive Secretaries And PAs

Management Skills For Administrative Professionals

Course Overview

Course Overview

(In association with Institute of Leadership and Management) This course focuses on equipping delegates with the professional skills they require to do their jobs effectively, contributing to their own, their boss and their organisation’s success. During the course you will work through a series of discussions, demonstrations and case studies that will enhance your learning experience and show in detail how to optimise your ‘best practice’ PA management skills.

Course Content

Course Content

• • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • •

The role of the Executive Secretary/PA Leadership and office management Communicating for results Interpersonal relations and motivation Effective presentation skills Managing work Problem-solving and decision-making in the modern office Managing change Effective selection and recruitment techniques Managing conflict

Who Should Attend?

The course is suitable for administrative professionals in all industries who lend secretarial support, manage an office environment or work as a personal assistant within the organisation.

1. Discover practical tools and techniques that will help you manage your workload and relationships more successfully and improve productivity 2. Explore strategies to reduce conflict and learn to deal effectively with difficult situations and people 3. Provide a high level of administrative support by enhancing your ability to manage change, plan and coordinate workflow, and build an effective team

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

Advanced organisational skills Time management Planning Project management Meeting management Relationship building Partnering with managers, colleagues and customers The “smart” way to behave Solo leader to team leader Successful communication strategies People problems Communication style Business communication skills – written and presentation

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for all administrative professionals, assistants and secretaries.

Benefits Of Attending

24

This course will provide delegates with practical ideas, skills, increased self-awareness and the keys to move their focus of control from external to internal and help them attain their business objectives.

It will give them the ability to work productively with people using influencing skills that will help build their credibility and lead to more important leadership roles.

A

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Commit to effective communication outcomes Use meetings as a powerful business tool – ensure they are well planned, well organised and well directed Acquire a set of skills and techniques that can be directly applied in the organisation

E I

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Project Management For Administrative Professionals

Course Overview

Course Overview

This course is an exciting and interactive course designed to provide delegates with the professional skills and tools they need to do their job effectively, contributing to personal and organisational success.

This course will offer delegates the opportunity to test and learn from the best, using case studies and current examples from the international business community.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • •

Recruiting and retaining the best staff Increasing productivity and efficiency Organising and managing projects Improving informal and formal communication skills Understanding the impact of voice when communicating The dynamics of meetings Time management and planning plus work-life balance Helping manager(s) delegate Conflict resolution management How giving and taking feedback can help prevent conflict Self esteem and emotional intelligence Networking and marketing yourself

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for all administrative professionals including office managers, personal assistants and executive secretaries.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand how the role of administrative professionals contributes to organisational success and maximises profits 2. Improve the level of communication within the organisation and adapt the method of communication to certain business situations 3. Apply effective time management skills that will help work more effectively with teams, respond to multiple demands and be able to delegate more effectively

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E

The tools and techniques associated with project management will give you the confidence you need to get the job done – on time and on budget.

At this highly practical three-day course you will learn scheduling, budgeting and planning skills that will take your project successfully from conception to completion.

Whether it’s purchasing office equipment, planning a meeting or special event or creating a presentation, the skills that you will gain by attending this course will ensure that you are equipped to take on the challenges.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Understanding the basic principles of project management The five key stages of a project The key players in project management and their roles Identifying the essentials for project success Effective time management Setting clear objectives to meet your business needs Listing and grouping your activities Committing your resources Understanding project costing Creating a commitment matrix Project management tools Managing information flow Running review meetings How to write project documentation Developing and presenting the project

Administration/Secretarial

Office Manager

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the five stages of project management, and the role of project management in your organisation 2. Identify how to maximise the administrative support you provide, manage multiple priorities and conflicting demands 3. Introduce systems and documentation to effectively manage projects

E I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

25

AU

T I D

AUDIT

Certificate In Communication Skills for Internal Auditors (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) _________________

30

Certificate In Establishing An Internal Audit Function (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)____________________

30

Certificate In Internal Audit I – Essentials Of Internal Audit (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)________________

31

Certificate In Internal Audit II- The Developing Internal Auditor (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)_______________

31

Certificate In Internal Audit III –Risk Based Auditing (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)_____________________

32

Certificate In Internal Audit IV – Advanced Audit Techniques (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)______________

32

Certificate In Internal Audit V – Leading The Internal Audit Function (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)________

33

Fraud And The Internal Audit Role___________________________________________________________________________________

33

Risk Based Auditing Of Projects And Contracts_________________________________________________________________________

34

Audit

Table Of Contents

29

Audit

Certificate In Communication Skills for Internal Auditors

Certificate In Establishing An Internal Audit Function

30 CPE Credits

30 CPE Credits

Course Overview

Course Overview

This exciting course features a series of case studies and practical exercises covering verbal, listening, written and other communication skills.

When building or assessing an audit function, you must deal with both strategic and tactical considerations — everything from gaining senior management support to developing an audit plan. From a strategic standpoint, you will need to understand how the business intends to engage and benefit from internal auditing.

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Strong communication and presentation skills are essential in this highly challenging environment, whether it is facilitating workshops, negotiating with management or communicating your ideas in the form of reports.

Using video and peer review, you will have the opportunity to learn from fellow professionals as well as benefiting from the wide experience of your course leader

Course Content • • • • • • • •

Learn the secrets of effective communication Appreciate how to better engage with stakeholders Apply negotiation rather than persuasion techniques Learn how to deliver powerful presentations and get feedback on your presentation techniques Plan, write and edit a report to create short and powerful messages 17 team exercises to provide practical solutions to communication challenges Write the Executive summary Write the audit report

Who Should Attend?

• • • •

Internal Audit managers Senior Internal Auditors Senior Quality Auditors or Compliance Officers Other assurance professionals who want to improve their communication skills

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Many organisations that have previously not had an internal audit function are now establishing this activity, due to regulatory or business requirements. Others see the need to significantly change the traditional internal audit approach.

This brand new four day course led by Phil Griffiths, one of the world’s leading internal audit trainers, provides you a simple and highly effective roadmap to ensure success.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

The internal audit remit Establishing the authority of the internal audit (ia) activity Gaining top management commitment Developing a strategic plan or roadmap Business policies and procedures Strategic audit planning Resourcing the function Developing a budget Building or enhancing the internal audit team Developing or updating the audit manual Implementing the internal audit process Audit programme development The risk based audit approach Consultancy assignments Developing or updating the audit report process Open forum

Who Should Attend?

Benefits Of Attending

1. Learn the secrets of effective communication 2. Appreciate how to better engage with stakeholders 3. Apply negotiation rather than persuasion techniques

• • • •

Recently appointed Chief Audit Executives (CAE’s) or those about to be appointed or wishing to apply for this role CAE’s appointed to establish an internal audit function CAE’s appointed to take over an established function Directors or VP’s of organisations about to establish an internal audit function

Benefits Of Attending

1. Establish a new internal function or invigorate an established function 2. Build senior management support for the role and determine its authority 3. Sell the benefits to the business

30

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E

E

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Certificate In Internal Audit II – The Developing Internal Auditor

30 CPE Credits

30 CPE Credits

Course Overview

Course Overview

Course Content

The course will be particularly beneficial for those supervising assignments, lead auditors and those being asked to lead audit teams.

It is designed to challenge your thinking about the whole approach to writing and reviewing audit reports – it is targeted at both new auditors and also more experienced personnel. You will also be introduced to the new ideas in the IA profession and how to apply them.

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

This course covers everything you need to know as a newcomer to Internal Audit regarding the most effective audit practices. People are joining Internal Audit from a variety of backgrounds and the function is becoming much more operationally rather than financially based. The course will introduce you to the worldwide best practice and how to apply it.

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

What Is Internal Audit?

The professional standards How does the role differ from other assurance providers?

Audit skills The modern approach to IA Preparing for an audit The need for a risk based approach Meeting management expectations Internal Audit and the external relationship Developing team relationships The audit manual Audit interviews Audit programmes and testing The challenges of audit reporting

Who Should Attend?

• • • •

New entrants to Internal Audit Internal auditors with up to 18 months’ experience Those returning to or already working in Internal Audit who need practical guidance on the changing role of the function Personnel in other functions who need a better understanding on the modern Internal Audit role

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Practice the skills required by a modern auditor Apply the professional standards of the Institute of Internal Auditors Deliver a range of audit assignments

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

The course is designed to enable you to develop the key skills of a modern auditor – communication, teamwork, negotiation, planning and time management – to name but a few.

Audit

Certificate In Internal Audit I – Essentials Of Internal Audit

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Worldwide trends In Internal Audit How can a better understanding of the role be gained?

The role of the modern auditor The different requirements and challenges facing ia in major sectors in the GCC And MENA region Initial planning The audit manual Organising the assignment Risk based auditing Audit programmes Fieldwork techniques Use of Computer Assisted Audit Techniques (CAATs) The problems with audit reports Analysis of actual reports

Who Should Attend?

• • •

This course will be particularly useful for delegates that have previously attended the Certificate In Internal Audit I – Essentials Of Internal Audit course It will also be very beneficial to auditors or other assurance professionals who need to significantly improve their reports – as this topic is covered in depth Personnel in other functions who need a wider understanding of the modern Internal Audit role or want to improve their reports

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E

Perform a self-analysis of your skills and techniques Improve your audit manual Plan and lead assignments effectively

I

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

31

Audit

Certificate In Internal Audit III – Risk Based Auditing

Certificate In Internal Audit IV – Advanced Audit Techniques

30 CPE Credits

30 CPE Credits

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Course Overview

Audit functions that are able to focus their efforts towards the significant risk in their organisations are able to concentrate their limited resources on the issues which drive business goals and aspirations. In consequence audit plans are directed at the issues, which really matter. This course provides all the latest developments.

Furthermore, a participative approach whereby auditors and managers work together to identify, assess and control business risks significantly enhances the level of assurance and reduces the chances of nasty surprises – a huge benefit in these more difficult times.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

What is risk based audit?

The nature of risk Business risk Risk identification and evaluation The role of Internal Audit in risk facilitation Assessment of risk mitigation Risk and Internal Audit Embedding the process The Internal Audit role Strategic audit planning Tactical audit panning The converging roles of the assurance providers Planning a Risk Based Audit( RBA) The RBA Approach Relationships with the board and audit committees

• • •

An advanced and innovative auditing strategy coupled with effective implementation can greatly enhance the departmental value added and company-wide support of your auditing function.

Expertise in the more technical business areas is essential to maintain a stable foundation from which your company can effectively compete in the Middle East environment. The biggest challenges to modern Internal Audit functions will be covered during this course – including auditing your organisations reputation and brand.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Who Should Attend?

• •

Course Overview

Heads of audit, audit managers and senior auditors Auditors responsible for developing or implementing a risk based approach Other assurance professionals such as those in compliance and QA functions who are wanting to develop their risk based approach Managers and directors of business functions – to aid their knowledge of a risk based audit approach This course will be highly beneficial for delegates that have previously attended the Certificate In Internal Audit II – The Developing Internal Auditor or Certificate In Internal Audit I – Essentials Of Internal Audit

Who Should Attend?

• • • • • •

Benefits Of Attending

1. Apply the concepts and practical approaches to risk based audit 2. Advise management on the identification, mitigation and control of risks 3. Challenge management and sell the benefits of proactive risk management

32

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

Recent professional guidance and practice advisory statements The key aspects of Corporate Governance Auditing governance readiness Auditing The Risk Management (RM) process Auditing the audit committee process Continuous auditing Auditing complex business areas Auditing brand and reputation Auditing Joint Ventures (JVs) and partnerships Reviewing a current JV Or partnership Auditing outsourced contracts Auditing business continuity management Social responsibility, ethics and meeting stakeholder expectations

Senior auditors Audit managers and those about to be appointed to that role Auditors that need to audit projects, contracts or technical business areas Assurance professionals who need to assess technical issues Assurance providers that need a greater understanding of Corporate Governance This course will be beneficial as a development aid for delegates that have previously attended the Certificate In Internal Audit II – The Developing Internal Auditor course

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Assess Internal Audit’s contribution as a function Audit Corporate Governance effectiveness Audit the risk management process

I A

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Fraud And The Internal Audit Role 30 CPE Credits

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Course Overview

30 CPE Credits

This event is particularly targeted at internal auditors in organisations without a dedicated fraud team, as they have to take a much more significant role in the prevention, detection and investigation of fraud.

Course Overview

Course Content

This course is unique in that it is targeted specifically to the most senior assurance professionals – and is based on a series of round table discussions on the key aspects of a modern Internal Audit function – and the challenges faced by the ever changing world economy.

A wide range of key topics will be discussed – such as meeting the changing needs of stakeholders, developing more proactive relationships with the Audit Committee, auditing corporate social responsibility and the challenges of making successful presentations.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

The future of internal audit in the MENA region The significant changes in the Internal Audit role Meeting stakeholder expectations Benchmarking or quality assuring your IA function Recent professional guidance and practice advisory statements 2013 Proactive audit committee relationships Building world-class internal audit teams Challenges for Internal Audit risk and governance Risk management and Internal Audit Corporate Governance and the IA role Strategic audit planning Managing the audit process Working paper review Consultancy assignments

• • • • • • •

IIA guidance on the role of IA regarding fraud IIA global technology guide – fraud prevention and detection in the automated world New fraud risk questionnaire An auditor’s fraud toolkit will be provided Guidance on the use of Benford’s law – a little known but very powerful tool Fraud indicators How to use CAAT’s for fraud detection and investigation

Audit

Certificate In Internal Audit V – Leading The Internal Audit Function

Who Should Attend?

• •

Newly appointed fraud specialists Managers needing a broader understanding of how to prevent and detect fraud will also gain useful ideas

Benefits Of Attending

1. Evaluate fraud risks and learn to think like a fraudster – the only way to spot frauds 2. Identify how IA can help to prevent fraud 3. Promote an effective fraud prevention process

Who Should Attend?

• • • • •

Heads of Internal Audit Audit Managers and those about to be appointed to that role Directors responsible for Internal Audit Heads of other assurance functions such as Compliance or Quality Assurance This course is specifically for the most senior audit professionals

Benefits Of Attending

1. Benchmark your IA function against worldwide best practice 2. Make the transition from a good function to a great one 3. Quality assure your function in line with IIA requirements

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

A

E

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

33

Risk Based Auditing Of Projects And Contracts 30 CPE Credits

Audit

Course Overview

Research indicates that many project risks are identified and analysed in a random, uncoordinated way, resulting in unexpected risks arising, and the true impact of risks not being fully appreciated. This course examines how a risk based approach to auditing through the project life cycle can be introduced to facilitate the delivery of the project on time, on budget and fully meeting stakeholder needs.

Course Content • • • • • • • • •

Understanding project risk The major project risks The 10 Golden Rules of project risk management Risk identification and evaluation The Risk Based Audit (RBA) approach for projects Risk and Internal Audit RBA in practice Audit of building projects Audit of other projects (including IT projects)

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for senior auditors (including heads of audit and audit managers) with responsibility for undertaking project audit assignments. It is also designed for project and programme managers and other professionals who need to understand the risks impacting complex projects.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the concepts and practical application of a risk based approach to project review 2. Audit major projects, including joint ventures, with confidence 3. Use a risk based audit approach to identify project risks and to ensure that these are managed in such a way that more projects are able to meet their agreed objectives

34

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

d n a T S S EN E M N I E S G U A B N A M

BUSINESS and MANAGEMENT

Advanced Contract Drafting For Non-Lawyers _________________________________________________________________________

39

Advanced Presentations And Public Speaking With High Personal Impact ___________________________________________________

39

Analysing And Documenting Policies And Procedures ___________________________________________________________________

40

Balanced Scorecard Master Professional (BSMP) CertiďŹ cation Application Course (In association with Balanced Scorecard Institute)_____________

40

Balanced Scorecard Professional (BSP) Certification Boot Camp (In association with Balanced Scorecard Institute)____________________________

41

Budgeting And Forecasting For Business Professionals __________________________________________________________________

41

Business Process Modelling (In association with the George Washington University School of Business) ________________________________________

42

Certificate In Advanced Business Communications (In association with the George Washington University School of Business)______________________

42

Certificate In Advanced Business Process Analysis, Mapping And Modelling (In association with the George Washington University School of Business) _

43

Certificate In Advanced Data Analysis (In association with the George Washington University School of Business)_________________________________

44

Certificate In Board Secretarial Practice (In association with the George Washington University School of Business)_______________________________

44

Certificate In Building An Innovative Organisation (In association with the George Washington University School of Business)______________________

45

Certificate In Building High Performance Boards (In association with the George Washington University School of Business)________________________

45

Certificate In Commercial Negotiation (In Association with Institute of Sales & Marketing and Management (ISMM))_______________________________

46

Certificate In Delivering Service Excellence (In association with the George Washington University School of Business)____________________________

46

Certificate In Essential Business Process Analysis, Mapping And Modelling (In association with the George Washington University School of Business) __

47

Certificate In Essential Data Analysis (In association with the George Washington University School of Business)__________________________________

47

Certificate In Financial Monitoring And Analysis For Business Professionals (In association with the George Washington University School of Business)__

48

Certificate In Governance Risk Compliance (GRC) (In association with the George Washington University School of Business) _______________________

48

Certificate In Influencing And Persuasion Skills (In association with the George Washington University School of Business)_________________________

49

Certificate In Leadership Effectiveness For Managers (In association with the George Washington University School of Business)____________________

49

Certificate In Management And Leadership I___________________________________________________________________________

50

Certificate In Management And Leadership II__________________________________________________________________________

50

Certificate In Management And Leadership III __________________________________________________________________________

51

Certificate In Operations Management (In association with the George Washington University School of Business) _______________________________

51

Certificate in Organisation Performance Improvement (In association with the George Washington University School of Business)___________________

52

CertiďŹ cate In People Management Skills (In association with the George Washington University School of Business)______________________________

52

Certificate In Performance Development (In association with the George Washington University School of Business)______________________________

53

Certificate In Quality Management And Business Performance (In association with the George Washington University School of Business) ____________

53

Certificate in Root Cause Analysis For Business Professionals (In association with the George Washington University School of Business)______________

54

Certificate In Strategic Business Intelligence Implementation (In association with the George Washington University School of Business)_____________

54

Certificate In Strategic Business Planning (In association with the George Washington University School of Business) _____________________________

55

Certificate In Strategic Direction And Leadership _______________________________________________________________________

55

Certificate In Strategy Execution (In association with the George Washington University School of Business)_____________________________________

56

Certificate In Strategic Finance For Non-Finance Managers (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ___________________

56

Certificate In Strategic Internal Communications (In association with the George Washington University School of Business) ______________________________

57

Certificate In Strategic Management And Leadership I___________________________________________________________________

57

Certificate In Strategic Management And Leadership II___________________________________________________________________

58

Certificate In Strategic Thinking And Planning (In association with the George Washington University School of Business)__________________________

58

Certificate In Streamlining Business Processes For Improved Profitability (In association with the George Washington University School of Business)____

59

Certificate In Team Leading_________________________________________________________________________________________

59

Certified Business Analyst Professional - CBAP _________________________________________________________________________

60

Certified KPI Professional (In association with The KPI Institute)___________________________________________________________________

60

Certified KPI Practitioner (In association with The KPI Institute)___________________________________________________________________

61

Corporate Ethics, Governance And Social Responsibility _________________________________________________________________

61

Business and Management

Table Of Contents

37

Business and Management 38

Corporate Responsibility Management And Reporting __________________________________________________________________

62

Contract Drafting For Non-Lawyers___________________________________________________________________________________

62

Crisis And Emergency Management _________________________________________________________________________________

63

Designing And Developing An Effective Policy And Procedure System ______________________________________________________

63

Developing And Implementing A Successful CSR Strategy _______________________________________________________________

64

Effective Knowledge Management __________________________________________________________________________________

64

Effective Legal Writing For Non-Lawyers ______________________________________________________________________________

65

Effectively Managing And Implementing Policies And Procedures _________________________________________________________

65

Emotional Intelligence ____________________________________________________________________________________________

66

Financial Skills For The Board _______________________________________________________________________________________

66

High Performance Leadership For The New Manager (In association with the George Washington University School of Business) ____________________

67

ILM Endorsed Customer Service Manager (In association with Institute of Leadership and Management)_____________________________________

67

ILM Endorsed Effective Business Management Report Writing (In association with Institute of Leadership and Management)_____________________

68

ILM Endorsed Effective Business Writing (In association with Institute of Leadership and Management)______________________________________

68

ILM Endorsed Essential Management Skills For New Managers ____________________________________________________________

69

ILM Endorsed First Line Management Skills ____________________________________________________________________________

69

ILM Endorsed Function Leadership (In association with Institute of Leadership and Management)___________________________________________

70

ILM Endorsed Management Skills For Middle Managers (In association with Institute of Leadership and Management) _________________________

70

ILM Endorsed Organisational Leadership (In association with Institute of Leadership and Management)______________________________________

71

ILM Endorsed Self Leadership (In association with Institute of Leadership and Management)_______________________________________________

71

ILM Endorsed Supervisory Management Skills _________________________________________________________________________

72

ILM Endorsed Team Leadership (In association with Institute of Leadership and Management)______________________________________________

72

Influential Presentations And Communication Skills _____________________________________________________________________

73

International Business Etiquette And Protocol _________________________________________________________________________

73

Leadership For Emerging Leaders (In association with Bond University)____________________________________________________________

74

Leadership Skills For The Public Sector ________________________________________________________________________________

74

Master’s/Associate’s Certificate In Business Analysis _____________________________________________________________________

75

Business Data Modeling _____________________________________________________________________________________

75

Business Process Modeling Management_______________________________________________________________________

76

Developing Use Cases_______________________________________________________________________________________

76

Facilitation Techniques For Requirements Development___________________________________________________________

77

Foundations Of Business Analysis______________________________________________________________________________

77

How To Gather And Document User Requirements________________________________________________________________

78

Negotiation Skills For Project Managers_________________________________________________________________________

78

Strategic Enterprise Analysis__________________________________________________________________________________

79

Maximising Benefits Delivered Through Change (In association with the George Washington University School of Business________________________

79

Measuring And Managing Government Performance Management ________________________________________________________

80

Professional Certificate In Contract Negotiation And Administration (In association with Bond University)________________________________

80

Project Management For Non Project Managers ________________________________________________________________________

81

Strategic People And Business Leadership _____________________________________________________________________________

81

Strategic Planning For The Public Sector ______________________________________________________________________________

82

The Five Day MBA ________________________________________________________________________________________________

82

The EFQM Assessor Training – Assessed Version (In association with EFQM) _______________________________________________________

83

The EFQM Line Manager Development Path (In association with EFQM)__________________________________________________________

83

Journey To Excellence (J2E) __________________________________________________________________________________

84

Leaders For Excellence (L4E) __________________________________________________________________________________

84

Women And Leadership (In association with the George Washington University School of Business)___________________________________________

85

Advanced Presentations And Public Speaking With High Personal Impact

Course Overview

Course Overview

This informative course is designed for managers who need to negotiate contracts, terms and discounts with outside suppliers of goods and services or manage contractor performance. The course will be taught in an interactive workshop/seminar format. It will be a hands-on course. Delegates will be expected to review on their own time after class materials provided by the trainer so that they can come to class prepared. Delegates will also be asked to provide draft contracts to be reviewed in class by the group.

It will also guide you through a step by step process to understand, draft and negotiate a successful contract and at the same time ensure that the interests of your organisation are well protected and also to strengthen your expertise to build sound contractual relationships.

The course format will entail team review and comment on the class materials

This advanced course aims to help you to enhance your image, your ability to speak publicly, convince and be impressive for an excellent response. You will focus on presenting with high personal impact.

Course Content • • • • • • • •

Who Should Attend?

•

Course Content • • •

Framework for sound contractual relationships Review, understand and negotiate effective contracts Hands-on collective review, mark-up and correction of draft contracts

Lifting our personal barriers to success Communication at its best – main principles, tools and techniques Managing content Managing the presentation media Designing and building the presentation session – structure Managing yourself – the presenter Managing the audience Handling objections and questions constructively and confidently

• • •

Sales and marketing managers – for engaging the customers and wider external audience Finance mangers – communicating results, tough decisions, proposals and processes Operations managers/business unit mangers for strategy and better ways to succeed All managers to convince internally and externally for business growth and agreement to action

Business and Management

Advanced Contract Drafting For NonLawyers

Who Should Attend?

This informative brand new course is designed for managers who need to negotiate contracts, terms and conditions with customers, vendors or suppliers of goods and services, or who frequently enter into management, licensing or joint venture relationships. This will include purchasing, sales or marketing managers, and supervisors and staff with moderate experience in contracts, negotiation or purchasing.

It will also be of benefit to those who have previously taken Contract Drafting for Non-Lawyers and who wish to enhance their experience with an advanced-level course.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Captivate people and generate positive responses from them 2. Understand your own communication strengths, and enhance them using tools and techniques for stronger communication 3. Unleash the natural power of your voice and expressions to manage objections and questions reassuringly and confidently

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Understand the meaning and significance of common contract clauses Recognise the impact of different legal systems on contract drafting and interpretation Identify essential contract clauses, terms and conditions

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

A

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

39

Business and Management

Analysing And Documenting Policies And Procedures Course Overview

By attending this course, you will learn how to create realistic policies and procedures, allowing your organisation to operate effectively, efficiently and with reduced risk. This includes establishing the scope of policies and procedures using the MoSCoW rules, which are a method to ensure that the high priority requirements are identified and met, whilst lesser needs are also taken into account, where time and resources allow. You will also learn how to create policy and procedure documents in formats that are recognised as good practice and to write clearly and accurately.

The Organisational Context Of Policies And Procedures Establishing Requirements For Policies And Procedures Designing Forms And Managing Them Establishing A Format For Documents Developing An Appropriate Writing Style Managing The Development Of Documents Methods For Promulgating Policies And Procedures Managing Changes Arising From New Policies Implementing New Policies And Procedures Managing Revisions To Documents Dealing With Online Documents Using The Internet, Intranets And Extranets

Course Content •

•

Learn advanced techniques for building and implementing a Balanced Scorecard performance management system Learn advanced change management aspects of the balanced scorecard journey Learn facilitation and coaching skills necessary to lead and participate in team workshops Learn how to do communications strategic planning Learn how to overcome the ten most common challenges to success, and practice building a scorecard application under the eye of an experience certifying balanced scorecard trainer Develop a full BSC using the Nine Steps to SuccessTM stage by stage, throughout the week culminating in a Presentation on Day five as part of the course assessment and exam

Who Should Attend?

Benefits Of Attending

1. Describe how policies and procedures enable organisations to turn visions into reality and decide the best approach to creating policies and procedures, including setting formats and key measures 2. Establish the scope of policies and procedures, using MoSCoW rules to ensure that all requirements are met and develop clear document formats and an appropriate writing style 3. Assess potential changes to policies and procedures, creating an impact analysis to demonstrate the effects, a benefit case for the changes and a risk management plan

= Earned Training Hours

This is a required course for Balanced Scorecard practitioners who want to achieve the highest level of certification – Master Professional Certification – from the Balanced Scorecard Institute. This course is designed for students who have completed the Balanced Scorecard Professional Certification.

• •

This course is suitable for anyone who wishes to gain a working knowledge of how to prepare policies and procedures. This includes strategists, business analysts, HR practitioners, supply chain managers, IT managers and specialists, technical authors, general managers and administrative employees.

24 Hrs

Course Overview

•

Who Should Attend?

40

(In association with Balanced Scorecard Institute)

•

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • •

Balanced Scorecard Master Professional (BSMP) Certification Application Course

I

This course is recommended for executives, managers, planners and analysts who are seeking the best practical ideas in improving organizational performance, and who want to achieve the highest level of certification.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Comprehensive approaches to strategic planning, strategic management, performance measurement and target setting, initiative prioritization, performance information systems, and program evaluation 2. The Institute’s Nine Step methodology for building and implementing Balanced Scorecard (BSC) planning and management systems 3. Communications strategy development and change management aspects of the Balanced Scorecard journey

A

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Budgeting And Forecasting For Business Professionals

Course Overview

Course Overview

(In association with Balanced Scorecard Institute) The Institute’s Nine Steps to SuccessTM a framework is the basis of the course, where the emphasis is on shared participant experiences, lessons learned, and best practice. Small-group exercises are used for each step in the framework to reinforce the lectures, and you are encouraged to bring your organization’s strategic planning material to share with the class and receive instructor feedback offline as time permits.

Course Content

Course Content • • • • • • • • • •

Building the Balanced Scorecard Getting your scorecard on track Evaluation to assessment Advanced strategic foundations development Advanced objective and strategy map development Advanced performance management – measure what matters Measurement definition, implementation and visualization Strategic initiative prioritization and management Advanced scorecard alignment and cascading Managing and sustaining a Balanced Scorecard

Who Should Attend?

This course is recommended for executives, managers, planners and analysts who are part of a Balanced Scorecard development team, and are seeking the best practical ideas for improving organizational performance.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Understand the key concepts of the Balanced Scorecard, and why it is gaining so much attention in corporate, non profit, and governmental organizations Learn a systematic, nine-step methodology for building and implementing the Balanced Scorecard, based on the performance management theory developed at Harvard University and the Institute’s international Balanced Scorecard consulting experience Receive a Performance Scorecard ToolkitTM with worksheets for each step of the methodology, and a CD with course and reference material

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

The course brings forth an exciting opportunity of demystifying the process of budgeting and forecasting, starting from its conceptualisation to its implementation and management. Delegates will acquire ‘application ready’ knowledge on the various functional dimensions and gain insight into how decisions affect the ‘bottomline’.

I A

• • • •

Initiating the budgeting process Deep diving into capital budgeting Deep diving into operational budgets Integrating budgeting with control and management systems

Who Should Attend?

The course will be useful for: • Non finance executives at various functional divisions responsible for developing and presenting budgets • Finance executives responsible for collating divisional budget information and consolidating them into a budget • Internal compliance executives responsible for ensuring observance to budgets

Business and Management

Balanced Scorecard Professional (BSP) Certification Boot Camp

Benefits Of Attending

1. Make effective business decisions that affect the bottom-line by strategically implementing best practices in budgeting and forecasting activities 2. Improve planning, budgeting, and forecasting for investments with the most opportunity. Use the right tools to analyse data so that you produce specific and targeted analysis

E I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

41

Business and Management

Business Process Modelling

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

This interactive and engaging seminar will give you a good end-toend understanding of how to create business process models and use these to identify improvements in your organisation.

You will learn how to create a model of your cross functional processes, to identify handovers and interfaces between departments and external entities, such as customers, then drilling down to define the individual processes and procedures that underpin them, before defining the various business events that the processes support and identifying the process triggers and outputs, as well as the business rules that determine how they operate.

Finally, you will learn how to analyse activities, identify roles and responsibilities and objectives, as well as providing alternative pathways for cases where the process parameters cannot be achieved, so at the end of the seminar, you will have been introduced to the skills necessary to create a process pack.

Course Content

Business Process Management Overview Business Process Modelling Taxonomy Building The Top-Down And Cross Functional Process Models Creating Process Flow Diagrams Documenting Tasks Assessing Current Performance to Enable Required Improvements Moving through the Delta State Business Process Modelling Simulation

• • • • • • • •

Who Should Attend

Business Process teams, Business Planners, Process Analysts, Managers, Financial Analysts, Strategic Planners, Quality Managers and professionals, IT Specialists, Business Analysts and IT Architects

2.

3.

42

Create organisational business process models and produce cross functional process flows Draw individual process and write up procedures Define business events, process rules, triggers and outputs and analyse the discrete activities within a business process

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

The skills used by these professionals can be used in every business situation you can think of. Use the advanced communication skills that specialists employ and increase your chances of success in all of your business interactions.

At the Advanced Business Communication Masterclass, led by hostage negotiator and former detective Richard Mullender, you will develop your skill set and the ability to shift from ‘unconscious competence’ to ‘conscious excellence’ whenever you need a result.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • •

Breaking down the myths of communication Conversation encouragers Communication/conversation rules Social rules Learning the core skills used by great communicators Listening – the first part of great communication The power of language and effective questioning – the second part of great communication Preparation and planning Communications Clinic Your challenges diagnosed and treated

Who Should Attend?

This advanced skill development masterclass is designed for people who want to dramatically improve their workplace communication, taking it to a level they didn’t know existed. It will benefit everyone involved in negotiations, interviewing, managing staff and selling. The core communication skills that you will learn can be applied in any situation.

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending 1.

Certificate In Advanced Business Communications

I A

1. Increase your interpersonal effectiveness in every business situation by using advanced communication skills that build trust and rapport 2. Deepen your understanding of your customers’ needs and achieve improved business results by discovering powerful listening and language skills which uncover people’s underlying values and beliefs 3. Get the results you want every time you negotiate, interview, manage staff or sell, through deep understanding of the other party’s needs

A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

This course provides clarity on what works. It provides you with the advanced BPM knowledge required to accomplish your professional skill and performance objectives in the evolving world of Business Process Management (BPM). This course is square aligned with the Association of Business Process Management Professionals’ Common Body of Knowledge (ABPMP BPM CBOK), and details the knowledge required to effectively measure and monitor process performance for true effectiveness. It helps you move beyond continuous improvement and deliver end-to-end process transformation while fostering a culture of process awareness that embraces continuous change. You will leave the course with the knowledge of how to bring about a Process Management Center of Excellence. You will be immersed in how to apply the enabling BPM technologies and understand the promise they hold. You will gain the confidence of being equipped to effectively and professionally practice the craft of BPM.

• • • • • • • •

Business Systems Analyst Manager or Director of Business Performance Improvement Manager or Director of Business Process Innovation Process Owner Process Officer Quality Assurance Analysts and Manager Enterprise Architect Business Planner

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Gain understanding about organisational performance measurement – what to measure and how to measure it?

Bring about sustainable process transformation to take your organisation beyond continuous improvement Foster an organisational culture of process and change by using the right vehicles and paths

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Business and Management

Certificate In Advanced Business Process Analysis, Mapping And Modelling

Process performance management What to measure How to measure what should be measured Process transformation Moving beyond continuous improvement Building a culture of change Building and sustaining transformation Process organisation The process driven organisation Organisational structures and process management roles Process governance and governing bodies Enterprise process management Process maturity and the enterprise Process enablement, governance, and the BPM roadmap The Center Of Excellence (COE) and BPM integration BPM technology The BPM technology journey BPM technology as an enabler Process orchestration and other visions

Who Should Attend?

Anyone who is responsible for how an organisation gets things done will benefit from attending this course. Some job titles include: • Business Process Analyst • Business Process Engineer • Business Process Designer • Business Process Architect • Business Process Manager • Business Process Consultant • Business Process Owner • Business Analyst

= Earned Training Hours

A

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

43

Business and Management

Certificate In Advanced Data Analysis

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

Course Overview

Most organisations are trying to make more out of the data they collect to improve their business results and increase revenue.

However, having quality data alone is not going to satisfy the need for outstanding decision making. Without analysing the data, the decision making is not going to go anywhere. The emergence of a variety of analytical techniques and methods has significantly enhanced decision making. This course covers some of the newer analytical techniques available.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • •

Advanced types of data analysis Traditional data analysis techniques Correlation and regression analysis Sensitivity and linear programming Box techniques Neural nets – better than statistics?

Decision trees Influence diagrams Decision structures Core semantic analysis Cyber metrics – a quantitative view of semantics Predictive text analysis

Benefits Of Attending

1. Learn advanced analytical techniques and methods designed to focus on remediation of problems and decisions, and apply the information to solve key management issues 2. Discover insights into the issues involving risk, sensitivity, influence in decision making and identifying patterns of performance 3. Acquire capabilities and skills to analyse various aspects of business performance and apply the appropriate actions to reach solutions

= Earned Training Hours

Course Outline • •

• • • • • • • • •

This course is designed for professionals who need to make strategic decisions based on the use of data, such as business analysts, data analysts, sales analysts, performance analysts, strategic planning analysts, corporate business planners and operational analysts.

Auditors that are involved in operational analysis, engineers involved in project planning and analysis, and managers that use quantitative decision making techniques will also benefit from the course.

30 Hrs

This course is designed to introduce you to the key concepts and practical elements of performing the governance management of your organisation. It covers a wide range of activities from annual reporting and meetings, to Board and committee meetings and events, regulatory compliance, and daily dilemmas and practices. This is a four day interactive course that will create knowledge by performing and assessing key activities in groups and as individuals.

•

Who Should Attend?

44

Certificate In Board Secretarial Practice

A

Role of the company secretary Legal requirements – company law and Corporate Governance codes and framework Advisory and administrative interaction with the Board and management Identifying and dealing with dilemmas and difficult directors Company secretary toolkit – calendars, agendas, minutes Board documents and processes Board meetings and shareholder meetings AGM practices and preparation Regulatory compliance issues Implementing a Corporate Governance framework Latest developments in Corporate Governance New issues for Boards – control frameworks, strategy, risk, remuneration, disclosure, fraud prevention

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for: • Appointed and aspiring Company/Board Secretaries or Governance Managers • Board Directors who sponsor reform and improvements of governance practices • Managers responsible for performing or assessing governance procedures, such as CFO, Internal Audit, Investor Relations, Risk Managers • Managers and staff responsible for supporting governance roles and corporate documentation activities

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the key role played by the Board Secretary/ Governance Manager for Board support and effective organisational practices 2. Learn key practices, policies and procedures to ensure smooth and seamless planning, operation and follow up of AGMs, Board meetings, regulatory reporting and other key corporate events 3. Understand how to practically introduce and maintain a sound governance regime in your organisation

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

Course One: World-Class Innovation And Co-creation Strategies Innovation must be sought internally, requiring a motivated and engaged workforce with systems in place externally through proven crowdsourcing techniques which will be discussed in detail during the course. Collaboration with suppliers and competitors are key ingredients in building a robust innovation roadmap to ensure your success in the future. This course is designed to cover all the key aspects of building an innovative organisation and will leverage Fortune 500 case studies, videos, interviews and the direct and varied experience of the trainer.

Course Two: Building A Comprehensive Business Model for Innovation Countless successful businesses today are leveraging innovative business models, creating entirely new industries and in doing so are redefining how value from the consumer’s perspective is created. The scale and speed at which innovative business models are transforming the business world today are unprecedented. It’s critical for business leaders to understand and to methodically address Business Model Innovation. Building a comprehensive Business Model Masterclass will provide you with the knowledge and toolset, using a single Business Model Canvas, to systematically invent, design and implement new business models , allowing your company to deliver value to your clients and to society in the future.

Who Should Attend?

• • • • • •

Top Management: General Manager, MD, CEO, COO, CTO Middle Management: Head of Engineering, Head of R&D, Head of Design, Head of Marketing, Head of Sales Leaders who wish to drive Innovation right through their business Executives who have direct responsibility for Innovation (CTO, R&D, Head of Innovation) Senior leaders/managers who are involved in innovating with suppliers, customers, in new markets Marketing Executives who are working on new product innovations

Benefits Of Attending Both Courses

1. Learn about world-class innovation and co-creation strategies, and their potential for cash generation, rapid product go-to-market, service expansion, customer engagement and retention 2. Evaluate strategies that generate the greatest return for your business and develop a comprehensive Innovation Strategy spanning the entire ecosystem of your business while ensuring a constant stream of innovation 3. Understand the steps involved in bringing multidisciplinary teams together to share knowledge, to challenge status quo and invent the future through prototypes, customer pilots, and other approaches. Apply these steps as soon as you return to your organization 4. Know how to implement these strategies in your business in a rapid and high impact way 5. Assess tools available to assist in making the innovation journey a successful one

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

Certificate In Building High Performance Boards (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

This course covers a range of entities from listed, government owned, family and not-for-profit. It is designed to create a forum for information sharing, discussion, debate and development of new thought processes and tools for the Board. Delegates will progress through a Board lifecycle which is representative of a common Board or Director’s experience, from formation/renewal, performance, assessment and succession. .

Course Outline • • • • •

Corporate Governance Board appointment/renewal Board performance Board evaluation Board succession

Who Should Attend?

• • • • • • • •

Chief Executives Company Secretaries Current and prospective Board members Board Chairmen Investors and professionals dealing with venture funds Legal and Compliance Executives Audit and Finance Executives NGO and Government Executives

Business and Management

Certificate In Building An Innovative Organisation

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Review the impact of international events, regulatory and industry reports, and harmonisation debates Debate special issues regarding family companies, state owned enterprises, nominee directors, etc Engage with other directors and governance professionals in a workshop environment which tests assumptions, knowledge and the practical impact of governance change

A

18 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

45

Business and Management

Certificate In Commercial Negotiation (In Association with Institute of Sales & Marketing and Management (ISMM)) Course Overview

The art of negotiation is to aim for a win-win outcome. This course covers the three phase model, establishing and using trading currencies, fall back options and your settlement range, signaling and proposing, gaining commitment and tactical team roles.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Definition of negotiation and the 3 Stage Model Negotiating styles and characteristics of effective negotiators 4 levels of communication Verbal behavioural analysis – theory and practical exercises Advanced questioning techniques 10 key negotiating lessons Combating power ploys, tactics and establishing rapport Proposing planning guide /making the first offer Using, recognising and rewarding signalling behaviours to move forward Dealing with objections and pricing issues Movement and concessions checklist Negotiating across cultural boundaries – the SPECIES model Using creative thinking to get to win-win Paired negation

Who Should Attend?

• • • • • • •

Business Development Managers Senior executives/Entrepreneurs Sales Managers/Sales Negotiators/Key Account Managers Sales/Marketing Consultants/ Marketing Managers Channel Managers / Buyers, purchasing staff HR Staff/Recruiters Government Officials

Benefits Of Attending

1. Gain an understanding of the communications skills, characteristics and behaviours used worldwide by the most successful negotiators 2. Practice the key planning elements including determining both parties trading currencies, setting tactical roles, setting objectives, setting your settlement range, setting backstops, and identifying common ground 3. Understand and gain hands on experience of when and how to use, proposing, signalling, “if – then” trading and gaining commitment

46

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

A

Certificate In Delivering Service Excellence (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Course Overview

This intensive course will be divided in five modules reflecting the five stages of service excellence: • Assessment and base lining • vision and strategies • values and culture • alignment and execution • Reinforcement and continuous improvement

Course Content • • • • •

Stage one - assessment and base lining Stage two - vision and strategies Stage three - values and culture Stage four - alignment and execution Stage five - reinforcement and continuous improvement

Who Should Attend

Customer Services Managers/Directors/Executives/Representatives/ Supervisors • Customer Relations Managers • Marketing Directors/Managers • Sales Directors/Managers/Officers • Service Quality Managers/Directors • Client Relations Managers/Directors

Benefits Of Attending

1. Present a business case for developing a culture of service excellence, build plans to align the company towards delivering service excellence and to execute those plans 2. Assess your current competitive strategy and establish a base line to monitor improvement and create a vision for service excellence and develop strategies to delive 3. Develop approaches to reinforce the culture of service excellence and continuous improvement

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Certificate In Essential Data Analysis

Course Overview

Course Overview

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

This course provides clarity on the fundamental knowledge for creating positive change in your organisation. It provides you with the essential knowledge required to meet your career knowledge and skill objectives in the confusing world of Business Process Management (BPM). This course is square aligned with the Association of Business Process Management Professionals’ Common Body of Knowledge (ABPMP BPM CBOK), and details the knowledge required to effectively document and analyse processes. This course also discusses the effective methods for implementing and managing change. You will leave with the confidence to effectively and professionally practice the essential objectives of BPM.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Foundations of BPM and guide to the CBOK BPM: an overview BPM and the CBOK: a guided tour Business process management BPM core concepts BPM lifecycle management Process maturity, technology, and executive sponsorship Process mapping and modelling approaches and methods Mapping and modelling techniques and tools Process analysis Rationale and preparations for process analysis Performing the analysis Business rules and completing the analysis Process design Prerequisites for effective design Designing a set of possibilities Change management and model simulation

Who Should Attend?

Anyone who is responsible for how an organisation gets things done will benefit from attending this course. Some job titles include: • Business Process Analyst • Business Process Engineer • Business Process Designer • Business Process Architect • Business Process Manager • Business Process Consultant • Business Process Owner • Business Analyst • Business Systems Analyst • Manager or Director of Business Performance Improvement • Manager or Director of Business Process Innovation • Process Owner • Process Officer • Quality Assurance Analysts and Manager • Enterprise Architect • Business Planner.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

This course will help delegates put the ideas and concepts of data analysis and presentation into effective use in their enterprises.

Concepts of corporate measures such as critical success factors, key performance indicators, pulse points and function/process performance will be covered. The methods needed to make these ideas definitive will be discussed in detail. Concepts such as measures development, statistical interpretations, strategic data analysis, business intelligence and scenarios will be discussed as relevant to the type and extent of information required for decision making.

Techniques such as decision mapping will be introduced as the context for decision-making and measures.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • •

Data analysis in the enterprise An overview of business statistics Acquisition and organisation of data methods of data presentation Strategic enterprise direction and data analysis Strategic data analysis for business and competitive structure Enterprise performance management – measuring business activities Data mining – looking for the few gems in the pile Enterprise financial analysis Decision making under uncertainty – techniques Marketing data analysis – competitors, consumers and the economy Operational data

Business and Management

Certificate In Essential Business Process Analysis, Mapping And Modelling

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for professionals who need to report on business performance, quality, marketing trends, comparative business performance within and between businesses, production and process measurement. It will also be useful for those who are scorecarding the business and who need to use financial and quantitative methods.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Successfully link efficient data analysis to improved business performance 2. Acquire the data needed to assist in making informed judgements and decisions 3. Assess strategic competitive intelligence and enhance competitive advantage

Understand the evolution of BPM: the methods and frameworks, the vital link between BPM and organisational effectiveness Learn to identify, document, map and/or model processes Effectively analyse processes to develop comprehensive process understanding and documentation

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E

E

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

47

Business and Management

Certificate In Financial Monitoring And Analysis For Business Professionals (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

This course is is all about evaluating the actual financial performance of an organisation, against what was originally planned and seeking explanations for any deviations in such performance in the process.

It will help you make some sense of the financial maze in order to become critical consumers of financial information. This will lead to a better understanding of your performance and improve your decision making with impact on the bottom line.

Course Content • • • • • • • • •

Getting To Grips With The Basic Concepts Presentation Of Financial Statements For Individual Companies Presentation Of Financial Statements For A Group Of Companies Preparing And Computing Ratio Analysis Reporting And Evaluating The Financial Performance Of An Organisation Using CORE Analysis Understanding Cost Behaviour Perform Basic Variance Analysis Advanced Variance Analysis Evaluating Departmental Performance

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for senior and middle managers who are involved in managing investment, profit or cost centres for their organisation and therefore have an interest in evaluating the overall financial performance achieved by the function for which they are responsible: • • •

Business Managers who are responsible for a functional department with control over budgets but who have had limited training in finance and accounting Managing Directors, General Managers, Vice Presidents and Senior Department Managers, Functional Managers and Divisional Managers with direct responsibility for a cost, profit or investment centre

Benefits Of Attending

1. Gain in depth understanding of financial statements and how to interpret their results 2. Develop analysis of financial performance of the organisation and/ or function of financial statements 3. Undertake a variance analysis and provide explanations for deviations from planned performance

48

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

Certificate In Governance Risk Compliance (GRC) (In association with the George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

Many organisations continue to face difficulty arising from fragmentation across risk, compliance and assurance activities that are integral to the GRC environment. This course provides a common approach to risk identification and assessment that is driven from a strategic level while ensuring an effective approach to GRC that is aligned to the organisational strategy.

This certificate covers an understanding of globally accepted GRC frameworks and how they can be applied to drive higher levels of business performance and improved short, medium and long-term business sustainability. The course also focuses on how GRC aspects can be incorporated into business management environment to further improve organisational performance.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • •

The fundamental concepts, guiding principles and content elements of GRC frameworks Enhancing business processes and systems that support integrated governance and risk management, and improve business performance levels Developing codes of good governance practice Assessing your business environment to identify material strategic risks The fundamental aspects relevant to enterprise risk management Economic aspects that influence business sustainability Environmental aspects that influence business sustainability Social aspects that influence business sustainability Corporate governance and good citizenship The Global Reporting Initiative’s sustainability reporting guidelines Enhancing organisational governance using an integrated reporting framework

Who Should Attend

While this course is designed for professionals in audit, risk management and compliance, it is also suitable for business leaders, and Members of Board. This course will benefit Enterprise Risk Managers, PMO Managers, Risk And Quality Control Managers, Senior Audit Managers, Risk Officers, Product Control Managers, Compliance Managers, Value Managers, Business Strategy Managers and managers addressing the complex external and internal influences of businesses that need to ensure a balance between governance, risk management and compliance.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand how an integrated approach toward GRC supports business strategy and sustainability 2. Apply business practices that support long-term sustainability based on an understanding of the key principles of governance frameworks 3. Improve business performance by implementing systems and structures that support effective risk management 4. Formulate meaningful reports that promote compliance within your organisation 5. Adopt effective methods to ensure that GRC is strategically integrated and aligned

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

Persuasiveness is one of the most important skills and when applied correctly, can be of an extreme advantage in every aspect of life, be it a matter of business or even a social issue. In this course you will review the research conducted by experts on influencing and persuasion and learn how to use their work to improve your persuasive powers to become better negotiators within the workforce. You will have the opportunity to practice creating a positive first impression, and discuss essential techniques used to persuade your colleagues, your clients and even your boss.

Empowered with high-impact negotiation skills this course will enable you to immediately put your newly improved persuasive techniques to practice upon returning to work. This practical and interactive workshop will send you home full of ideas to try and the confidence to succeed.

Course Outline • • • • • • • • •

Establishing Credibility Elevator Pitch Communicating And Persuading Using The Right Media World Experts In Persuasion And Influence Cialdini’s Six Laws Of Influence And Persuasion Knowing Yourself – Persuading Others Creative Thinking Persuasive Presentations Selling Yourself – Elevator Pitch

Who Should Attend

This course is targeted at a broad audience who wishes to improve personal powers of influence and persuasion. It is ideal for all managers, newly appointed team leaders or supervisors and senior managers who have operational responsibility for a defined area of activity. This course is applicable for organisations from any sector: service, commercial, industrial, manufacturing or hospitality

Benefits Of Attending

1. Apply the six key rules of persuasion effectively when dealing with teams, departments, clients and all the people you interact with 2. Adopt persuasion techniques used by world experts to suit your needs 3. Raise performance levels within your team/organisation 4. Influence your boss/senior management with your improved communication style and non-verbal communication skills 5. Advocate persuasive messages when using the correct media: face to face, telephone or email

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

Certificate In Leadership Effectiveness For Managers (In association with the George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

The course will focus on supervision and management skills – from self-management to recruitment, performance management, effective communication, the basics of project management and finance, building effective teams, strategic customer service and conflict resolution. It is a course dedicated to building a solid foundation for your development and equipping you with tools and techniques to supervise and manage your team effectively and thus contributing to your organisation’s goals.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Knowing yourself Managerial leadership Recruitment, selection and retention Effective communication –Is it just “common sense”?

Performance management Building effective high performance teams Introduction to project management Introduction to financial management Managing in a customer-centric organisation Problem-solving and decision-making Change management Conflict resolution Action planning

Business and Management

Certificate In Influencing And Persuasion Skills

Who Should Attend?

Line Managers, Supervisors, Team Leaders, Project Leaders, Shift Leaders, Trainee Managers, Assistant Managers and any executives without formal management training will benefit from this course.

Benefits Of Attending

For The Manager 1. Recognise, harness, direct and develop your skills to successfully take on team leader/first line manager roles and to establish the groundwork for you to take on future middle management roles 2. Learn about yourself, how you interact with and manage others, and gain a broad perspective of the imperatives of your organisation 3. Discover how to step up to the next challenge in a positive, proactive way For The Organisation 1. Mould emerging talent into excellent key managers for the future 2. Build your managers’ management and leadership skills and expertise to take them to the pinnacle of their careers

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

49

Business and Management

Certificate In Management And Leadership I

Certificate In Management And Leadership II

Course Overview

Course Overview

14 Credits

14 Credits

This Certificate Management And Leadership I is designed to develop personal management capabilities, make effective use of information in decision-making and the development of the skills in managing people. It includes 2 highly informative and practical modules: • Managing And Building Interviews • Management Report Writing

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Plan and structure a formal interview and get the information you need to select the right candidate Use a number of questioning techniques to uncover information Create a favourable image of your company by promoting the position with the right applicants Create a procedure and practice for selection interviewing which will ensure you are likely to choose the most appropriate person Maintain and enhance your organisation’s reputation by using best practice methods Determine the purpose, goal , and audience matrix for the reports Identify the sources of data and information for the report Evaluate the validity of data and information content and context to match the report goals Create charts and graphs appropriate to the central point of the report Understand the various report type formats to match the report objectives Choose the correct analysis method for the required data and information Distinguish the appropriate rhetorical organisation style for the body of the report Assemble comprehensive, concise, and useful glossaries for reports Write compelling recommendations and impact statements

Who Should Attend?

This Certificate Management And Leadership I is designed for junior managers, helps to grow professional management skills. It will be beneficial to all team leaders or junior managers involved in the interviewing process and requested to produce business management reports.

This Certificate Management And Leadership II is designed to improve personal management capabilities through effective decision-making and strategic leadership.

It includes 2 highly informative and practical modules: • Information Based Decision Making • Leadership Practice

Course Content • • • • • •

• •

Identify and select sources of data and information Analyse and present information to support decision making Communicate the results of information analysis and decisions List, describe, compare and contrast the role and functions of a leader and a manager Outline the development of thinking about leadership and human motivation, Use the Tanenbaum Schmidt continuum to illustrate the spectrum of management and leadership behaviours and explore current personal leadership style and how it may be developed to improve motivations and deliver superior results Describe a range of leadership and management styles and explain how situations may influence style and outcomes Outline the process of developing and deploying organisational vision, values and ethics.

Who Should Attend?

This Certificate Management And Leadership II is designed for middle managers and those aspiring to senior management who want to develop key skills such as managing resources and information management.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Identify and select sources of data and information, analyse and present information to support decision making 2. Communicate the results of information analysis and decisions 3. Understand and apply leadership principles and styles that support organisational values

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the contexts of an interview and the skills of interview techniques 2. Understand the purpose and the construction of management reporting 3. Understand the collection and analysis of data and information required for a written management report

50

36 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I

E I

36 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Certificate In Operations Management (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

14 Credits

Course Overview

This Certificate Management And Leadership III gives you a broader knowledge of management skills while focusing on the specific areas appropriate to you and your workplace.

It includes 2 highly informative and practical modules: • Managing Change Process • Management Systems and Structures

Course Overview

Course Content

Course Content

• • • • • • •

To identify what makes change difficult in your organisation, how to reduce resistance to change from your people and how to make change stick!

Be able to identify how different people respond to change and use a personalised strategy for maximising buy in To construct an effective action plan to implement change in your organisation Look at different management structures and ensure that you have the most effective structure for your organisation Evaluate support and operational structures to maximise value growth in your business Choose between centralised and decentralised management systems and understand the benefits, limitations and features of each Understand how your management systems and structures will effect empowerment, engagement and motivation of your people and generate a robust action plan to maximise value from your team

Who Should Attend?

This Certificate Management And Leadership III is designed for middle managers and those aspiring to senior management who want to develop key skills such as managing resources and information management.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the forces for change in an organisation and the impact of the change process 2. Understand the meaning, nature and design of organisational structure 3. Understand advantages and disadvantages of centralisation and decentralisation

36 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I

This course focuses on the strategic and tactical skills required to establish an operations strategy to manage operations effectively.

Delegates will learn to use modern approaches to improve operations and translate organisational goals into operational performance objectives.

• • • • • • • • • • • • •

Operations management Strategic role of operations management Layout and flow Job design and work organisation Nature of planning and control Capacity planning and control Inventory planning and control Supply chain planning and control Lean operations Just In Time (JIT) Quality planning and control Operations improvement Strategic quality management

Business and Management

Certificate In Management And Leadership III

Who Should Attend?

This course is specifically developed for managers, assistant managers, superintendents, supervisors, team leaders, coordinators, officers and specialists responsible for: operations, procurement, purchasing, supply chain, logistics, production, manufacturing, warehousing, inventory, quality, R&D, project, business improvement, process improvement, plant, utilities, applications, performance.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Translate organisation goals into operational performance objectives of quality, speed, dependability, flexibility and cost by establishing a solid operational strategy 2. Efficiently utilise resources by employing effective planning and controlling activities 3. Strategically improve operations by applying more modern approaches like Lean, Just In Time and Six Sigma

I

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

51

Business and Management

Certificate in Organisation Performance Improvement (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Leaders and professionals who have responsibility for directing and managing performance are concerned about getting everyone focused on activities that really count. So a primary tool for them is a well-respected system of organisation performance management.

It is important to apply best practices so as to know why, where and how to change the level of performance. Organisational health is harmed if immature measurement and improvement procedures undermine employee engagement and obstruct the organisation’s purpose.

Through fully grounded examples and collaborative exercises you will learn the secrets of highly effective organisation performance improvement. You will also discover how to avoid the missteps that lead some organisations to performance roadblocks, or worse.

Course Outline

Day One - Understand The Justification And Context For Successfully Applying Performance Indicators In Organisations Day Two - Design Steps And Creating Optimal KPIs, Setting Meaningful Targets And Producing Actionable Performance Rep

Day Four - Lead And Review Performance Improvement In Organisations And Find Solutions To Your Questions

This course is intended for those who already have performance indicators in place but are finding they are not being used to their full potential.

This course is suitable for executives, managers and analysts whose work involves performance management – including Strategic performance, Sales and Marketing performance, Operations and Supply Chain performance as well as Support performance for functions such as human resources, finance, project management, quality control and planning.

Course Outline • • • • • • • • • •

1. Revitalise your organisation’s performance improvement journey 2. Inject a solution orientation into your performance management 3. Strengthen your organisation’s ability to manage continuous improvement

I

Evaluate current and future requirements of your work role The role of a manager/team leader/supervisor How to communicate like a professional – personal influence skills, assertiveness and the management of emotions Recruitment, selection and retention Building effective high-performance teams Managing diversity Emotional Intelligence Performance management Change management Conflict resolution

Who Should Attend?

• •

• • • • •

Team leaders and supervisors who are preparing for advancement Staff who are preparing for management/leadership responsibilities Managers who wish to strengthen and update their management and business skills Line managers Project leaders Shift leaders Assistant managers Any executives without formal management training

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Benefits Of Attending

= Earned Training Hours

This in-depth workshop experience is geared to both the newly appointed manager/supervisor and also to those individuals who are already in a management role and want to review and enhance their skills and knowledge. This learning event is aimed at building, or re-building, the foundations for your managerial career by helping hone the concepts and skills you need in order to effectively manage yourself and others.

•

Who Should Attend?

24 Hrs

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

Course Overview

Day Three - The Skills Needed To Move From KPIs To An Understanding Of Best Possible Improvement Actions

52

Certificate In People Management Skills

Increase your business effectiveness by updating and upgrading your business and management skills Improve your communication skills to ensure that you are maximising your impact and are able to influence and persuade appropriately in the business context Enhance your understanding of your own strengths and learn how to build on them for continued success

I

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Certificate In Quality Management And Business Performance (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Course Overview

The course covers in a practice-based approach all the tools and techniques managers need to improve their team’s performance. More than half the course duration is dedicated to practice, role-play and simulation of performance development meetings.

Delegates will learn to develop the performance of their people and increase motivation levels, by understanding and mastering coaching, feedback, counseling and many other performance development tools.

While a lot of time and practice is devoted to the annual performance review, the course also lays groundwork for performance improvement and development throughout the rest of the year, not just annual evaluation.

Course Content • • • • • • • •

Understanding performance Measuring performance Developing mindsets The performance development cycle Setting goals Coaching for improved performance Conducting a performance appraisal meeting Preparing your Massive Action Plan (MAP)

Managers, supervisors, team leaders and potential management staff will gain the skill and understanding required to develop performance.

HR managers and training professionals will gain insights on cuttingedge people development tools and how to encourage their use in their organisations.

Benefits Of Attending

2.

3.

Motivate your team and develop their performance by understanding personalities, needs and individual decisionmaking strategies Achieve better job clarity and results through SMART goal setting and Management by Objectives Use advanced coaching tools and creative rewards to influence and improve the behavior and output of your team

18 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

This course will deepen delegates’ understanding of how they can help transform their organisation to deliver business excellence. The effective implementation of the tools and techniques that they will learn can help secure greater market share and increased profits, as well as reduce costs.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Who Should Attend?

1.

Course Overview

I

Business excellence: a framework for business management?

A fast-track method of implementing Business excellence Understanding and communicating why your business exists Determining an approach to fulfilling your business purpose Identifying what needs to be done to deliver your strategy Tools and techniques for process improvement Organising key business processes to effect management control Managing the people dimension of your business Converting vision into reality with a 5-year business plan making The history and development of the Balanced Scorecard Measuring and monitoring Making the Balanced Scorecard a ‘living’ document Linking the Balanced Scorecard to the Business Excellence model Linking the Balanced Scorecard to performance management systems Using the EFQM to conduct self-assessment

Business and Management

Certificate In Performance Development

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for business leaders and executives who wish to implement quality tools and models in their organisations.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the business case for business excellence and its potential to have an impact on a business 2. Determine the best approach to fulfilling a business’ purpose 3. Build a Balanced Scorecard for your organisation which is linked to the Business Excellence Model and to performance management systems

I A

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

53

Business and Management

Certificate In Root Cause Analysis For Business Professionals Course Overview

This course is designed to introduce the bigger picture of problem solving approaches, geared towards organisations. The course will concentrate on one critical step of the approach, which is finding out “why” the problem occurred and provide links to a subsequent “corrective actions” path. You will learn how to lead investigations and Root Cause Analysis (RCA) using various techniques such as Causal Factor Charting, Fault Tree Analysis and Root Cause Charts. This is a “How To” course designed to teach these skills.

Course Outline • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Benefits of RCA and disadvantages of not using it Relationship between RCA, Corrective Action Programmes (CAP) and Quality RCA generic cycle Problems vs. symptoms Problem statement structure and use as scope limiter Problem statements as functions of risk Principles of investigation Sources of information Common investigation pitfalls De-personalisation principles Investigation tools Data precision and reliability Apparent Cause Evaluation Event and Causal Factor Charting Corrective Action Programmes (CAP)

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for: • Vice Presidents, Directors, General Managers • Operations and Project Managers • Operations Engineers and Staff • Human Resource Professionals • Sales Managers and Sales Personnel • Business Analysis Professionals • Health and Safety Managers and Support Staff

= Earned Training Hours

Course Overview

Increase your profitability by using Business Intelligence (BI) and Business Analytics (BA). Many top global companies depend on Business Intelligence and Business Analytics to drive their success and have integrated BI and BA systems to improve their everyday processes and enhance their performance.

Business Intelligence utilises tools, infrastructure, applications, and best practices to access and analyse data—which leads to improvements in optimisation and performance.

Business Analytics (BA) takes this concept to enterprise information management, enterprise performance management, data warehousing, analytic applications, business intelligence, risk, compliance, and governance.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Business Intelligence – Definition, Capabilities, Components And Benefits A Comparison Of BI Models Developing A Data Warehouse BI System Requirements Creating a BI Framework The BI Project BI Tools Presenting The Results: BI Reporting BI Competency Centers (BICCs), BI Center Of Excellence (BICE) Or Business Analytic Teams (BATs)?

Business Intelligence: Governance Business Intelligence: Policies And Procedures BI – Driving Performance New Trends in BI

Board Executives, Presidents and VPs, Corporate Strategists, Marketing and Sales managers, Directors of Finance, Managers of Quality and Business Performance Management functions, IT Managers, Business Systems and MIS Managers, Data Warehouse Managers and everyone who is interested in Business Intelligence, decision support, executive information, business development, knowledge management, performance reporting and dashboards.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the big picture of problem solving methodologies used in successful organisations and use a systematic approach to identify problems 2. Accurately define problems and find out the cause(s) which if removed will reduce the likelihood of recurrence 3. Develop an understanding of investigative methods, their advantages and disadvantages and select the investigative method most suitable for your organisation

24 Hrs

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Who Should Attend?

Benefits Of Attending

54

Certificate In Strategic Business Intelligence Implementation

I

1.

2.

3.

Understand the benefits and risks of implementing Business Intelligence solutions and learn how the components of Business Intelligence systems fit together Gain insight into the organisation and structure of data for Business Intelligence – and how to analyse it and report actionable results Discover how Business Intelligence can be used for competitive advantage and enterprise performance management

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

This course explains how the strategic management process can be used to analyse environments, industries and organisations, and how to use that analysis to make sound strategic choices. Delegates will look at how to build a cohesive strategy across an entire organisation to ensure that all areas are aligned and moving in the same direction.

When the analysis has been done and the choices have been made we move on to the implementation of the strategy. This course looks at tools and techniques that can be used to help achieve strategic change and considers the role of leadership in the change process.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

The strategic management process Strategy implementation Strategic analysis – environmental, industry and competitor analysis Analysing resources and capabilities Sustaining competitive advantage Competitive strategies Growth strategies Partnerships and alliances Mapping the strategy Top-down strategy formulation Using a map to communicate the strategy Linking the pieces of the strategy Strategy and the customer value proposition Managing strategic change Change and the organisation Resistance to change Implementing change

Who Should Attend?

The course is ideal for people who have to propose new business ideas to people in their own company – at any level. It is also designed for anyone who is responsible for preparing and presenting business plans and proposals to bankers, financiers and prospective investors.

1. Better evaluate business strategies 2. Formulate business strategy in the face of increased globalisation 3. Maximise marketing and sales strategies and align financial planning with business strategy

= Earned Training Hours

20 Credits

Course Overview

The Certificate In Strategic Direction And Leadership is designed for managers to support the development of their leadership and management skills. It includes 2 highly informative and practical modules: • Strategic LeadershipAnd Direction For Success • Inter-organisational And Collaborative Strategies For Excellence

Course Content

Module One: Strategic Leadership and Direction for Success • Understanding true strategic potential of the organisation • A powerful framework for building strategies and planning the direction • Handling / minimising the risks and exposure of growth and success • Understanding and managing innovation strategically – ensuring the ROI, productivity and profitability of innovation • Ensuring full perception of strategic brand value • Measure of success of the strategic plan – basis for measurement, critical factors of success, developing a performance metric • Re-thinking commercial alliances / strategic partnerships (JVs etc) beyond the contract Module Two: Inter-organisational and Collaborative Strategies for Excellence • Inter-organisational planning – the challenges and opportunities • What is inter-organisational value? How can it build value with the unit and to the whole organisation?

• A framework for developing strategies across the organisations • Full understanding of the external business ecosystem – taking the opportunities, managing the risks • Re-engineering the organisations for generating ultimate business value • Collaboration with external organisations – from a vertical to triangular approach

Who Should Attend?

All managers in charge of a business unit or function at mid-senior level or those aspiring for top management. It is essential for managers from all functions.

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending

24 Hrs

Certificate In Strategic Direction And Leadership

Business and Management

Certificate In Strategic Business Planning

I A

1. Evaluate what is meant by collective strategy. Analyse and evaluate the factors that influence collective strategy. Lead the process of developing and formulating collective strategy 2. Analyse the planning and implementation of existing interorganisational strategies, the theories and methods of strategy formulation used by different organisations and administrations 3. Evaluate the role and impact of strategic intelligence and research the impact of cultural differences on the principles and practicalities of inter-organisational policy and strategy

A

36 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

55

Business and Management

Certificate In Strategy Execution

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Certificate In Strategic Finance For Non-Finance Managers

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Course Overview

Many organisations have problems executing their strategy. At this course you will learn how to transform your vision and mission into actionable strategy. If you are wrestling with the differences between visions and missions, objectives and goals and are looking to discover the tools and techniques to develop and execute an effective strategy, then this course is a must attend for you and your colleagues.

Through a combination of presentations, discussions and individual work exercises, you will learn the key components of developing and implementing a successful strategy. The focus of this course will be heavily directed to achieving a practical, realistic, beneficial and successful outcome rather than just academic theory

Course Content

Establishing a clear and winning strategy Cascading and aligning strategy throughout the organisation The challenges of successful and sustained strategy execution Utilising the Balanced Scorecard as the premier management tool for strategy execution

• • • •

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for anyone who is responsible for preparing and implementing business plans and proposals. It is ideal for people who have to propose new business ideas to people in their own company – at any level such as planning, finance, accounts, development, operations, business development, strategic planning, business process re-engineering and strategy

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Identify the current challenges in implementing strategy by learning how to undertake relevant strategic analysis prior to establishing a future business strategy Understand the importance of setting flexible and explicit objectives to provide clear direction for your organisation Develop realistic and competitive strategies that will enable your organisation to achieve its chosen objectives

Course Overview

In today’s global business environment, every business executive must possess a fundamental knowledge of how financial resources are accumulated, utilised and monitored to create shareholder value.

Companies that leave these critical issues to the exclusive domain of financial executives stand to be at a clear competitive disadvantage.

Understanding the financial levers of effective business management is crucial for every senior executive. In this course, you will explore how financial information is formulated, how it is processed to allocate capital, how financing decisions are made, how the outcome of investment decisions is evaluated, and how the outcome determines the return that the investors receive. The course will equip you with a collection of tools and insights to enable you to fulfil your professional goals as well as the expectations of your companies and investors.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Review of financial terms and concepts Overview of money and capital markets The income statement The balance sheet Subcomponents of assets, liabilities and equity Analysing and interpreting statements Cash flow statement Working capital management Budgeting Monitoring budgets Capital budgeting and valuation Cost of capital Mergers and acquisitions

Who Should Attend?

The course will benefit experienced managers and directors with a limited formal financial background. Rising stars and managers moving into roles with financial accountability as well as managers with responsibility for the financial performance of a team, department or organisation.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Gain a thorough understanding of the wide range of financial terms and concepts 2. Apply the financial concepts and policies behind the management decision processes 3. Recognise the impact of effective working capital management on company cash flow

56

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Certificate In Strategic Management And Leadership I Course Overview

Course Overview

This course will guide delegates in designing a streamlined and effective internal communication strategy for their organisation and teach them how to improve organisational performance through an in-depth understanding of key topics. They will learn how to quantify their goals and achievements via internal surveys on attitude, communication and awareness.

Course Content • • • • • •

Tools for defining internal communications objectives Understand the needs of internal customers Utilising QQCPE as a tool Assess internal communication processes with proven tools and techniques Understand a department’s strengths and weaknesses Identify whether a department can deliver and organisation’s communication strategy effectively Build an essential communication framework Develop a strategic plan

Certificate In Strategic Management And Leadership focuses on translating organisational strategy into effective operational performance. It includes 2 highly informative and practical modules: • Conducting A Strategic Management Project • Strategic Information Management

Course Content

Conducting A Strategic Management Project • Levels of Work In Modern Organisations • Projects, Programs And Portfolios • The Project Office • Integrating Change Management Principles With Strategic Projects • How Projects Are Justified And Selected • Planning For The Key Deliverables Of A Strategic Project • Evaluating The Progress Of A Strategic Project • Managing A Strategic Project Team • Risk Management

Who Should Attend?

Strategic Information Management • Defining Information Management • Managing Information Systems • Information Sharing And Sourcing • Knowledge Management • Decision Support Systems • Business Intelligence Systems • Strategic Decision-Making • Strategic Information Delivery • Strategic Management Information Evaluation

Benefits Of Attending

Who Should Attend?

• •

This course is designed for business professionals working in internal communications, from Directors and Presidents to Heads and Managers. This course is for everyone interested in creating a high quality corporate communications department.

1. Identify critical criteria for formulating a successful internal communication strategy 2. Utilise proven methods for improving your existing internal communication processes 3. Train staff and gain their buy-in towards breaking down existing barriers to communication

Business and Management

Certificate In Strategic Internal Communications

The programme is designed for managers who recognise the need to strengthen their strategic management skills. It is appropriate for Directors and Senior Managers whose task it is to turn corporate strategic intent into effective operational performance. It would also be relevant for senior staff responsible for support functions, including Financial Managers, IT Managers, Procurement Managers, Engineering Managers, and Public Relations Managers.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand and be able to apply the justification for using project principles to conduct strategic investigative projects 2. Be able to conduct research, using sources, synthesising data and evaluating options/draw conclusions and make recommendations that achieve the project aim 3. Understand the impact of management information on decision making

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

I A

36 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

57

Business and Management

Certificate In Strategic Management And Leadership II

Course Overview

Certificate In Strategic Management And Leadership II focuses on translating organisational strategy into effective operational performance. It includes two highly informative and practical modules: • Organisational Direction • Financial Management

Course Content

Organisational Direction • Planning Direction • The Challenges Of Execution • Keeping Up To Date • Revising strategies in a fast moving world

Certificate In Strategic Thinking And Planning

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

This high value course will provide you with a strategic approach to using IT as an integrated business capability, using the ITR4TM model to determine the roles that will provide your organisation with a competitive edge, by increasing agility, controlling costs, reducing risk, improving stakeholder satisfaction and ultimately delivering valuable benefits to the organisation, by managing change proactively.

Course Content

Financial Management • Strategy Management – An Overview Of Strategy Planning And Execution • Financial Management • Setting Targets For Strategic Financial Aspects Of The Business • Aligning Strategy And Budgeting • Investment Evaluation

Who Should Attend?

The programme is designed for managers who recognise the need to strengthen their strategic management skills in terms of: • Developing and implementing successful business strategies • Aligning financial strategy within overall business strategy

• • • • • • • • •

The strategic context The development of strategic management Environmental turbulence Applying strategic thinking techniques Undertaking strategic analysis Setting strategic objectives Making Strategic Choices Developing strategic themes Executing strategy

Who Should Attend?

This course is primarily for executives/senior managers who need to develop their strategic planning and management capabilities. It will also benefit: • Managers seeking to broaden their knowledge and prepare for a strategic role • Business managers/executives and others wishing to know more about strategic management

Benefits Of Attending Benefits Of Attending

1. Analyse, interpret and produce a structured evaluation of the organisational strategic position 2. Manage the key challenges and supporting processes of strategy execution 3. Learn how to set realistic financial targets as part of developing a strategic plan 4. Understand the importance and the challenges of aligning budgeting with the business strategy

58

36 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

1. Construct and align vision, mission, objectives, strategies and related tactics 2. Use appropriate trategic concepts and language to develop compelling business plans 3. Identify how to use processes for strategy formulation and strategic planning 4. Develop your ability to achieve the right competitive positioning for your organisation

E I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview This course gives you an insight into methodologies to identify and prioritise opportunities for improvement within the business environment while positively impacting the profitability of your organisation. This course also highlights the implications of different business strategies and the process of aligning these strategies with the operating framework. Furthermore, you will be able to identify critical processes in an organisation and address them by streamlining these processes with a competitive business advantage.

With the introduction of a simple diagnostic toolkit you will be able to evaluate the performance of your current critical processes and identify those which need improvement; in particular, those which have a significant impact on the overall profitability of the organization as a whole.

Course Outline • • • • •

Strategy, organisational structure and links to functional performance Measuring organisational and process performance Business process governance and planning Business process reengineering Managing change and culture for implement process transformation

Who Should Attend?

This course is intended for top executives, senior managers and similar executive positions at the top and/or decision-making roles within their organisation.

The nature of the material and concepts presented within this course make this fit for organisations from any sector: service, commercial, industrial, manufacturing or hospitality.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Motivate senior managers to take an objective look at their business processes with the scope of enabling the route for improved performance 2. Analyse process metrics, open up to constructive criticism, and identify relevant and priority areas worth attention 3. Diagnose key process metrics, embark on establishing potential root causes and set out a path for leading improvement initiatives 4. Reviewing, rethinking and reengineering business processes to identify operational opportunities and set the plan to bring about any necessary changes.

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

Certificate In Team Leading 17 Credits

Course Overview

This Certificate In Team Leading focuses on the practical application of management and leadership theory and principles at the operational level within the organisation.

It includes 3 highly informative and practical modules: • Team Development • Team Communications • Controlling Resources

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • •

Identify and plan learning needs to create a high performance team Plan and implement induction for a new team member to maximise their performance from the outset Train a team member to carry out a task Describe the teambuilding process (Tuckman’s Model) Understand the role of communication in leading a team Demonstrate effective listening skills How to organise and lead team briefings Identify team strengths and opportunities for improvement Identify, quantify and request resources appropriate needed by a team to achieve work objectives Apply and manage the resource used to achieve work objectives in a cost-effective way Anticipate, identify and prevent (or reduce) resource wastage

Business and Management

Certificate In Streamlining Business Processes For Improved Profitability

Who Should Attend?

This certificate is ideal for team leaders and managers who have been trusted with responsibility to manage corporate resources.

It would also be relevant for senior staff who are preparing for higher levels of responsibility.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Identify, request and manage resources needed by a team to achieve objectives 2. Understand the role of communication and team briefings 3. Plan and implement induction for your new team member & Identify and plan the training needs of your team members

E

36 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

59

Business and Management

Certified Business Analyst Professional CBAP

This unique e-training course is designed to improve your chances of passing the Certified Business Analysis Professional™ (CBAP®) certification exam on the first try. The demand for professionals with the CBAP® certification is growing within industries across the globe as organisations struggle to create disciplined approaches for eliciting and managing requirements. To earn the CBAP® credential offered by the International Institute of Business Analysis (IIBA)®, you must demonstrate the required business analysis experience and pass a 3.5-hour, 150-question exam, covering all knowledge areas of IIBA’s A Guide to the Business Analysis Body of Knowledge® (BABOK)® Guide.

Course Content

• • • • • •

Recognise the types of questions on the CBAP® exam Describe IIBA’s perspective on how business analysis is conducted Recognise which terms, concepts, tasks, techniques and best practices require attention when studying the knowledge areas outlined in the BABOK® Guide Practice taking exam questions, giving you confidence in your understanding of the concepts and approach used in the CBAP® exam Evaluate many more “best” answers, rather than just “right” answers Determine what approach to use when you do not know the answer to an exam question Design the study approach best suited for your preparation Discuss major themes and issues for each topic area Use online memorisation drills to reinforce key concepts

Who Should Attend?

This course is perfect for business analyst wanting to join the business analysis elite with a world-class accreditation

Benefits Of Attending

1. Find out exactly what you need to know and how to prepare yourself to fulfill the requirements for each BABOK® Guide knowledge area, including the business analysis techniques identified in each area.

2. Get a chance to explore the rationale behind each answer with your instructor, a certified CBAP®. In addition, after you’ve completed the lessons, you’ll have the opportunity to take “real-life” practice exams to put your skills to the test.

3. As part of the course, you will be able to download ESI’s BA Techniques Handbook, which is a stand-alone guide that describes in detail each of the business analysis techniques covered by the BABOK® Guide.

60

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

(In Association With The KPI Institute) Course Overview

Course Overview

• • •

Certified KPI Professional

A

This training course is designed to provide a strong foundation to deploying business management systems and BI software by developing the next generation of KPI professionals. These KPI architects will form the basis of the organisational performance measurement capability, becoming the go-to place for advice around understanding, establishing, activating, reporting and generating value by using KPI across organisations.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • •

Introduction to the world Of KPIs The pillars of KPI architecture KPI selection Activating KPIs KPI documentation Data visualisation: designing KPI dashboards and scorecards KPI data gathering and reporting Generating value with KPIs KPI management enablers: software, hardware, communication And Culture Generating value from using KPIs Measuring and learning with KPIs

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for executives, operational managers and analysts from both delivery and support functions such as finance, accounting, project management, human resources, sales, marketing, logistics, quality control and improvement, strategy/planning and operations.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the complexities of working with KPIs and learn how to address them 2. Develop a working knowledge of the Key Performance Indicators Management Framework 3. Use over 30 performance measurement tools to facilitate the deployment and value added by KPIs

E I

18 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In Association With The KPI Institute)

Course Overview

Course Overview

This 2 day training course is designed to provide a strong practice in applying the right KPI effectively. This course is structured exclusively on case studies, exercises and simulations. Participants will customise and develop templates in accordance with the standards required for the certification

Course Content • • • • • • •

KPI Project coordination The business case for KPI implementation KPI selection Scorecard and dashboard development and documentation Data collection, analysis and reporting KPI review meetings and initiative management KPI management evaluation

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for executives, operational managers and analysts from both delivery and support functions such as finance, accounting, project management, human resources, sales, marketing, logistics, quality control and improvement, strategy/planning and operations.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Thorough understanding of how KPIs can be used in practice by deploying in case study exercises.

2. Access to the latest research and best practice in working with KPI. 3. Content in accordance with the KPI Management Framework developed by The KPI Institute.

12 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

With current economical pressure, companies face a variety of changes and challenges that will have a profound impact on organisational dynamics and performance. In many ways, these changes will decide who will survive and prosper into the next decade and who will not.

While these challenges must all be met by organisations and managers are concerned about survival and competitiveness in the future, this course will focus on the challenge of ethical behaviour.

Course Content • • • • • • • • •

Overview of business ethics General issues in business ethics International business ethics Business ethics in the field Business ethics for effective leadership Corporate ethical codes Fraud and abuse Ethical dilemmas Workplace ethics and business stakeholders

Business and Management

Corporate Ethics, Governance And Social Responsibility

Certified KPI Practitioner

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for people from various disciplines including finance, accounting, marketing, sales, HR, IT, product development and logistics. The attendants will learn practical skills that can be easily applied to their day-to-day work thus, minimising the risks of unethical behaviours across the organisation.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Learn about the general ethical issues in business 2. Develop an understanding of your organisation’s ethical codes and business conduct 3. Learn how to handle ethical dilemmas

E

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

61

Business and Management

Corporate Responsibility Management And Reporting

Contract Drafting For Non-Lawyers

Course Overview

Course Overview

The course will give you the tools to frame your programmes so that they are business relevant and that they resonate with your stakeholders. You will explore global and regional best practice and key international standards. The course will provide a wide perspective into the internal and external business drivers, and how best to articulate the business case within your organisation. You will be equipped with a solid understanding on building a corporate level programme that leads to results and ensures credibility. You will learn how best to leverage the maximum value out of your commitment via integrated communication and engagement strategies..

Course Content • • •

Concept, drivers and strategy – what is it? Why should we bother?

What should we do?

Programme design and implementation – how to design a robust and value-adding corporate programme Reporting and communication – how to leverage your commitment through effective reporting and communication

Who Should Attend?

• • • • • • • •

CSR managers Sustainability managers Environmental managers Internal and external communications executives Marketing, PR and branding professionals HR managers Governance and risk management executives Corporate philanthropists and foundation managers

1. Build a Corporate Responsibility (CR) programme that adds genuine value to your business and inspires your stakeholder 2. Build your operational and reputational assets by cutting costs without cutting corners 3. Build your confidence as a CR professional and turn theory into practice that fits your organisation

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

Course Content • • • • • • • •

Backdrop to contracts: overview of the legal system General principles of contract drafting Taking the mystery out of contracts: specific parts of the contract and what they mean Focus on important clauses Types of contracts and special considerations Standard terms and conditions E-commerce Model and template contracts

Who Should Attend?

Benefits Of Attending

62

As the business world gets more complex, ensuring smooth and uninterrupted operations coupled with long-term relationships with all parties is extremely critical. Contracts are now considered vital as they not only instill high levels of confidence in the organisation one deals with, but also save the time and effort one might face in dealing with unpredictable concerns and arguments. This course will guide you through a step by step process to understand, draft and negotiate a successful contract and at the same time ensure that the interests of your organisation are well protected. You also will strengthen your expertise to build sound contractual relationships.

E

This course is designed for managers who need to negotiate contracts, terms and discounts with outside suppliers of goods and services or manage contractor performance. This will include purchasing, sales or marketing managers, and supervisors and staff taking up such appointments for the first time. It will also be of benefit to those who have had little formal training in contracts, purchasing and negotiation and who wish to consolidate their experience.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the meaning and significance of common contract clauses by identifying essential contract clauses, terms and conditions 2. Learn to establish the right framework for sound contractual relationships 3. Achieve the confidence and skills to properly review, understand and negotiate effective contracts

I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Course Overview

This Crisis Management is part of good governance. Don’t let a crisis manage your company, but learn how to design strategy and build the team that can successfully manage the crisis. In this seminar the latest standards in the field will be reviewed and new and innovative techniques will be demonstrated. You will systematically learn and practice ways to create, train and exercise a crisis management team (CMT) in your organisation.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • •

The nature of an incident Planning and procedures Plan structure The emergency management centre People Coordination with public authorities Business continuity Public relations and media management Testing and exercising Pandemics Crisis management standards

This highly practical and interactive course has been specifically designed for: • Business continuity managers • Emergency managers • Operational risk managers • Technical support managers and staff • Security managers and planners • Fire officers • Health & safety professionals • IT/marketing/financial/facilities managers • Auditors

Benefits Of Attending

1. Build a corporate responsibility and sustainability programme that adds value to your bottom line and enjoys wide stakeholder acceptance 2. Enhance your reputation and cut costs by embedding the principles of corporate responsibility and sustainability in your organisation 3. Leverage your commitment through sustainability reporting using international standards (for example, Global Reporting Initiative)

= Earned Training Hours

Course Overview

This seminar brings together several different perspectives and components of designing and deploying a policies and procedures system for an enterprise. Organisations today range from having extensive P&P systems to fragmented pieces pulled together with custom software. More efficient organisation of the P&P components and the proper tools can make for a more reliable and ‘compliant easy’ P&P structure. Lectures, exercises and tool demonstrations provide you with a rich learning experience.

Course Content

Who Should Attend?

24 Hrs

Designing And Developing An Effective Policy And Procedure System

I A

• • • • • • • • • • • •

Overview – procedures and processes today The changing world of procedures – new formats and use Policies, processes, procedures and workflow Determining P&P system Defining a P&P taxonomy Deploying a P&P system Reverse engineering procedures Business impact and touch point analysis P&P system governance Assuring P&P compliance Auditing policies and procedures Suggested tools for managing the P&P environment

Business and Management

Crisis And Emergency Management

Who Should Attend?

Business process teams, procedure analysts, technical writers, personnel officers, procurement managers, administrative managers, job analysts, business analysts and IT documentation specialists.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Define the requirements for a P&P system along with the need for new ways of looking at policies and procedures 2. Extract a process from an existing procedure and reorganise the procedure into one of the newer formats 3. Define a structure for organising policies and procedures that is easy to use and meaningful to the organisation

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

63

Business and Management

Developing And Implementing A Successful CSR Strategy

Effective Knowledge Management Course Overview

Course Overview

Begin your journey towards world-class CSR reports using the Global Reporting Initiative (GRI-G3) guidelines

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

CSR Foundations And Stakeholder Engagement CSR Foundations – Concepts And Frameworks Stakeholder Mapping And Engagement The New International Social Responsibility Standard – ISO 26000 ISO 26000 Basics The ISO 26000 Guidelines Communicating And Reporting CSR To International Standards Basic CSR Reporting Introduction To CSR Reporting Using The GRI-G3 Standard CSR Reporting II: Maximising Impact Using International Frameworks The GRI-G3 International Gold Standard For CSR Reporting Advanced CSR Reporting To GRI-G3 Standards Finishing-Off The Report Social Return On Investment (SROI) Understanding The Social Impact Of Your CSR Programmes Real Life SROI

Who Should Attend?

This course is specifically designed for business professionals with responsibility for developing and implementing Corporate Social Responsibility programmes and initiatives. It will also be useful for business professionals who wish to develop their skills in social and community investment and CSR reporting.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the principles of CSR from foundations to international best practice 2. Learn about the new international guidelines in the ISO 26000 Social Responsibility Standards 3. Evaluate the real impact of your CSR programmes using Social Return on Investment (SROI) analysis

64

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

This course will offer an introduction to the terminology and concepts of Knowledge Management and provide an understanding of why Knowledge Management is important. Presentations and teaching will be supplemented with exercises and discussions, which will provide you with experience in actually using some of the techniques covered during the course.

Course Content • • • • • • •

Introduction to Knowledge Management Understanding Knowledge Management Ways to do Knowledge Management Goals of Knowledge Management Knowledge Management strategies Organisational learning and KM KM approaches methods and tools

Who Should Attend?

This course is suitable for delegates with little experience in the field of Knowledge Management but with a good understanding of business.

Delegates from • Information background will find the course of value as it will enable them to explain how information management is an important component of an effective knowledge management course • Project and programme management background will find the course of value as it will enable them to explain how knowledge management can improve learning and results from business processes • Human resources and learning and development background will find the course of value as it will enable them to explain how their activities help to create an organisational environment which enables knowledge to be created, shared and replenished • IT and developer background will find the course of value as it will enable them to explain how their technical solutions support and enrich knowledge management courses

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the scope of the field - the know why and what 2. Deliver realistic value with knowledge management in your business 3. Gain ideas and practical action plans to move forward into implementation - the know where and when

E I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Course Overview

In this course, delegates will learn how to decipher legal jargon, how and when to use or avoid legal jargon in their own writing, how to recognize and better understand legal documents written by others, and how to enhance their own legal writing skills through techniques that result in clearer and more effective writing.

Course Content • • •

Introduction to legal writing Understanding legal writing: how non-lawyers can become better consumers of documents written by lawyers How non-lawyers can become better legal writers

Who Should Attend?

• • •

Professionals who are responsible for drafting or editing documents that have legal implications People who want hands-on training in improving their skills in drafting/editing contracts: Contract officers and managers

Benefits Of Attending

1. Improve your understanding of the legal documents you encounter in your workplace 2. Enhance your writing confidence by using practical techniques to improve the clarity of your legal writing 3. Learn how to distinguish between the different types of legal writing sent to you by lawyers including analytical writing and persuasive writing

Effectively Managing And Implementing Policies And Procedures Course Overview

From the CEO to the front line worker, everyone needs to know how to execute the key processes of the enterprise. Workflow, process flow, policies and procedures all need some form of documentation and communication to the enterprise workforce. With all the changes in today’s business environment, keeping these updated, current, complete and relevant has become much more significant.

This course brings together different perspectives and components of organising and managing policies, procedures and processes in the enterprise. Key questions in managing and implementing are answered.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Managing P&P today How policies drive procedures The relationship of processes, procedures and workflow Managing P&P needs and performance The changing world of procedures – new formats and use Determining procedures needs – requirements Auditing P&P Implementing P&P: assessment techniques Developing processes from procedures Aligning policies, procedures with business direction Aligning procedures with operations Implementing the P&P system for efficiency Organizing P&P for efficiency Policy, governance and management of procedures Achieving procedure compliance

Business and Management

Effective Legal Writing For Non-Lawyers

Who Should Attend?

This cutting edge course is designed for: business process teams, procedure analysts, technical writers, personnel officers, procurement managers, administrative managers, job analysts, business analysts and IT documentation specialists.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Define and understand the relationship between processes, procedures, policies, people and jobs 2. Understand why processes are being extracted from procedures today 3. Use the life cycle concept to manage policies and procedures

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I A

E I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

65

Business and Management

Emotional Intelligence

Financial Skills For The Board

Course Overview

This advanced course aims to help delegates effectively lead a corporate culture based on emotional expertise so that they are able to enhance the effectiveness of interpersonal relationships at all levels within their organisation. Delegates will be equipped to play a strategic role in inspiring teams to peak performance and achieve organisational and project leadership success.

Course Content • • • • •

The business case for Emotional Intelligence (EI)/ Emotional Competence (EC)/ Emotional Expertise (EE) The clusters and competencies of EI/EC The human brain, emotion and peak performance Leadership and the learning organisation Gain, maintain and enhance emotional competencies

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for managers who are required to lead teams, projects and organisations.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Be a top performer. Achieve career excellence and organisational vision by improving your leadership style and emotional competencies 2. Demonstrate yourself as a cooperative, contributing and constructive leader to strategically increase organisational performance by staying focussed and action oriented towards developing your organisation’s emotional status

Course Overview

Demystify the jargon of the financial world from an executive perspective. The overall aim of this event is to equip Board and C-level executives to better manage their responsibilities and decisionmaking; in particular to understand the internal and external financial issues that ultimately determine the success of their organisations.

Delegates will deepen and strengthen their financial management acumen. Special focus will be placed on helping delegates to analyse and interpret the many financial reports that are presented to them.

Course Outline

Overview and jargon • Basic principles of finance • Aligning finance and business strategy • Using the Balanced Scorecard • Key financial reports and statements • Overview of the annual report and accounts • Understanding the key financial ratios • Funding the business • Cash Is King: cash flow and working capital • Capital management: investment and returns • The investor’s perspective • The market, including IPO issues

Who Should Attend?

The seminar is designed for non-accountant directors and executives who need to understand better the world of finance, and the financial implications of the decisions that they make.

• Board Directors • C-level Executives • Vice Presidents and other senior executives

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

66

18 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

Recognise the financial impact of business decisions made at the Board level Analyse and interpret summary financial reports effectively and efficiently Gain a top-down executive overview of the key components of finance and remove the mystique of financial jargon

A

18 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

This course is specifically designed for delegates to recognise, harness, direct and develop themselves to successfully take on leadership responsibilities as excellent key future leaders. Delegates will gain insight into taking the right actions at the right time. The course will direct delegates to become competent leaders who create high performance environments and take their organisations to new levels of achievement.

(In association with Institute of Leadership and Management) Course Overview

This course will address the process of designing and implementing a customer service system as a major competitive tool. Each day will concentrate on the provision of customer service from the individual, the company and a global perspective. It deals with determining the service expectations of different customer groups and developing a service strategy around their needs. It will address the importance of client relationships, how to write standards and how to develop top quality customer service teams.

Course Content

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • •

ILM Endorsed Customer Service Manager

• • • • • • • • • • • •

Setting your leadership goals Leadership versus management Developing a high performing team Getting the right people Linking team goals to organisational goals Managing resources strategically Leading for change and continuous improvement Problem solving and decision making Performance management Effective communication Team management profile Personal action planning

What is customer service excellence?

Customer power Lifetime value and the churn factor Client relationships and the loyalty accounting matrix Measuring client satisfaction Developing client loyalty plans The three major sources of value to your clients Developing service strategies Creating a culture of customer service excellence The lens of perception The ‘trust cycle’ Finding positive solutions to customer complaints

Business and Management

High Performance Leadership For The New Manager

Who Should Attend?

Who Should Attend?

This course is for you if you are a new or high potential manager in the early stages of your management career. You could be either a team leader or a first line manager (someone who manages people who manage people), and you want to focus on important leadership skills.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Confidently take on leadership responsibilities and build the strategic skills you need to develop a broader perspective of your organisation to achieve your set leadership goals 2. Plan your continued development as an effective leader through a personal development plan and establish the groundwork to take on the leadership aspects of future middle management roles 3. Build and maintain high performing, integrated teams by planning requirements-based recruitment to ensure you get the right people at the right time

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I

This course is specifically designed for all employees who have an active involvement in the provision of customer service excellence.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Identify your customers, what they expect and the sources of customer power, and use this information to develop and target your customer service strategy effectively 2. Create quality service standards to benchmark your provision of products and services, and use customer feedback to improve your service 3. Develop positive solutions to customer complaints and transform your most challenging customers into champions by recognising their personality types, what they value and their needs

E I

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

67

Business and Management

ILM Endorsed Effective Business Management Report Writing

ILM Endorsed Effective Business Writing

(In association with Institute of Leadership and Management) Course Overview

Any business relies on well-structured reports to ensure such things as accurate communication about goals and objectives, requirements, designs, measuring and recording progress. This course has been especially designed to help you overcome the challenge of important business management reports not being as clear as they should be.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

English and its uses Structuring sentences for ease of understanding Powerful paragraphing Punctuation and its uses The clarity index Researching information and gathering material for reports Logical sequencing of information Document layout Document design Software tools Writing business plans Writing market research reports Writing a SWOT analysis report Negotiation preparation notes Writing a trade-off study report Writing a business re-engineering report

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for business and technical managers who have to write, or contribute to, the full range of business management reports.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Ensure that your audience is clearly receiving and understanding the messages that you are sending by planning, researching and writing concise, targeted reports 2. Understand the different requirements of some of the principal management reports used in organisations, and know how to identify the purpose and audience for your report clearly 3. Use plain English to minimise misinterpretation of your reports, to ease understanding and to ensure readability

68

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I

(In association with Institute of Leadership and Management) Course Overview

This course will help you develop your writing skills and learn how to write more effectively. You will discover how to structure effective emails and letters and then look at more advanced writing tasks such as writing agendas and minutes for meetings, presenting financial and project management reports.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

The ABC of good business writing Barriers to good writing Writing for your reader Writing in plain English How to structure your sentences Paragraphs Punctuation The clarity index Style and tone Using the correct tense Producing business letters Email etiquette Researching information and gathering material for reports Logical sequencing of information Layout Technical writing

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for managers and staff who would like to refine their writing skills and acquire a portfolio of techniques to enhance their professional written communication in a variety of formats and business situations.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Improve your writing confidence by using current business standards for English usage and clarity 2. Write effective correspondence and reports that get the results you want 3. Ensure your written communication gets your message across clearly

E I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

ILM Endorsed First Line Management Skills Course Overview

Course Overview

This course will coach delegates on how to successfully achieve personal goals as well as lead a motivated and highly competent team. You will learn how to effectively integrate excellent planning and organisational skills with core management skills including communication, motivation, delegation and coaching. You will leave with a comprehensive set of management tools you can implement directly into your daily working environment.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • •

Who Should Attend?

This course has been specifically designed for those managers responsible for groups of staff and will provide delegates with the key management skills needed in order to secure commitment and obtain superior performance from the people they manage.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Learn how to form and lead high performing teams 2. Understand and practice the key components and skills of effective recruitment interviewing techniques 3. Understand how to successfully introduce and implement change, and overcome barriers and resistance to change

= Earned Training Hours

Course Content • •

The criteria for excellence The role of the manager The manager as leader Developing as a manager The manager as team leader Defining Emotional Intelligence (EI) Measure personal EI Communicating at an advanced level Influencing skills Measure communication style Managing performance Dealing with difficult people – situations at work Recruiting new staff Managing change successfully Planning for action

24 Hrs

This Certificate In First Line Management gives junior managers the communication and motivational skills to help improve operational efficiency.

It includes 3 highly informative and practical modules: • Personal Development As A First Line Manager • Recruitment And Selection • Developing Individuals And Teams

E I

Identify the key functions of a team leader Discover the impact of high Emotional Intelligence (EI) on the supervisor/manager and learn how to use EI to increase your supervisory effectiveness Analyse your personal style and how your style affects others Apply techniques that improve communication Describe and apply motivational theories and techniques Improve productivity and effectiveness for yourself and others Identify and review current staffing levels vs. organisational needs to ensure optimum staffing levels Learn the various components of a job description and person specification to ensure you recruit the right type of person Learn the recruitment process and identify the legal and organisational requirements to ensure compliance Understand the interviewing process and practice it Learn how to make the correct selection decision

Business and Management

ILM Endorsed Essential Management Skills For New Managers

Who Should Attend?

This Certificate is designed for supervisors and first line managers, to support the development of their skills in maintaining and developing the effectiveness and efficiency of the operations for which they are responsible for, by motivating and developing the people who work in the team or department; fostering effective communications and developing a sense of team/corporate.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Develop effective working relationships to achieve objectives and be able to safeguard the welfare of the team in the working environment 2. Understand the current competencies of individuals and teams and know how to develop them 3. Understand the purpose and process of a recruitment and selection process

E I

36 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

69

Business and Management

ILM Endorsed Function Leadership

(In association with Institute of Leadership and Management)

ILM Endorsed Management Skills For Middle Managers

(In association with Institute of Leadership and Management)

Course Overview

Delegates will focus on developing functional and team leadership skills including thinking skills, planning, people development and quality management.

Course Content • • • • • • •

Developing customer focus Identify the end user for each project Learn to clarify what your customer expectations are Discuss the universal success formula System thinking, conceptual and analytical thinking Innovation, creativity and problem solving Strategic planning

Course Overview

This course is a new, interactive and exciting learning experience designed to help develop a well-balanced approach to business.

Delegates will be able to improve their operational performance immediately. The course maintains a balance between the important areas of business strategy, people development, financial frameworks and operational needs.

Course Content

Who Should Attend?

If you currently lead others or are expected to do so in the foreseeable future this course is for you. Experienced managers will find this a great opportunity to expand on their current style of leadership and explore solutions to challenging situations, while upcoming managers or those with recent advancement to a management position will go through comprehensive training on skills and knowledge required to lead others effectively.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Review your job purpose, KPIs and the projects you are currently working on 2. Explore creative thinking techniques, practice thinking outside the box and develop solutions for current challenges 3. Learn how you can gain support for innovative solutions within your organisation

• • • • • • • • •

Business strategy to activity management Business accounting Planning and organising Influencing and communicating Problem solving and decision making Team building and leadership development skills Developing a leadership charter Coaching, counselling and evaluating people Action planning and personal development

Who Should Attend?

This course is for executives, middle managers, managers and team leaders who want to improve their own management performance and help create a successful high performance operation. It will greatly aid the progress of managers who need to understand the bigger picture and gain additional skills in leadership, strategy, finance, marketing and people management.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Think strategically. Be results focussed and accept the responsibilities that come with management and leadership roles 2. Use financial statements and parameters to evaluate business strength 3. Focus on key strategic control areas in business and finance

70

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In association with Institute of Leadership and Management)

ILM Endorsed Self Leadership

(In association with Institute of Leadership and Management) Course Overview

Course Overview

This course is aimed towards senior level managers. The focus is on strategy, organisational development and strategic decision-making.

Course Content

Course Content • • • • • • • • • •

This course focuses on the development of self leadership qualities.

Participants are evaluated for attitude and personal drive and trained on essential skills and personal habits of great leaders.

Vision and strategy Review your organisation’s standing within your industry Use the right methods to formulate a vision Articulate a vision for your department that aligns with the organisation’s vision The Balanced Scorecard Introduction to the BSC concept of management will expand your view of financial, operational, marketing and development leadership The art of decision making Learn to evaluate situations and formulating options before making the best decisions Explore how great leaders support their decisions and learn to make trade offs for the sake of priorities Facilitating change

Who Should Attend?

If you currently lead others or are expected to do so in the foreseeable future this course is for you. Experienced managers will find this a great opportunity to expand on their current style of leadership and explore solutions to challenging situations, while upcoming managers or those with recent advancement to a management position will go through comprehensive training on skills and knowledge required to lead others effectively.

• • • • • • • • •

Exploring leadership styles and concepts Analyse your natural leadership style Emotional Intelligence Effective communication Developing human relations Learn how to help others develop themselves Time and priority management Drawing on the renowned GTD (Getting Things Done) techniques this course will change your perception of time and productivity Presenting effectively

Who Should Attend?

If you currently lead others or are expected to do so in the foreseeable future this course is for you. Experienced managers will find this a great opportunity to expand on their current style of leadership and explore solutions to challenging situations, while upcoming managers or those with recent advancement to a management position will go through comprehensive training on skills and knowledge required to lead others effectively.

Business and Management

ILM Endorsed Organisation Leadership

Benefits Of Attending

1. Review your career, strengths and future areas of development 2. Formulate a Personal Development Plan to include long-term goals, ambitions and career aspirations 3. Understand the Situational Leadership Model

Benefits Of Attending

1. Explore the possibilities of growth and the areas of development required for your organisation to compete 2. Explore the methods of deploying strategy within your organisation 3. Practice and demonstrate communicating your decisions to different audiences including customers, team members, senior managers and shareholders

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

I A

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

71

Business and Management

ILM Endorsed Supervisory Management Skills Course Overview

This course focuses on all aspects of management, from methods and processes to the softer skills of staff relations. It provides the foundation and the framework for continued learning and development and is also the perfect model for those who want to refresh their knowledge and manage more effectively.

• • • • •

Understand the difference between strategic, tactical and operational levels of management Understand management and leadership Ensure that your organisation and time management is as effective as possible Deal with people more effectively Handle common problems Be more self confident and effective

Course Overview

Delegates will focus on developing functional and team leadership skills including thinking skills, planning, people development and quality management.

• • • • • • •

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for supervisors and prospective managers who want to further their skills with new methods and tools and become an even more vital link in the management chain. It gives all new supervisors and managers the necessary tools and techniques to get started in management. During this challenging, motivating, stimulating and enjoyable four-day course you will be given the knowledge, skills and confidence needed to be able to hit the ground running as a new supervisor or manager.

1. Increase your management effectiveness with your team by understanding a range of different managerial styles and knowing how and when to use them for maximum success 2. Build the effectiveness of your team by establishing a systematic process for planning work, agreeing expectations and monitoring performance 3. Build a high performance team and extend your influence by improving your interpersonal relationships and building a culture of trust, openness and collaboration

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

Motivating others – teamwork and team development Developing performance Discuss the 3 components of performance: character, behavior and results Set performance standards more accurately, identify performance gaps and use the right tools to close these gaps Delegating and managing conflict Practice and formulate methods of mediating within your teams as conflicts arise Performance appraisal

Who Should Attend?

If you currently lead others or are expected to do so in the foreseeable future this course is for you. Experienced managers will find this a great opportunity to expand on their current style of leadership and explore solutions to challenging situations, while upcoming managers or those with recent advancement to a management position will go through comprehensive training on skills and knowledge required to lead others effectively.

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending

72

(In association with Institute of Leadership and Management)

Course Content

Course Content •

ILM Endorsed Team Leadership

I

1. Explore the three major motivation theories and immediately practice putting them into use in your verbal and written communication 2. Gain insight on what motivates the people you work with and how great leaders use this insight to create intrinsic rewards for good performance 3. Enhance your ability to delegate work and responsibility to team members, creating motivating challenges in the process to increase job satisfaction

I A

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

International Business Etiquette And Protocol

Course Overview

Course Overview

This course combines theory, practice and lots of relevant examples, to quickly and effectively improve your presentation skills. There will be a powerful combination of key learning techniques including critical observation, practical exercises and videotaped practice sessions. The course is focused on both theory and practical experience to quickly and effectively improve participants’ presentation skills.

Course Content

Course Content • • • • • • •

As global business continues to expand and bring everyone closer, the critical element of a successful business outcome may be the appreciation and respect for regional, country, and cultural differences - known as cultural diversity, and requiring good inter-cultural communication.

• • • • • • • • •

What every presenter needs to know Getting started Applying what has been learned Structuring a presentation Audiovisual aids The importance of delivery Different kinds of presentations

Who Should Attend?

This course will benefit executives, managers and supervisors who give presentations to others, represent their company to clients, need to motivate employees, want to speak with confidence or want to be more successful.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Communicate effectively to groups of any size 2. Speak confidently at conferences, meetings and briefings and professionally represent an organisation 3. Use visual aids effectively and keep audiences interested and engaged

Etiquette Manners The art of communication Strategies for you Etiquette in the office Business entertainment Manners that sell Etiquette for leaders International protocol

Who Should Attend?

• New Hires • Sales professionals and customer service representatives • Leaders and managers • Seasoned professionals and senior managers • Inter-generational workforces Organisations, associations, individuals, colleges and universities call upon International Business Etiquette and Protocol to add the polish that builds profits and to develop the skills that build lasting business relationships.

Business and Management

Influential Presentations And Communication Skills

Benefits Of Attending

1. Acquire impressive international business etiquette and manners needed for your international travels and overseas assignments 2. Build effective cross-cultural communication skills and master the techniques necessary to attract more customers to outclass the competition 3. Gain knowledge of diplomatic norms, etiquette and protocol related to the various forms of interaction to cover a wide range of international business relations and business entertainment

18 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I

E I A

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

73

Business and Management

Leadership For Emerging Leaders

Leadership Skills For The Public Sector

(In association with Bond University) 20 points

Course Overview

Course Overview

This course blends key established modern and traditional management concepts (aimed at realisation of strategic objectives) with more advanced concepts of human behaviour, and especially workplace related aspects of human behaviour.

This approach has been formulated to provide delegates with an ideal foundation for advancement beyond management and leadership aspects of their core technical profession into higher levels of corporate responsibilities and career development.

The course also investigates the development of key attributes of the modern leader, including intense curiosity and advanced communication skills.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • •

Defining the terms The importance of context Human behaviour, culture and the workplace Leading for innovation Advanced communication for the organisational environment Relationship awareness theory – (and practice) Managing conflict in the workplace The wisdom of emotional intelligence Psychology of leadership – in simple terms Coping strategies for managers and leaders

Effective leadership can help government organisations make the critical transition from intention to implementation, potential to performance, and policy to practice. This is a new and unique course bringing all elements of public leadership and necessary skills needed to lead the public service organisations of the future

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • •

Organisational Leadership Understanding Public Leadership Understanding The Public Leadership Environment Strengthening Leadership In Government Organisations Developing New Public Leadership (NPL) The Service-Leadership-Profit Chain In Public Organisations Building Public Service Leadership Capacity Leaders In The Public Service, Today And Tomorrow Creating Tomorrow’s Government Leaders The Millennium Development Goals (MDGs) The Public Sector Change Leaders

Who Should Attend?

People who can benefit from this course are, but not limited to: Chief Executive Officers, Directors, Deputies, Vice Presidents, General Managers, Branch Chiefs, Strategic Planners, Senior Executives, Human Resources Directors and Managers, Project Managers, Program Managers, Performance Managers, Finance Directors and Managers, Chiefs of Staff.

Who Should Attend?

It’s designed for the professionals who want to better understand management and leadership from both theoretical and practical perspectives to allow them to work more effectively in their workplace and be optimally prepared for promotion opportunities as they arise.

The course has been designed to provide a strong foundation for people intending to undertake graduate or post graduate studies in fields related to management and leadership.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the “fit” of technical skills, management skills and leadership competencies 2. Become engaged with modern paradigms of advanced leadership and communication 3. Acquire a broad range of skills and understanding and equip yourself for successful progression into higher levels of management and leadership

74

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

Benefits Of Attending

1. Equip yourself with all necessary tools to develop leadership traits and skills that are needed to lead the change and overcome the challenges of the new world order 2. Build greater public service leadership by learning more about your served customers and their changing needs, while committing high level of services that respect the social values and the community 3. Acquire understanding of the role of public leaders in the Millennium Development Goals (MDGs) and how to meet those goals

I

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

The Associate’s Certificate In Business Analysis provides an introduction to business analysis for business professionals or those who wish to gain education and skills in a specific area of business analysis. Backed by The George Washington University School of Business in Washington DC, USA (GW), this certificate is ideal for Business Analysts, System Analysts and Process Managers who are seeking Professionals who attain the Master’s Certificate In Business Analysis will gain the knowledge and experience necessary to effectively oversee all aspects of business analysis. This professional certificate, recognized throughout the industry, is backed by The George Washington University School of Business and Public Management and distinguishes truly professional business analysts from their peers.

Courses

The programme consists of 8 courses: 1. Foundations Of Business Analysis 2. How To Gather And Document User Requirements 3. Process Modeling Management 4. Negotiation Skills For Project Managers 5. Facilitation Techniques For Requirements Development 6. Use Case Modeling 7. Strategic Enterprise Analysis 8. Logical Data Modeling

Course Overview

As a business analyst, your ability to communicate business processes and information needs is central to the success of any software development project. The business analyst who can use structured modeling to address and communicate requirements has a distinct advantage. Business Data Modeling explores business rules, policies and procedures and how they can be modelled effectively without being limited by technology or organizational structure. Delegates will learn entity relationship diagramming, super and sub-types, attributive and associative entities, and documenting data constraints

Course Content • • • • •

Data Flow Diagrams (DFDs) and Functional Decomposition Diagrams (FDDs) Identifying and describing the conceptual data model The Logical Data Model Context-Level Data Flow Diagrams The transition to OO/UML

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Business and Management

Master’s/Associate’s Certificate In Business Business Data Modeling 24 PDUs Analysis

Create logical data models to define business and project requirements Describe the elements of data-flow diagrams and functional decomposition diagrams, and their relationship to logical data models Apply logical data modeling to the overall software development life-cycle and respond to business management issues

Delegates registering for The Associate’s Certificate In Business Analysis must take one or both of the following introductory courses (Foundations Of Business Analysis/ How To Gather And Document User Requirements) and complete at least one of the other five courses.

Delegates registering for the Master’s Certificate In Business Analysis must complete eight courses in a four-year period.

Who Should Attend?

Business analysts, systems analysts, IT business analysts, technical business analysts, requirements managers, project managers, project leaders, project directors, program managers, program directors, senior project managers, project advisors, PMO managers, business managers, business process managers and business excellence managers will all benefit from attending these courses.

I A

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

75

Business and Management

Business Process Modeling Management

Developing Use Cases

Course Overview

Course Overview

24 PDUs

The importance of the business analyst’s role in defining requirements during the planning phases of a project continues to gain recognition across all industries. The business analyst, working in conjunction with the project manager, facilitates the solution of business challenges.

However, when gathering requirements for a new or existing project, business analysts must be mindful that any project may require the development and redesign of accompanying processes. In fact, the business analyst must act as a change agent to help ensure that the newly implemented processes not only enhance the success of a project, but also increase the project’s chance of meeting the organisation’s business goals.

• • •

Describe the Process Modeling Management (PMM) framework Define key PMM terms and concepts Conduct major activities performed during each phase of PMM, including workflow modeling Perform the business analyst’s role and responsibilities in PMM Apply PMM methodologies and techniques specific to the business analyst’s role and responsibilities Create process benchmarks and develop metrics to track the effectiveness of new processes

Benefits Of Attending

1. Perform the four phases of a process improvement project-define, analyse, implement and control-which have been derived from the leading process improvement models in the industry 2. Focus on the competencies necessary to perform workflow modeling to ensure you have the core tool required to document the processes.

3. Develop the competencies required to create new process benchmarks and measurements for new processes.

76

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

As a fundamental component to identifying requirements for a new system, business analysts must be able to illustrate how “actors”, such as end users, stakeholders, or related systems, will be affected once the new system is implemented. This process, also known as Developing Use Cases provides business analysts with a powerful tool for documenting functional requirements-and the interactions between these requirements in a manner that can be easily communicated to designers, programmers, project managers, and other project stakeholders.

Course Content •

Course Content • • •

24 PDUs

I

• • • • • •

Employ use cases to elicit, analyse, document and communicate functional requirements for software Use the Unified Modeling Language (UML) to create use case diagrams Determine when to employ use case modeling Priorities use cases based on their importance to the business and on technical considerations Describe ways to develop consistent vocabulary between use cases and objects Analyse and document detailed requirements using an object model Read a class diagram

Benefits Of Attending

1. Gain the required competencies for creating use cases and use case diagrams, which serve as a vehicle for eliciting, analysing, documenting and communicating functional requirements.

2. To fully gain the benefits of UML, you will create use case diagrams through an object-oriented approach, which enables business analysts to sift through the complexity of a system by breaking it down into smaller units.

3. Gain the ability to integrate use case modeling within the software development life cycle to ensure that project requirements are accurate, complete, and map to the objectives of the business.

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Foundations Of Business Analysis 24 PDUs

18 PDUs

Course Overview Course Overview

The business analyst spends a significant amount of time facilitating requirements. Yet, many business analysts lack formal training on this vital skill.

A successful facilitation session results in requirements that you can begin to analyse and work with. Facilitation Techniques For Requirements Development focuses on teaching the facilitation skills necessary to elicit and analyse requirements on a project.

Course Content

Course Content • • • • • • •

Identify the use of facilitation in business analysis Explain the role and responsibilities of a business analysis facilitator Plan a facilitation session Use the appropriate facilitation techniques for a given session Conduct a facilitation session using best practices Manage conflict during a session Identify facilitation opportunities in business analysis

Benefits Of Attending

= Earned Training Hours

• • • • • • • •

1. Learn how to effectively help stakeholders define their needs and form these needs into quantifiable requirements through facilitation.

2. As a facilitator, you will learn how to prepare for and conduct both face-to-face and remote group sessions.

3. Practice new skills in a safe environment with a trained facilitator to guide you through various activities. You will leave the class with the confidence to prepare for a session, including creating a facilitation plan, motivating a group’s participation, building consensus, managing conflict, maintaining session focus and evaluating results for lessons learned.

18 Hrs

Foundations Of Business Analysis is designed to provide you with a basic understanding of the benefits, functions and impact of this critical role. The target audience for this course includes those who are new to the business analyst role or those who supervise and/or work with business analysts. This course provides a special focus on the business analysis function as it relates to developing information technology solutions, given that such an understanding is essential for project success.

I

Identify the roles and responsibilities of the business analyst Define requirements Explain the importance of managing risk Define the solution vision and scope Plan the requirements elicitation process Recognise the importance of analysing and documenting requirements Explain the role of modeling for documenting and communicating requirements Perform requirements validation and traceability

Business and Management

Facilitation Techniques For Requirements Development

Benefits Of Attending

1. Learn how a business analyst supports the project throughout the solution development life cycle, from establishing the solution vision and scope in the analysis phase to validating that requirements have been met in the testing phase.

2. Understand why and when to involve the business analysis function.

3. Have a working vocabulary to enable you to communicate effectively with those who perform that role.

E

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

77

Business and Management

How To Gather And Document User Requirements

Negotiation Skills For Project Managers 24 PDUs

30 PDUs

Course Overview Course Overview

Incomplete requirements are often cited as the number-one reason projects or systems fail. Accurately identifying the requirements and staying on course from the beginning is key to success in today’s business world. This “how-to” course introduces the roles of the business analyst as they relate to the analysis and documentation of requirements. It familiarizes participants with the core knowledge and skills required to identify and document user requirements. It also addresses how these requirements are managed throughout the life cycle.

Course Content •

Course Content • • • • • • • • •

• •

Roles, definitions and key principles Types of requirements Vision, scope and quality Introduction to modeling Creating a requirements work plan Elicitation techniques Documenting requirements Managing consensus Validating requirements

• • •

1. Define the role of the business analyst in the requirements process 2. Effectively document a solution’s vision and scope and develop a Requirements Analysis Work Plan 3. Elicit, structure, analyse, validate and document business requirements

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

Use competitive and collaborative negotiation strategies with success Recover a stalled negotiation using breakthrough techniques Adjust your negotiating style to match the preferences of the other party Deactivate the impact emotions and focus on finding agreement Apply negotiation skills for efficient cost and schedule performance Plan strategies to effectively develop and manage collaborative relationships critical to your project

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending

78

Negotiation is an invaluable skill for any project manager. Not only do you negotiate agreements with vendors and contractors, but you must effectively negotiate with stakeholders, customers and team members throughout the life of a project. This four day, highly interactive experience covers the dynamics, processes and techniques of internal and external negotiation situations faced by project managers. Short on lecture and long on practice, this course provides you with the opportunity to experience one-on-one negotiations.

I

1. Learn how to analyse your own and the other party’s negotiation style, diffuse conflict and turn it into an advantage, and negotiate more effectively.

2. Learn how to negotiate for efficient cost and schedule performance and achieve successful results on time.

3. Explore the dynamics of both the competitive and collaborative models of negotiation as well as some of the implications of team negotiations.

I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Maximising Benefits Delivered Through Change

24 PDUs

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Course Overview

Senior business analysts are increasingly involved in pre-project activities to ensure that solutions to business problems reflect the organisation’s business strategy. Through strategic enterprise analysis, the senior business analyst becomes a vital contributor to helping the organisation determine sound investments and enhance its project portfolio. These activities ensure the organisation can maximise the return on investment, minimise duplication of efforts across the organisation, and realign business operations to meet executive management’s strategy.

Strategic Enterprise Analysis is an advanced course designed to provide you with the knowledge you need to begin working as part of a strategic enterprise analysis team. In particular, the course covers the major activities of strategic enterprise analysis that must be conducted to study the enterprise architecture.

Course Content • • • • • • • • •

Identify core competencies for the organisation Model the As-Is and To-Be enterprise architecture Perform customer value analysis Plan for process management Identify the To-Be IT architecture Recognize the importance of service-oriented architecture Manage the project portfolio Recognize the importance of impact analyses, risk analyses and feasibility studies Identify the components of the decision package

Benefits Of Attending

1. Analysing core competencies, performing customer value analysis, performing process management, examining the IT architecture, and evaluating the project portfolio. Examines the impact of service oriented architecture (SOA) on the enterprise architecture.

2. Understand the steps for modeling the As-Is and To-Be enterprise architectures and how the To-Be enterprise architecture contributes to the overall project portfolio.

3. Understand the importance of conducting an impact analysis, risk analysis and feasibility study

Course Overview

Benefits Management is the ‘business end’ of change management i.e. it is the delivery of the value the change initiative was conceived to deliver. This practical detailed course will enable you to manage the benefit and value process from identification through to delivery, ensuring that you maximise the benefits delivered and the return on your investment in change. This course will start with the wider context and challenges of change management and the business case for change, and then focus in detail on the tools and techniques to maximise the benefits delivered through the benefits management process.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • •

Change management and the business case The wider context and challenges for maximising benefits Benefits management fundamentals Benefit definition and types The benefits management process Benefit identification Developing a benefit map Use tools and techniques for planning for successful delivery Understand the benefits realisation plan and programme plan – the linkage/alignment between them Benefits delivery/realisation phase and clinic Tools and techniques for tracking the delivery/realisation of benefits Tools and approaches for reviewing and making adjustments to the plan

Business and Management

Strategic Enterprise Analysis

Who Should Attend?

• • • • • • • •

Change management professionals Programme/project managers Programme Management Office (PMO) managers/members Business case owners Senior Responsible Owners (SRO) Business Change Managers (BCM) Departmental managers Senior managers within organisations

Benefits Of Attending

1. Implement practical benefit management tools and approaches to maximise the benefits and returns on investment on change and improvement initiatives 2. Embed effective benefits management processes by using the right knowledge, skills and tools 3. Understand the challenges for maximising benefits in the real world and learn approaches to overcome these challenges

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

A

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

79

Business and Management

Measuring And Managing Government Performance Management

(In association with Bond University) 20 Points

Course Overview

Governments around the world have increasingly come to realise the value of setting goals, measuring performance and using the resulting data as a core management tool to improve societal outcomes.

This management approach is often referred to as “performance management” or “managing for results.” Experience has shown that, when well used, goals and measurement can greatly improve the operation and understanding of government programs and priorities.

Experience has also shown that misu

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Professional Certificate In Contract Negotiation And Administration

Performance management - definition and rationale The future of program performance Predictions and projections for governance in government The specific organisation’s environment and values What works - some lessons and some directions The future of performance-based financial management The future of people performance The future of personal performance Problem solving and critical thinking Creating a formula for success Strategy deployment for government Performance management framework for government agencies Leadership development Performance assessment and feedback Approaches and trends in rewards and recognition Performance and governance Limitations and tensions

Course Overview

A guide to The Project Managers Role in Pre-Contract Negotiation, Contract Administration, and Post-Contract Negotiation 5 days face-to-face with mandatory additional work by notes study and video/audio review. This course examines theory & best practices in contract planning, negotiating, claims & variations assessment and management, plus practical methods for streamlining contract administration

Course Content • • • • • • •

Examine the process of entering into contractual relationships, and discuss how the Project Manager can contribute to this process Understand contracts: How to read, interpret and evaluate them at a level that contributes to effective contracts negotiation and administration Appreciate the contractual issues surrounding variations, delays and defects, and learn how to manage these Gain insight into procedures to effectively deal with contractual issues and approaches to effective document control, reporting and communication systems Understand contract-related power balances in negotiating various issues in the post-award contract administration context Review strategy options regarding negotiating vs other dispute resolution approaches in the contracts context Understand and apply various aspects of the psychology of relationships to contract negotiation scenarios and formal alternative dispute resolution processes

Who Should Attend?

Government leaders, as well as those who are pursuing a career in the public sector, such as: strategic planners/senior executives/project managers/program managers/analysts/performance managers/ human resources managers/ financial analysts/directors/CEOs/contract officers/chiefs of staff/budget officers/ auditors and accountants

1. Understand how evaluation affects programs’ assessment and contributes to Performance Management 2. Know what Performance Management means in the public and non-profit sectors and understand the basics of how to design a Performance Management System 3. Practice how to develop measurement frameworks, outline the measures that define results and assess the ultimate benefit to customers and stakeholders

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

Supervisors and prospective managers who want to further their skills with new methods and tools and become an even more vital link in the management chain.

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending

80

Who Should Attend?

I

1. Earn a Professional Certificate from Australia’s Bond University, the only university to earn a 5-star rating in every evaluation category in a recent review of Australian universities 2. Count as 35 hours training – enough to fulfill the face-to-face requirement of the certificates 3. Blended learning approach gives you the flexibility to study a major component of the course when and where it suits you before attending the 5-day face-to-face component of the course and then completing the post-course assignment

E I

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Strategic People And Business Leadership Course Overview

Course Overview

This course goes over the key concepts of project management in a gentle and fun way. It walks you through all the key steps from when the project is first initiated or requested, to how it is planned, executed, monitored and then finally delivered and closed.

Course Content • • • • • •

The project organization and you Initiating the project Planning your project scope, schedule and budget Developing your project communications, quality and risk plans Implementing your project Closing the project

Who Should Attend?

This innovative course has been specifically designed for professionals across all industry sectors working as supervisors of small projects or team members providing administrative support or specialized procedure support.

This includes Event Managers, Coordinators, Marketing Executives, Administrative Professionals, Supervisors, Assistants, Project Administrators, Systems Analysts or Technical Coordinators.

This course gives you a highly practical and applied way to reach the heights of business and personal success. It demystifies and redefines strategy, leadership, value in a revolutionary and simple way – a way which is working for many large multinationals and SMEs

Course Content • • • • • • • • •

Who Should Attend?

• • •

1.

2.

3.

Develop project planning and execution skills Effectively understand how project management works for you and your role Learn how to monitor and control your projects for success

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

All Managers/Directors Aspiring For The ‘C’ level Entrepreneurs/Business Owners Heads Of Organisations

Benefits Of Attending 1.

Benefits Of Attending

Shifting mindsets and strengthening business Strategically planning for sustainable growth Becoming distinguished in the market – a star Performance by management excellence Generating collaboration and co-operation Building top teams inspired and motivated Speaking and presenting convincingly and confidently Establishing a strong personal image Managing with high personal impact

2.

3.

Business and Management

Project Management For Non Project Managers

Structure and plan your business, department or even project for strategic success Build the X factor and be distinguished as a business, team or an individual Grasp and use strategy and strategic thinking – simply, practically, powerfully

I A

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

81

Business and Management

Strategic Planning For The Public Sector

The Five Day MBA

Course Overview

Course Overview

Strategic planning is a powerful tool for setting priorities and making informed decisions about the future. Governments are increasingly turning to strategic planning to help them use their resources wisely in a rapidly changing environment.

This course is especially tuned to government institutions whose leadership wishes to improve and strengthen the structure and performance of the organisation. It includes a complete set of practical guidelines applicable to different countries and even within one and the same government organisation.

Course Content

About strategic planning Strategic planning in government organisations Government accountability framework Preparing the path for strategic planning Structure of the strategic plan The financial plan Presentation and communication Implementing, monitoring and reviewing mechanisms Government performance management The Private-Public Partnerships (PPP) Government strategies within the new world Strategic planning and e-government Next generation e-government

• • • • • • • • • • • • •

Who Should Attend?

This course will bring advanced knowledge and learning in the area of strategic planning for all Strategic Planners, Strategic Decision Makers, Senior Directors, Head of Government agencies and departments, Managers, Strategic Analysts, Finance Planners and Managers, HR Managers within Government Organisations and Federal Agencies.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

82

Learn about strategic planning, its conceptual issues, the contextual background and practical application in local governments as well the benefits and characteristics of a good strategic plan and how to make it functional and practical Learn about what strategic direction should be set for the government agency or department; what outcome or performance measures would be appropriate; and how planning, budgeting and performance measures should be integrated and presented Discover the concept of the Government-Private Partnerships and its convenience to the government goods and services. Discover the next generation of e-government; the transformation into smart government

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

In today’s global business environment, every business executive must possess a fundamental knowledge of how companies are constructed, managed and grown to create shareholder value.

Companies that rely on the management of functional silos stand to be at a competitive disadvantage. In this course, delegates will first lay out what shareholders expect from companies and managers.

They will then explore how shareholders and managers evaluate investment decisions and how financial information is formulated and used. Modern forms of businesses result in an inherent misalignment between managers and the shareholders. They will explore its nature and ways of alleviating it.

Course Content • • • • • • • •

Shareholder value objective Development, analysis and integration of financial statements Strategy Compensation Marketing Organisational structure Operations management How investors value companies and projects

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed specifically for executives, senior managers, managers and team leaders who want to improve their management and business performance. It is particularly suitable for managers: • Who are about to move out of a specialist role into a broader general role • With cross-functional responsibilities who need to develop a big picture outlook • Who have been identified as having potential for general management • Who are looking to develop and broaden their general management skills

Benefits Of Attending

1. Build a fundamental understanding of how companies create shareholder value 2. Learn how to evaluate investment decisions and formulate and use financial information 3. Learn how to make more effective strategic and marketing decisions

E I A

38 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

The EFQM Line Manager Development Path (In association with EFQM)

(In association with EFQM)

Journey To Excellence (J2E) Leaders For Excellence (L4E)

Course Overview

The course enables you to understand the EFQM Excellence Model and assess all areas of your organisation; leadership, strategy, people management and development, product development and delivery, customer management and resource management. Passing the assessment formally qualifies you as an international EFQM Excellence Assessor and enables you to potentially act as an EFQM Award Assessor. It will demonstrate to your colleagues and peers that you have acquired the skills and knowledge required to effectively assess an organisation as part of a high performing international assessment team, as well as to develop and practice managerial skills.

During the Journey To Excellence (J2E) training you will learn to identify where you are on your journey to excellence, where you would like to be and how to get there. At the end of the course, you will better appreciate what is required to set out on the journey, not just in terms of tools and techniques but also in cultural development.

Leaders For Excellence (L4E) is designed for managers who want to understand and apply the EFQM Excellence Model within their working environment. Using real application documents, from either the public or private sector and simple, effective tools, participants will learn how to identify areas for improvement and adopt a structured approach to effectively address them.

Forming assessor teams What is Excellence?

The fundamental concepts of Excellence The EFQM Excellence model Understanding RADAR as an assessment tool EFQM management document The assessment process Conducting site visits Conducting interviews Assessing and Scoring Site visit interviews Consolidation – Preparing the feedback Final preparation of feedback reports Contents of feedback reports Review of presentation to management Assessment process – key learning points

Who Should Attend?

Middle and upper level managers who want to understand and apply EFQM Excellence model within their working environment, and quality managers who wish to use EFQM as an assessment tool to drive improvement.

Who Should Attend?

The EFQM Assessor Training is open to anyone who has a deep interest in the EFQM Excellence Model and the Assessment. This course is a prerequisite for those who would like to participate as an EFQM Award Assessor.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Fully understand the assessment process, and work in teams to assess and score using the EFQM Excellence Model Gain key learning points on the assessment process Complete final preparations for site visits and conduct effective site visit interviews

18 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

EFQM helps prepare a new generation of business leaders by offering training opportunities built on practice-based learning and exchange between organisations. EFQM trains business excellence professionals how to assess an organisation using the EFQM Excellence Model. The EFQM portfolio includes courses on how to start your organisation’s “Journey to Excellence”, to business management training for senior managers and high potentials through the Pegasus programme.

Programme Content

Course Outline • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Programme Overview

Business and Management

The EFQM Assessor Training – Assessed Version

I

Benefits Of Attending

1. Perform self-assessments against the EFQM Excellence Model, and start the business excellence programme at your organisation 2. Use the Business Excellence Matrix approach to develop an Enabler Map for your organisation 3. Identify and address root causes of improvement areas by using the DMAIC approach, and supporting improvement tools

I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

83

Business and Management

Journey To Excellence (J2E)

Leaders For Excellence (L4E)

Course Overview

Course Overview

During the Journey To Excellence (J2E) training you will learn to identify where you are on your journey to excellence, where you would like to be and how to get there. At the end of the course, you will better appreciate what is required to set out on the journey, not just in terms of tools and techniques but also in cultural development.

Leaders For Excellence (L4E) is designed for managers who want to understand and apply the EFQM Excellence Model within their working environment. Using real application documents, from either the public or private sector and simple, effective tools, participants will learn how to identify areas for improvement and adopt a structured approach to effectively address them.

Course Content

Course Content

• • • • • • • • • • • •

What is excellence?

Phases on the road towards excellence Self-assessment The EFQM Excellence Model RADAR logic as a management tool Prioritising the output of self-assessment Prioritisation tools Managing improvement projects Taking a systematic approach The importance of a team based approach RADAR Logic as an assessment tool Evolving self-assessment

• • • • • • • •

Who Should Attend?

Who Should Attend?

Middle and upper level managers who want to understand and apply EFQM Excellence model within their working environment, and quality managers who wish to use EFQM as an assessment tool to drive improvement.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand and use self-assessment as an improvement tool 2. Discover how to prioritise improvement actions 3. Understand EFQM’s Levels of Excellence and develop a roadmap for your organisation’s action plan

84

12 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

What is EFQM Excellence Model?

The 9 boxes The RADAR logic Understanding the feedback Fundamental concepts of Excellence Prioritising the improvements DMAIC Improvement Methodology BEM self assessment tool

I

Middle and upper level managers who want to understand and apply EFQM Excellence model within their working environment, and quality managers who wish to use EFQM as an assessment tool to drive improvement.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Learn how to interpret an assessment feedback report 2. Understand how to use the DMAIC approach to pinpoint and address the root cause of improvement areas identified 3. Understand how to use the Business Excellence Matrix approach to develop an Enabler Map for your organisation and complete a selfassessment

I

12 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Women And Leadership

Business and Management

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

Women And Leadership is an exciting and highly interactive course which will equip you with advanced management skills. You will adopt innovative approaches to overcome major challenges affecting today’s women professionals in the Middle East. The workshop-style sessions will encourage you to evaluate processes, tools and techniques, and to use them to make an impact at your workplace. Develop your leadership style and present yourself as a woman who is going places.

You will complete two metrics designed to strengthen your skills in a management role and assess which skills to focus on for your development.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • •

The role of women in management in the Middle East Defining your personal vision as a woman in management – What are your career expectations?

Learning to lead – Developing your leadership style Managing the motivational environment Managing the performance of both individuals and the team Managing conflict as a woman in management How to communicate like a professional – Personal influence skills, assertiveness and the management of emotions Stress management Work/Life Balance - Is Work/Life Balance more difficult for women?

Emotional Intelligence – Understanding how EI can increase your career options The Psychology Of Achievement – Breaking through personal barriers and presenting yourself as a woman who is going places

Who Should Attend?

Whether you are already in a management role, or aspire to be in one, this workshop is for you.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Assess your strengths, areas for improvement and opportunities as a woman in leadership today 2. Enhance your personal assertiveness and communicate like a true professional 3. Successfully manage the performance of both individuals and teams 4. Efficiently manage conflict and discover appropriate resolutions 5. Use Emotional Intelligence (EI) to increase your career options

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

85 Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

A N FI

E C N

FINANCE

3 Day Mini-MBA In Agribusiness ____________________________________________________________________________________ Advanced Budgeting _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Advanced Excel: Spreadsheet Techniques And Financial Applications ______________________________________________________ Advanced Financial Statement Analysis ______________________________________________________________________________ Certificate In Advanced Enterprise Risk Management ( In Association with the George Washington University School of Business) __________________ Certificate In Back And Middle Office Management (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ____________________ Certificate In Cash Flow And Forecasting Management (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) _________________ Certificate In Cash Flow Management (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) _______________________________ Certificate In Corporate Governance Best Practice (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) _____________________ Certificate In Cost Control And Management (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) _________________________ Certificate In Data Analysis And Dashboard Reporting In Excel ( In Association with the George Washington University School of Business) ___________ Certificate In Due Diligence (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ________________________________________ Certificate In Enterprise Risk Management (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ___________________________ Certificate In Fast Closing Monthly And Year End Accounts (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ______________ Certificate In Financial Analysis (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) _____________________________________ Certificate In Financial Control (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) _____________________________________ Certificate In Financial Modelling Using Excel (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) _________________________ Certificate In International Compliance (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ______________________________ Certificate In Investor Relations (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ____________________________________ Certificate In Operational Risk Management (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) __________________________ Certificate In Options And Derivatives (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) _______________________________ Certificate In Retail Credit Risk Measurement, Management And Control (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ___ Certificate In Risk Management (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ____________________________________ Certificate In Working Capital Management (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) __________________________ Chartered Financial Analyst (CFAŽ) Level I Examination Review ___________________________________________________________ Conventional To Islamic - Structuring Issuing And Investing In Sukuk ______________________________________________________ Corporate Valuation ______________________________________________________________________________________________ Credit Risk Modelling _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Developing A Successful Fraud Prevention And Investigation Strategy _____________________________________________________ Developing And Implementing A Corporate Governance Strategy ________________________________________________________ Enterprise Performance Management (EPM) (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) __________________________ Financial Instruments And Risk Management In IFRS - IFRS 7 & 9 And IAS 32 & 39 ____________________________________________ Financial Skills For The Board ______________________________________________________________________________________ Five Day MBA For Finance Professionals ______________________________________________________________________________ IFRS ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ IFRS For Banks And Financial Institutions _____________________________________________________________________________ IFRS For Oil And Gas ______________________________________________________________________________________________ ILM Endorsed Aligning Budgeting With Strategy (In association with Institute of Leadership and Management) _______________________________ Islamic Product Development And Financial Engineering _______________________________________________________________ ISO 31000 – Global Risk Framework (Includes One Day On Basel III) _____________________________________________________________ Mergers And Acquisitions _________________________________________________________________________________________ Project Finance Modelling ________________________________________________________________________________________ Public Private Partnership (PPP) ____________________________________________________________________________________ Reinsurance ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ Risk Based Approach To Anti-Money Laundering (AML) And Combating Terrorist Financing (CTF) _______________________________ Senior Executive Finance (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) _________________________________________ Trading, Custodial Services And International Payment And Settlement Systems _____________________________________________

90 90 91 91 92 92 93 93 94 94 95 95 96 96 97 97 98 98 99 99 100 100 101 101 102 102 103 103 104 104 105 105 106 106 107 107 108 108 109 109 110 110 111 111 112 112 113

Finance

Table Of Contents

89

Finance

3 Day Mini-MBA In Agribusiness

Advanced Budgeting

Course Overview

Course Overview

The 3 day MBA in Agribusiness is designed to bridge knowledge gaps. It is most useful to non-technical people, new entrants, senior managers needing a big picture refresher and professional advisers to the sector. The technical side of agribusiness can be daunting to the uninitiated. To be more pro-active and much more effective you need to be fluent with its language and technology.

Course Content • • • •

How do all the activities fit together and what are the new opportunities?

What are the key commercial, financial and economic drivers?

What are the latest innovations and technologies?

Where are the most promising future investments and how you can access them?

Who Should Attend?

This course will be highly beneficial for those working as company secretaries and legal heads that have had minimal formal training in labour law and wish to consolidate their experience in the region. In addition it would also benefit in-house counsel and lawyers who have recently been transferred to this region.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Gain a helicopter view of agribusiness and food market dynamics and understand the value chain 2. Develop business proposals that create opportunities and tangible value for your organisation. Increase your productivity and make better economic decisions 3. Confidently master technical terms and enhance your credibility with colleagues and clients

Increasingly, it is becoming necessary for those involved in financial decision making to master advanced budgeting techniques. Top organisations are focusing more and more on streamlining their budgeting process. Budgets are used to link strategy to planning, to highlight operational inefficiencies and to set targets. It is also well known that budgets absorb management time and attract a wide range of criticism. Instead of a meaningless annual distraction, the budget should become a flexible, continuous process including changes in strategy and market conditions, competitor moves, advances in technology, efficiency and process improvement.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • •

Alignment to business planning Activity based budgeting and activity based costing Budgeting and controlling overhead costs Rolling forecasts, beyond budgeting and other modern versions of budgeting Budgeting for the creation and use of intangible assets Designing an integrated strategic planning, operational planning and budgeting process Capital budgeting and capital expenditure Depreciation Capital investment Intangible assets Shareholder funds and capital ratios Streamlining the whole planning/budgeting process

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for all finance professionals and other staff members involved in financial decision-making and the budgeting process within their organisation.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Identify the key elements for successful budgeting and forecasting 2. Decide whether an organisation can abandon their annual budget 3. Take advantage of the Beyond Budgeting model and other new developments

90

18 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Advanced Financial Statement Analysis Course Overview

Course Overview

This course provides a complete, high-level education which will teach delegates the skills that they need to respond to the challenges presented by the manipulation of financial data. They will not only learn practical, advanced skills which will help increase their productivity; they will also be enhancing their value as finance professionals.

Course Content

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

This course will provide delegates with the necessary analytical framework and a wide array of practical tools to help them understand and exploit information in financial statements. They will learn how to examine the many valuable and relevant pieces that make up a financial statement including balance sheets, income statements and cash flow statements.

Finance

Advanced Excel: Spreadsheet Techniques And Financial Applications

Importing data into a spreadsheet Naming cells and adding comments Summarising data using pivot tables Linking data in spreadsheets Formatting spreadsheets Using excel macros, and reference and mathematical functions Customising charts Using statistical and database functions, financial functions and logical functions Using data tables and scenarios Auditing spreadsheets Sharing and protecting spreadsheets Financial analysis Cost of capital, capital budgeting techniques and valuations Gearing and capital structure Risk analysis Advanced pivot tables Conditional formatting and data validation

• • • • • • • • • • • •

Importance of economics in financial analysis Credit risk Managing operating funds Tools of financial analysis and control Projections of financial requirements The cost of capital and business decisions Credit risk issues Valuation and business performance Quantification of credit risk Coping with credit risk Credit risk issues Country risk assessment and sovereign debt rescheduling

Who Should Attend?

This course will specifically benefit financial decision makers in major corporations concerned with analysing financial statements to make even better business decisions. It is an ideal course for major corporations, banks and other financial institutions.

Benefits Of Attending

Who Should Attend?

This course has been specifically designed for all finance professionals who are looking to use advanced Excel techniques to improve their computing efficiency and their ability with financial applications.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Build financial and analytical skills and understand financial signals, both weak and strong 2. Learn some of the latest techniques used when analysing financial statements 3. Gain a solid appreciation of financial statements and analysis techniques

1. Work efficiently with related worksheets and workbooks 2. Benefit from new reporting and presentation techniques 3. Use spreadsheet skills effectively for advanced financial applications

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

A

A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

91

Finance

Certificate In Advanced Enterprise Risk Management

Certificate In Back And Middle Office Management

Course Overview

Course Overview

(In Association with the George Washington University School of Business)

On this course risks are scored based on business materiality with each risk being evaluated and compared by it’s financial, legal, reputational, and regulatory impact, and classified by the effect they could have on the business. New understandings of risk emerge, and efficient controls can be implemented to tackle what really matters to the business and drive competitive advantage. In short the focus becomes strategic value instead of managing costs.

Course Content • • • • • • •

Exploring global ERM scenarios ERM In projects and partnerships ERM tips for success Assurance and ERM Risk measurement Analytics for effective ERM The risk register challenges

• • • •

• • • • •

Chief Risk Officers Risk Managers Managers and Directors responsible for the risk management function or process Heads of Internal Audit Heads of Assurance functions Senior Finance Professionals This course will be particularly useful for delegates that have previously attended the Certificate in ERM course – although this is not a prerequisite

Benefits Of Attending

1. Generate measurable value by aligning the enterprise risk management (ERM) framework with corporate performance expectations 2. Engage the board in the analysis of enterprise risk scenarios 3. Foster a culture that reinforces appropriate risk-taking to balance value creation and value

92

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

This course is focused on managing back office operations with treasury, trading books and internal funds transfer pricing used as examples. The procedures and principles discussed may be applied to all types of back offices in banks and financial institutions. The emphasis is on a proactive management style to continuously improve quality throughout back offices while at the same time, establishing efficient processes and delivering cost-effective services. Operational risk and operations management procedures will be discussed in detail and from the perspectives of the treasury, Asset Liability Management (ALM) and trading functions.

Course Content

Who Should Attend?

• • •

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

A

• • •

Operational risk categories, factors, issues and sources Organisational structures of financial institutions, operational event and loss databases Operational risk assessment, identification and measurement Fraud detection and prevention Asset liability management, funds transfer pricing systems and economic transfer prices Managing a trading book from the perspective of the back office OPVaR forecasting, stress testing and scenario analysis Modelling operational regulatory capital charges under BASEL II

Who Should Attend?

Delegates attending this course should have a basic understanding of back office management and operations. From Back Office Managers and Operations Managers to Middle Office Managers and Treasury Managers, this course is for managers that want to learn best practice in operational risk management, with a special focus on back office management and operations.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Examine issues and effective solutions in managing back office staff, transaction volumes, new products and third party suppliers 2. Learn how back office operations can improve the performance of the treasury function and internal funds transfer pricing system of the asset/liability management function 3. Build and maintain an effective and efficient relationship with the front and middle offices

E I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

Certificate In Cash Flow Management

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Earn 24 CPE credits

This course is a thorough walkthrough of cash flow from the cash drivers of different businesses to the cash from operations and free cash flow. The importance of understanding the accounting cash flow statement prepared for financial statements will be covered in detail.

Delegates will be taken through the derivation of free cash flow and how it can be used in both corporates and banks. Cash flow ratios will be developed and used in order to verify and check cash flow calculations.

The second part of the course will cover the forecasting of cash flows.

The end result will be a fully balancing set of forecast financials with a cash flow forecast. The course will include numerous cash flow forecasts’ templates for different types of businesses.

Course Overview

Course Outline

Course Content

• • • • • • • • • • •

How and why cash flow differs from profits Accounting for cash The cash flow statement Cash flow ratios In-depth analysis of understanding the priority of cash flows Identifying cash flow problems Cash budgets Key concepts of financial forecasting Evaluating the drivers of the forecasts Cash flow, income statement and balance sheet forecasting with personal computers Income statements and balance sheets

Who Should Attend?

• • • • • • • • • •

Financial Controllers and Managers Managing Directors Working Capital Managers Auditors Financial Analysts and Business Analysts Business Development Managers Management Accountants Treasury Professionals Capital Planning Professionals Portfolio Managers

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Cash and profit – striking a balance between cash, payments and profits Cash flow cycle – Receipt Cycle and Disbursement Cycle Float management Linking balance sheet, profit and loss, and cash Cash flow statements Fund flow statements Preparing cash flow statements Cash from operating, investing and financing activities Cash flow forecasts and cash budgets Master budgets and cash flow Optimal cash holding Liquidity analysis Cash-focused performance analysis Financing cash flow Short-term financing alternatives Foreign exchange markets

This course will be useful for executives responsible for cash flow in their organisations. Financial Controllers, Chief Finance Officers, Cash Controller, Cash Flow Managers, Treasury Managers, Finance Managers, Accountants, Budget Managers, and Financial Analysts will find the course particularly useful.

1. Learn how cash flow statements are calculated and presented, and interpret cash flow statements and ratios, and identify positive and negative corporate performance 2. Evaluate free cash flow and the ability of companies to meet their financial commitments 3. Utilise the latest computer spreadsheet formats in projecting cash flow

= Earned Training Hours

• Role of the cash flow manager

Who Should Attend?

Benefits Of Attending

24 Hrs

The course will explain the critical role cash plays in determining eventual success or failure of a business model. You will define the contact points of business and the cash cycle. The course will integrate the business process flow with cash flow and accentuate the critical success factors which will help your organisation do more with a limited cash resource. You will recognise the calibrating issues in a cash flow which will reduce dependence on banks. The course will also take you through the complexities of cash management with reference to risks of being exposed to foreign currency, and will explain the working of cash flow hedges.

Finance

Certificate In Cash Flow And Forecasting Management

I

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Understand how cash flow affects profitability and growth Analyse and maximise the performance of your cash management function Compute your own cash cycle and improve its design

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

93

Finance

Certificate In Corporate Governance Best Practice (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Earn 24 CPE credits Course Overview

Course Overview

This course emphasises on international standards and frameworks.

You’ll be able to develop a Corporate Governance strategy for your organisation and meet your long term strategic goals by structuring, operating and controlling your company to comply with legal and regulatory requirements, and meeting environmental and local community needs.

This course will add strategic value by making you understand the concepts of Corporate Governance and turning these concepts into practices. It brings constructive changes to board decision-making with the right mix of Corporate Governance knowledge and best practice.

Course Content • • • • • •

Certificate In Cost Control And Management

Introduction to governance frameworks Strategy for Corporate Governance implementation Management assessment of internal controls Essential elements of Corporate Governance Roles and responsibilities Implementing your strategy

Who Should Attend?

This unique course is designed for those professionals whose responsibility it is to introduce good Corporate Governance into an organisation. This encompasses many different levels of seniority as well as various business functions.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand why good governance is important 2. Be able to measure your organisation’s Corporate Governance status and key gaps 3. Define and interpret the roles and responsibilities for key players

The aftermath of the financial crisis is the ever increasing pressure on revenue. Faced with a competitive market with virtually no price advantage, the only way to succeed and survive is by managing costs. Cost management brings with it a trap wherein the managers fail to identify the costs that can be controlled without harming the bottom line. This course will take you through a journey of developing an in-depth understanding of the components and behaviour of cost leading to introduction of contemporary tools for deciding on achievable cost reduction targets.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • •

Cost management and strategic decisions Components of cost Cost accumulation and reporting Cost accumulation methods Cost reports and decision making Control and management Managing cost of capital Budgets and standards Balanced Scorecard Identifying cost reduction targets Decision tree Designing a decision dashboard

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed primarily for those managers/supervisors within the finance function who need to strengthen their cost control and management capabilities. Those who are responsible for budgeting, financial planning, financial control, credit management, accounting as well as any finance professional who has an interest in controlling the cash flow for their organisation will certainly benefit.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Learn all about the tools and techniques in cost control for effective decision making 2. Understand the nature and behaviour of costs and be able to link it to budgeting 3. Implement your own cost management system by applying the right tools and techniques

94

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

E I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Certificate In Data Analysis And Dashboard Reporting In Excel

Certificate In Due Diligence

Course Overview

Course One: Financial And Commercial Due Diligence

On this course you will learn to identify and sort various data into a useful business presentation (Dashboard). You will understand what data is and why it is important and maximise its value using analytic applications. From this course you will improve your decision making processes via analytic and predictive analysis. You will learn about the visual displaying of data, combining aesthetics, data visualisation, charts, structure, functionality and “real-life” examples of good and bad designed dashboards.

• • • • •

Data analysis theory and data relationships Data analysis tools Using excel as a data analysis tool Charting in excel Chart and table design Dashboard reporting What is a dashboard?

Common mistakes in dashboard design Charting review Adding icons and images to dashboards Making dashboards dynamic Must know tools and techniques Charting for dashboards Bullet-proofing your dashboard

Course Overview

This course covers legal issues specific to the Middle East. You will understand the essential tools you need to control even the most complex of deals, and will also gain first-hand insight into key issues in legal matters including acquisitions and financing, ownership of assets and pending and threatened litigations.

Course Content

Business Analysts Finance Managers Reporting Analysts Financial Analysts Management Accountants Commercial Managers Financial Controllers Business Intelligence Analysts Any staff member involved in data analysis or creating a dashboard

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Understand the principles of data analysis Learn to synthesise and summarise information into a logical framework Explore how to summarise, present and communicate data clearly and concisely

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

When is Due Diligence required?

The phases of Due Diligence Sell Side Due Diligence Due Diligence in public offerings and private offerings Review of important judicial interpretations of Due Diligence

Course Two: Legal Due Diligence

Who Should Attend?

• • • • • • • • •

Course One will provide you with an understanding of the concepts and practices of Due Diligence. Due Diligence is critical for a whole range of corporate finance transactions: acquisitions, disposals and investments in companies. Each element of Due Diligence will be separately reviewed, looking at both the progress of the process and the different organisations involved.

Course Content

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Course Overview

Finance

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

E I

• • • • •

What is legal Due Diligence Transactions commonly involving Due Diligence Due Diligence tasks Sources of Due Diligence data Due Diligence processes

Who Should Attend?

These courses have been designed for those working within finance, investment and legal departments of medium to large corporates who are entrusted with the task of Due Diligence and reorganisation and wish to consolidate their knowledge to make intelligent and successful investment decisions and transactions.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Identify and overcome the most common Due Diligence pitfalls by advising the board of directors on the risks and opportunities of a contemplated transaction 2. Appraise the quality and reliability of information for effective decision making 3. Identify and verify worthwhile investment opportunities

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

95

Certificate In Enterprise Risk Management

Finance

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Earn 30 CPE credits

Certificate In Fast Closing Monthly And Year End Accounts (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Course Overview

This course will give you a comprehensive understanding of Enterprise Risk Management (ERM) and how to embed an appropriate risk management process in your organisation. You will examine the different kinds of risk, including people and process risks and reputation risk, and you will learn how to report on risk and establish an appropriate risk awareness training programme.

Course Content • • • • •

Understanding Enterprise Risk Management (ERM) Practical identification and evaluation of risks Dealing with the risk The wider aspects of risk (CSR and ethics, corporate governance) Recording the risk environment

Who Should Attend?

Risk managers and directors, senior internal auditors and audit managers, assurance professionals working in compliance and quality assurance functions who are being asked to review the risk process, and finance managers and insurance professionals who need to understand the wider approach to risk management.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Learn the concepts and practical application of risk management with different techniques for identifying risks and implementing effective risk mitigation strategies 2. Understand how you can embed an ERM approach, the benefits of an enterprise-wide approach to risk and how to link risk management with your business planning process 3. Evaluate techniques for the assessment of people, process and reputation risk as well as how to record the risk process effectively

Course Overview

By attending this course you will develop an in-depth understanding of fast close processes, policies and systems and how to improve your current close processes and systems to achieve world class fast close goals. You will improve data quality and free up your finance staff to focus on activities that add greater value to your organisation, such as business partnering, focusing on business forecasting and budgeting and participating in new project initiatives.

The course is comprehensive across the whole supply chain of information needed to achieve consolidated financial results. It will cover both fast close principles applied to the closure of your company’s local ledgers as well as the process of consolidation across the multiple companies making up your group. You will also cover the appropriate best practices in quality control in recording transactions in the subsidiary, closing the books monthly and performing the group wide consolidation.

Course Content • • • • •

Understanding the internal and external benefits and advantages of fast close Setting up and managing a fast close project The tools and techniques needed to improve the close cycle during the diagnosis phase Developing the road map for achieving excellence in fast close and group reporting Systems and how they can be used to support fast close

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for those involved in: Finance, accounting, financial control, finance and information systems, financial accounting and administration.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Learn advanced analytical techniques and methods designed to focus on remediation of problems and decisions, and apply the information to solve key management issues 2. Discover insights into the issues involving risk, sensitivity, influence in decision making and identifying patterns of performance 3. Acquire capabilities and skills to analyse various aspects of business performance and apply the appropriate actions to reach solutions

96

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I A

E I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Certificate In Financial Analysis

Certificate In Financial Control

Earn 24 CPE credits

24 CPE Credits

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Course Overview

Course Overview

Course Content

Course Content

The role of the financial manager in organisations has become far more important and complex. The function of the finance manager is very diverse and they may be required to play a major role in dividend decisions, capital budgeting decisions, the capital structure of the firm, decisions in relation to mergers and acquisitions, and further investment decisions of the firm. This course will cover the essential areas of financial analysis to ensure you are more than ready to meet the challenges ahead. You will obtain the financial analysis skills you need to add value to key business decisions in your organisation. It will help you understand the role of the financial manager in the regional and the global marketplace as it will provide you with the knowledge to reduce risk exposures of the business by applying effective risk management techniques.

• • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

The role of financial analyst and skill-set Balance sheet barrier - the key to value Cost and value of capital Net Present Value and other calculations Dividend policy setting Asset and cash management Financial forecasting techniques Ratio and trend analysis

Who Should Attend?

• • • • • • • • • •

Group Finance Directors Finance Managers/Directors Financial Analysts Financial Controllers Financial Accounts Managers Heads of Finance Departments Credit Controllers Corporate Financiers Credit Risk Managers/Analysts Financial Advisors

This course is designed for people who have an understanding of accounting processes. It provides new insights into accounting and financial decision making processes. It is particularly appropriate for Finance Managers/Directors, Financial Analysts, Financial Controllers, Financial Accounts Managers, Heads of Finance Departments, Corporate Financiers, Financial Advisors.

1. Know how to improve the quality of the financial data in your company and group 2. Understand how to adopt best practice for group reporting and consolidation policies and processes 3. Have the know how to improve your processing ability, particularly on inter-group transactions

= Earned Training Hours

The role of the financial controller Skills needed to fulfil the role Financial administration Financial reporting issues Business forecasting and reporting The budgeting process IFRS and its implications for the future Regulatory and statutory compliance Financial statement analysis Monitor company performance The tangible versus the intangible value of the firm Valuation of the firm The role of financial markets People management

Who Should Attend?

Benefits Of Attending

24 Hrs

No business can survive even the best of times without a firm control of its financial affairs. The increasingly dynamic environment in which businesses operate places ever greater strains on all aspects of business control. The Financial Controller is faced with an increasing number of challenges. The ability to understand the issues and implement the tools and techniques that drive financial decision-making within the organisation is becoming ever more complex. Certificate In Financial Control is designed to give you the competencies to implement the financial control process within your organisation – as either the manager of the process or as a key participant required to make a significant input into the planning process. This course is designed to develop both your knowledge of and skills in financial operations.

Finance

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

I

Benefits Of Attending

1. Identify the key tasks of the financial controller and drive profitable financial decision-making within your firm 2. Leverage your organisation’s financial position for maximum corporate gain 3. Develop an understanding of the available tools that ensure the financial controller function is strategic to the value of the firm

I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

97

Finance

Certificate In Financial Modelling Using Excel (In association with The George

Certificate In International Compliance

Washington University School of Business)

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Course Overview

Course Overview

The objectives of this course are to improve participants’ financial planning skills and Excel modelling skills so that they become more effective managers. This will be achieved by developing their understanding of common financial statements and their relevant terminology allied to developing some useful working Excel models throughout the course. They will also gain a thorough understanding of cost behaviour and how this is incorporated into break-even planning and the financial control of both operational and capital budgets.

Course Content

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Introduction to financial modelling and financial planning Avoiding Excel errors Making model using friendly Review of the financial control requirements of an organisation Profit and loss accounts and balance sheets Performance measurement and trend analysis through ratios Importance of understanding cost behaviour in financial planning Creating an operational budget using excel Working capital budgets – creating appropriate financial models Cash flow budgeting Recognising future cash problems and taking remedial action Demonstrating the use of spreadsheet modelling for sensitivity analysis Modelling for risk assessment

Who Should Attend?

This course has been specifically designed for business and finance professionals who need to improve their skills using Excel for financial modelling. Advanced knowledge of finance and Excel is not required, however delegates should be reasonably comfortable working with financial statements, fundamental financial concepts including trends and ratios, payback, discounted cash flows and IRR, and using spreadsheets, formulas, basic formatting and creating charts in Excel.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Learn how to measure and interpret the performance of an organisation using Excel modelling 2. Create and manage a budget using variance analysis 3. Discover how to construct reliable and realistic financial models that work and are easy to review

98

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

The goal of this course is to provide compliance officers and managers with skills that can be immediately used upon return to the organisation. You will learn to appreciate the extent to which organisations and their public officers are exposed to in the everincreasing regulatory environment, how to identify the compliance issues that have the most significance for you and how to introduce a compliance management programme within your organisation.

E I

• • • • • • •

Introduction to compliance Regulatory drivers of compliance Compliance and business ethics Compliance and the role of Corporate Governance Developing a corporate compliance programme Implementation of corporate compliance BASEL II and compliance

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed to provide a holistic overview of compliance.

All professionals with responsibility for compliance will benefit by attending, specifically: • Directors and Senior Managers • Company Secretaries • Compliance Professionals • Risk Managers • Legal Advisers and Lawyers • In-House Corporate Counsel • Auditors and Audit Managers • Compliance Officers and Managers

Benefits Of Attending

1. Define the meaning of compliance for your organisation and be capable of developing an organisational response to its demands 2. Appreciate the relationship between corporate ethics, governance and compliance, including the market expectation of that relationship 3. Know what drives your compliance exposure both at home and abroad and understand the risk consequences of noncompliance

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Certificate In Operational Risk Management

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Course Overview

Investor Relations (IR) is the communication of market intelligence between a company and the investment community, by which the company and its investing stakeholders share information and describe the investment proposition of the company. IR is a critical part of corporate strategic management, having a direct impact on the company’s ability to present itself in within an environment of rapidly increasing information, and to compete for investment resources. Many IR practitioners are multidisciplinary professionals combining finance, communication, marketing and legal skills.

Course Outline • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Introduction to Investor Relations (IR) The business case for an IR programme Traditional and social/new media trends Understanding the portfolio and value Building an IR community Linking IR with other management functions Structuring an IR programme Communication techniques and tools Rules and regulations Developing Corporate Governance issues that impact investors Investment process Post-Investment process Future developments

Who Should Attend?

• • • • • • •

CEOs, CFOs, Managing Directors, Board Members, Boards of Directors Investors/Shareholders Board Secretaries Financial Communications, PR, Internal Communications, Corporate Communications professionals Corporate, financial and investment personnel from all listed companies on stock exchanges/financial markets Fund Manager and Directors from investment management firms and securities research organisations Corporate Governance, CSR and Compliance professionals

Benefits Of Attending

1. Determine and promote the best practice in Investor Relations, and structure and implement a strategic IR programme 2. Develop effective skills to disseminate messages to the investment community 3. Understand IR’s role in Corporate Governance and manage IR dilemmas, crisis management and regulatory change effectively

18 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I

Course Overview

Of all the disciplines related to the financial management of a business, there is none as closely related to success in times of recession as risk management. In ongoing operations, for new investment decisions and even for the simplest of decisions, risk management should be at the forefront of the prudent manager’s mind right now. This course will equip you with the skills to cope in the new and hardened world of professional risk management. It focuses on the practical tools and techniques that you can use to take your operational risk management infrastructure to the next level of sophistication.

Finance

Certificate In Investor Relations

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Operational risk management – defined and verified Issues in operational risk Quantitative versus qualitative usage Types of risk faced by organisations Banking and finance applications Basel II – the new accord Enterprise wide operational risk applications Waterfall effect of Basel II Awareness, culture and application Drivers and planning The application of governance Market risk applications The future directions of operational risk management

Who Should Attend?

This course is of particular interest to all risk managers with day-to-day risk responsibilities. It is also very relevant to senior managers with an operational risk oversight role. Although it will be of particular use to risk professionals in the financial services and banking industries, the core themes and learning outcomes are applicable to all industries.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Develop an understanding of the most critical issues confronting the operational risk professional in the contemporary organisation 2. Explore the types of risk faced by organisations and define and verify operational risk management to analyse the working models 3. Gain insight into operational risk management through Basel II and other approaches

I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

99

Certificate In Options And Derivatives

Finance

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

This course consists of a combination of training, discussion and exercises. Delegates are not expected to have a detailed knowledge of derivatives but should have an understanding of the concepts.

The course will focus on the principles and pricing of derivatives with valuations being done on Excel, accounting and application.

Course Outline

Financial Mathematics • The yield curve and the concept of forward rates • Interest rate futures • NPV calculations and Internal Rate of Return • Bootstrapping mathematics • Bond equivalent yield Concepts Of Probability • Event diagrams and total probability rules • Probability and normal distributions Equity Derivatives Financial Futures Foreign Exchange Interest Rate Swaps Cross Currency Swaps and Equity Swaps Credit Default Swaps Equity Options • Equity index options and stock options • Options as a hedge and trading instrument • Volatility – Implied versus historic • Delta and Gamma • Accounting for options Commodity Derivatives Application of Derivatives

Certificate In Retail Credit Risk Measurement, Management And Control (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

Analytical credit risk in retail lending is the focus of this course with practical examples of scoring systems. Both application scoring and behaviour scoring are covered together with segmentation (pooling).

Best practice is examined for the measurement and management of credit risk in the retail area including small business lending, revolving, consumer and card loans and mortgages. The training explains modern retail banking within the Basel II framework and presents best practice in the areas of identification, measurement and management of retail credit risk.

Course Content • • • • •

The foundation Modern scoring techniques Risk differentiation and pricing Capital for retail risk Profitability analysis

Who Should Attend?

Credit officers and managers, credit risk managers, credit risk analysts, credit risk controllers, credit auditors, credit administrators, retail banking managers, finance managers, financial controllers, risk managers, portfolio managers, auditors/internal auditors, Basel II project team members, compliance officers, financial and systems analysts.

Benefits Of Attending

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for accountants and auditors, financial directors, financial managers, banker and traders.

1. Learn best practice approaches for retail credit risk management 2. Explore the latest quantitative credit measurement and management techniques for the retail credit sector 3. Get familiar with probability of default and loss given default at the segment level

Benefits Of Attending

1. Gain a working knowledge of the principles of derivatives, including pricing and accounting 2. Gain an understanding of the application of futures, swaps and options 3. Appreciate the key concept of yield curve and its use, apply and use interest rate derivatives effectively, including the swaps market

100

18 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I

E I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Certificate In Risk Management

Certificate In Working Capital Management

Course Overview

Course Overview

During this course you will explore the various risk exposures that may directly affect your organisation. You will gain a clear understanding of up-to-the-minute theories and systems for risk management and develop your own set of tools and techniques for combating risk within your own organisation. This course has been specifically designed to highlight the importance of accurate risk assessment and risk mitigation.

Course Content • • • • • • • •

Risk basics beyond disciplines Banking and finance specifics Corporate applications Integrated risk management Platform for expansion of knowledge Basel accord Capital allocation Operational risk evolution

Who Should Attend?

This highly practical course has been specifically designed for: Risk Managers/Analysts, Corporate Treasury Managers in banks and corporations, Finance Directors and Managers, Financial Controllers, Accountants, Dealers, Market Risk Staff, Brokers, Internal Auditors and Operations Managers. Plus anyone who is responsible for analysing company financial risk and dealing with the various risk exposures that may affect their organisation.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Develop an understanding of the value of risk within an organisation 2. Examine various worldwide risk standards and dissect the ISO standard ISO 31000:2009 3. Analyse application tools and strategies for successful implementation of holistic risk management within your organisation

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

This course will focus on practical issues of working capital management with a focus on today’s economic environment. A strong cash flow management theme will ensure that all aspects of working capital, from systems to processes and receivables, payables and inventory management will steer to cash enhancement.

Finance

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Cash management and liquidity Cash flow and working capital Investing methods Fundamentals of working capital and ratios used in working capital The cash conversion period Accruals and non cash items Analysing cash flow statements Profitability measures Working investment management Investment decisions and funding decisions Cash Budgets, inflows and outlows Accounts receivable Forecasting cash flow Use of sensitivity analysis and simulations Cash Flow Available for Debt Service (“CADS”) Debt capacity (debt service capacity as a key indicator of risk) Inventory management Economic Order Quantities (EOQ) Just-In-Time (JIT) The payables processes management International Working Capital Management Financing international transactions Foreign exchange risk Hedging processes Enterprise resources management

Who Should Attend?

• • • •

Financial controllers Accounting functions Treasury related functions Business managers and others wanting to become more knowledgeable about working capital

Benefits Of Attending

1. Powerfully improve cash flow and liquidity by following a process of working capital assessment 2. Assess areas within your organisation where working capital improvements can be translated to the bottom line 3. Develop a rigorous working capital plan to take your organisation forward in the current economic environment

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I

E I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

101

Finance

Chartered Financial Analyst (CFA®) Level I Examination Review Course Overview

The CFA Level 1 Preparatory course is the best way to prepare for the examination. Refresh your memory, clear your doubts, and sharpen you examination skills. The course will provide you a quick recap of the entire material that you have read earlier and will emphasise on the key concept and clear all doubts that you may have. Simulate your examination scenario by joining the practice tests that are spread across the course. If you are serious about your career in finance, you will not want to miss this course.

Course Content • • • • • • • • •

Ethical And professional standards Quantitative methods Financial reporting and standard Corporate finance Fixed income Derivatives Equity investment Portfolio management Market organisation, market indices and market efficiency

Finance Managers Investment bankers Equity research analysts Credit research analysts Investment analysts Fund associates Treasury professionals Accountants Wealth management professionals

= Earned Training Hours

There are still many untapped opportunities. This course will help you as a financial expert tobe fully equipped tounderstand the methodology of structuring and issuing as well as the technicalities of investing in Sukuk.

Course Content • • • • •

Islamic Law framework for Sukuk Regulatory framework for Sukuk Basis for structuring – laying down the rules Structuring debt-based Sukuk Equity-based Sukuk: Sukuk Al Musharakah And Sukuk Al Mudarabah Further Islamic securitisation – asset backed securities

This cutting edge course is designed for those working within both conventional and Islamic sectors including financial engineering, derivatives trading, risk management, corporate sales, bankers working with derivatives, financial controls, treasury staff involved in structuring, investment management teams, retail and private banking, asset and fund management, brokerage, corporate financing, venture capital, compliance and regulatory offices, legal advising, accountants and auditors, international bankers and project financing.

1. Get a step closer to becoming a CFO by qualifying for CFA charter 2. Learn how to read through the questions and solve them faster 3. Gain examination tips and tricks for last minute preparation

30 Hrs

Several factors support the sustainable growth of the Sukuk market, including the increasing popularity of Shari’ah-compliant products, government openness to Islamic finance, massive investment and financing needs in the Gulf, as well as issuers’desire to tap investors from the Middle East and Asia.

Who Should Attend?

Benefits Of Attending

102

Course Overview

•

Who Should Attend?

• • • • • • • • •

Conventional To Islamic - Structuring Issuing And Investing In Sukuk

I

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand how Sukuk differs from conventional bonds and manage the development of sovereign and corporate Sukuk markets 2. Comprehend the structure of Sukuk transactions, including the different types of Islamic contracts underlying the primary and secondary transactions 3. Successfully control the Shari’ah issues in the issuance and secondary trading of Sukuk and learn to successfully structure equity-based and debt-based Sukuk

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Credit Risk Modelling

Course Overview

Course Overview

On this course, you will learn that the determinants of value are a company’s ability to generate cash and the timing and risk of those cash flows. You will be introduced to multiples-based approaches that come in handy to quickly and roughly evaluate a business. In addition, the course will expose you to advanced valuation techniques that sophisticated companies are using to value managerial flexibility inherent in many business situations, and which traditional cash flow techniques fail to account for. It will cover the latest in corporate valuation including: Relative valuation, DCF valuation, the cost of capital and its implications for you, APV valuation, valuation for M&A, and EVA valuation.

Overview of valuation techniques Fundamentals of corporate finance Relative valuation; valuation using multiples Discounted cash flow valuation Adjusted Present Value (APV) method Economic Value Added (EVA) valuation approach Valuation issues in mergers and acquisitions Introduction to real options valuation Case studies (From Harvard Business School Case)

• •

This course has been formulated specifically for executives with significant strategic responsibility including: Heads of Business Units Equity Analysts Financial Analysts Corporate Advisors Investment Managers Finance Directors Corporate Financiers Corporate Planners and Development Directors

1. Have a clear comprehension of what drives valuation and be able to choose a valuation method appropriate for your organisation and region 2. Make more profitable investment decisions to enhance the value of your business 3. Understand the most widely-practiced and robust valuation techniques

= Earned Training Hours

Organisations and individuals seeking commercial and personal credit and credit lines, those making commercial and personal creditgranting decisions, lending and credit policy makers, commercial and in-house credit scorecard developers and users, credit risk managers and regulators; including asset/liability managers, back and middle office personnel, central bankers, market regulators and bank supervisors, chief risk officers and enterprise risk managers.

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending

24 Hrs

Credit risk, credit exposures, credit rating applications and information, credit quality risk assessment techniques and regression-based credit ratings models Credit scores, credit scorecards, credit scoring techniques, scorecard, management reports and collections management Credit exposures, default likelihoods and dependent defaults, recovery rates, credit spreads, credit rating migration and portfolio credit risk exposures

Who Should Attend?

Who Should Attend?

• • • • • • • •

Course Content •

Course Content • • • • • • • • •

The course is designed to present a comprehensive discussion focused on current and best practice in qualitative and quantitative credit risk modelling and measurement techniques, which have become a required part of the skill sets for both credit risk managers and analysts. The course also presents the best practice for modelling and measuring of credit loss distributions, individual and dependent default probabilities and intensities, recovery rates, credit migration transition matrices, recovery rates and credit spreads. Extensions of Value-at-Risk (VaR) for assessing credit risks are also presented for standalone and portfolio credit risk.

Finance

Corporate Valuation

E I

1. Explore the latest qualitative and quantitative credit measurement and modelling techniques for individual credit facilities, consumer credit, retail, accounts receivables, credit collections and corporate lending, sovereign credits, securitised credit exposures and portfolios of credits, as they can be applied in the region 2. Learn current credit risk modelling best practice for the assessment, measuring and modelling of credit risk factors including potential credit exposures, credit loss distributions, default frequencies, times to default, recovery rates, credit migrations, credit spreads and dependent default frequencies 3. Understand best practice and applicability of structural and reduced-form credit risk models, including an overview of common commercial/vendor credit portfolio analysis models

E I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

103

Finance

Developing A Successful Fraud Prevention Developing And Implementing A Corporate And Investigation Strategy Governance Strategy Course Overview

Course Overview

This course is designed to teach a practical understanding of antifraud management requirements. The course covers nine major subject areas and utilises a variety of training techniques. The key areas of the curriculum include understanding the impact of fraud on organisational value, who is responsible for managing the fraud exposure, the role of corporate governance and ethics in achieving this, and the implementation of anti-fraud measures. The emphasis will be on practical and pragmatic approaches, rather than theoretical.

Course Content • • • • • • • • •

Fraud in the global context Regulatory response to fraud Ethics and fraud control Governance and its impact on corporate fraud Fraud and its impact on corporate reputation Fraud typologies Information and security threats Whistleblower programmes and fraud prevention The fraud investigation

Building upon the general concepts of Corporate Governance, this course is designed to focus more deeply on specific topics which are of regional or international concern, and subjects which are starting to rise on the governance agenda of regulators and other stakeholders. Attention will be paid to how the Board’s effectiveness can be enhanced when working with dilemmas and ethical issues. We will cover international developments with cross border impacts, and resultant changes in director liability, workload and risk discussions.

Discussions will cover how a multitude of regulators are starting to focus on corporate typologies, often creating inconsistent compliance effects which are compounded by the international operations of corporate groups.

Course Outline • •

Who Should Attend?

This course has been developed for professionals responsible for preventing fraud and protecting the interest of their organisations and working in the areas of finance, auditing, security, compliance, anti-fraud, anti-money laundering, risk, legal, accounting, contracts, IT, procurement and purchasing.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the nature of fraud for your organisation and be capable of developing an organisational response to its risks 2. Appreciate the relationship between corporate ethics, governance and fraud, including the market expectation of that relationship 3. Know what drives your fraud exposure both at home and abroad and understand the financial consequences of non-compliance

• • • • • • •

Who Should Attend?

This unique course is designed for the Board Director and senior corporate professional who champions or is responsible for good Corporate Governance in their organisation, or is faced with major governance issues. The course will be delivered at a level which assumes a solid knowledge of general Corporate Governance principles and the international business environment.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

104

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I

Changes in international standards and regulations Major corporate governance failures/challenges in the last two years Changes in internal governance structures Ethics Technology advancements in governance practice Subsidiary governance Family governance issues Sustainability and integrated reporting Investor relations

Develop an advanced approach to Corporate Governance dilemmas Learn how Corporate Governance assists in managing complex corporate cultures Understand how the Corporate Governance environment continues to evolve

A

18 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Earn 24 CPE credits

Course Overview

Enterprise Performance Management (EPM) is about having processes, data and metrics as well as systems that are integrated across the Enterprise and aligned to the business drivers and strategy. In the current economic situation and fast changing world it is the challenge for large Enterprises to adopt EPM knowledge, processes and technology to create Insight and Foresight into the performance of the Enterprise with confidence to result in high performance.

Course Content • • • •

EPM Overview From Strategic Plan To Rolling Forecast From Financial Close To Analysis EPM Applications And Technology

Course Overview

The recent recession in the world economy has highlighted the importance of risk management as a subject and more specifically the importance of identifying and measuring on balance sheet risk. Financial instruments are one of the most critical components of risk. They are on one hand risk mitigants and also an identifier of existence of risk.

Understanding the complexities of financial instruments allows every corporate to be geared up to face the risks in the new financial order.

Finance

Enterprise Performance Management (EPM) Financial Instruments And Risk (In association with The George Washington Management In IFRS - IFRS 7 & 9 And IAS University School of Business) 32 & 39

Course Content

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed primarily for those managers working at large multinationals and working at Group level or Head quarter responsible for the group reporting, group planning and budgeting, group consolidation and performance management: • Group Finance staff • CFO/FD • Group Controller • Group Financial Consolidation and Reporting • Group IT/CIO

Benefits Of Attending

1. Convert their strategy into measures 2. Leverage core components of the business: organisation structure, people and processes 3. Implementation of required IT infrastructure and EPM applications

• • • • • • • • •

IAS 32 – financial instruments Financial Instruments – recognition and measurement – IAS 39 Hedge accounting Derivatives IFRS 7 – Financial instruments: disclosures IFRIC IFRS 9 Risk management primer Implementation issues

Who Should Attend?

The course will be beneficial for those who are responsible for the emergence and management of financial assets and liabilities on a balance sheet. This course will be particularly helpful for: • Chief Accountants • Group Finance Directors • Heads of Finance • Finance Managers and Accountants • Financial Controllers • Management Accountants • Executive Directors of Finance • Managers of Financial Accounts • Heads of Accounting and Administration • Finance and Information System Managers • Portfolio Managers • Financial Analysts • Auditors • Corporate Analysts

Benefits Of Attending

1. Identify the issues and opportunities for the first time adoption of IFRS by managing the critical regulatory issues 2. Select and design effective risk management policies for financial instruments that best suit your organisation in the current financial system 3. Successfully overcome the IFRS 9 migration challenges

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

A

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

105

Finance

Financial Skills For The Board

Five Day MBA For Finance Professionals Course Overview

Course Overview

Demystify the jargon of the financial world from an executive perspective. The overall aim of this event is to equip Board and C-level executives to better manage their responsibilities and decisionmaking; in particular to understand the internal and external financial issues that ultimately determine the success of their organisations.

Delegates will deepen and strengthen their financial management acumen. Special focus will be placed on helping delegates to analyse and interpret the many financial reports that are presented to them.

Course Outline • • • • • • • • • • • •

Course Content

Overview and jargon Basic principles of finance Aligning finance and business strategy Using the Balanced Scorecard Key financial reports and statements Overview of the annual report and accounts Understanding the key financial ratios Funding the business Cash Is King: cash flow and working capital Capital management: investment and returns The investor’s perspective The market, including IPO issues

• • • • • • •

The seminar is designed for non-accountant directors and executives who need to understand better the world of finance, and the financial implications of the decisions that they make.

• Board Directors • C-level Executives • Vice Presidents and other senior executives

Benefits Of Attending

1. Recognise the financial impact of business decisions made at the Board level 2. Analyse and interpret summary financial reports effectively and efficiently 3. Gain a top-down executive overview of the key components of finance and remove the mystique of financial jargon

18 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

Company finance Directors/ Managers Investment bankers Retail and commercial bankers Risk and Budget Managers Financial Analysts/ Accountants Venture capitalists Strategy Directors/ Managers

Experienced managers will benefit from reviewing, confirming and improving their business management techniques. New managers will gain the essential toolkit and confidence. They’ll all get the X-Factor, differentiating themselves and the business

Who Should Attend?

106

As a finance professional you are at the heart of the organisation – ensuring viability and return on investment through vital business decisions. Businesses turn to you and the decisions you make or support will shape the success of the organisation. As such you are central to strategy and should be able to provide leadership and guide the business to success. A strong grasp of your business, strategy and leadership combined with powerful communication will provide you the vital tools for success. This practical toolkit is exactly what is delivered in this programme.

A

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for all accountants and financial professionals who need to learn about or keep up to date with IFRS.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Grasp and build excellence in general business management like strategy, marketing, leadership - gaining techniques and language 2. Enhance ability to support managers across the business to bring greater success and results 3. Get your points accepted (e.g. budgets or cost control) with collaboration and motivation and be able to raise the image and respect of finance as a vital support for and driver of success

E I A

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

IFRS For Banks And Financial Institutions

Course Overview

Course Overview

Course Content

This has had an immediate and ongoing impact on financial reporting by such business entities. This brand new two day course is designed to provide an update on the current developments in the adoption and application of IFRS by banks and their commercial clients.

The focus will primarily be on developments in the recognition, measurement and disclosure of financial assets and financial liabilities in accordance with IFRS.

The International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) is continuing its drive to improve International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) previously known as International Accounting Standards (IAS).

Delegates will be aware of all the recent developments in international accounting by attending this valuable course.

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

IFRS – an essential update IFRS 1 – first time adoption of IFRS Financial statement presentation Measuring financial performance Consolidations including foreign currency issues Segmental reporting Revenue recognition Tangible and intangible assets Liabilities, provisions and contingencies Accounting for financial instruments under IFRS 7, 9, IAS 32 and 39 Impact on implementation guidance – questions and answers Debt/equity classification Subsequent measurement, fair values and impairment Hedge accounting Disclosures

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for all accountants and financial professionals who need to learn about or keep up to date with IFRS.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the latest developments in the growing worldwide use of IFRS 2. Discuss the latest IFRS, Exposure Drafts (ED) and the International Accounting Standards Committee Foundation (IASCF) improvement project 3. Learn about real world challenges to applying IFRS and strategies to overcome them

Many countries’ banks and similar financial institutions are required to prepare their annual financial statements in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS).

Finance

IFRS

The course also covers other areas of financial reporting of significance to banking and financial professionals. Practical financial problems will be analysed and a set of published financial statements for a bank, prepared in accordance with IFRS, will be reviewed.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Financial Instruments Overview Of Historical Developments IAS 32: Presentation IAS 39 And IFRS 9: Recognition And Measurement IAS 39 And Exposure Draft: Amortisation And Impairment IAS 39 And Exposure Draft: Hedging IFRS 7: Disclosures Non-Financial Elements Financial Statement Presentation Non-Financial Assets Leasing Non-Financial Liabilities IFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement Revenue

Who Should Attend?

Professionals with an interest in IFRS as they apply to banks and financial institutions including: Executive Directors of Finance, Accountants, Financial Analysts, Internal Auditors, External Auditors, Portfolio Managers, Bank Managers, Banking Executives, Finance Systems Managers, Auditors, Corporate Analysts.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Gain knowledge and understanding of the latest developments in accounting for financial instruments and their application to banks and similar institutions 2. Understand the impact of the adoption of IFRS on global financial reporting 3. Appreciate developments in IFRS that affect the recognition and measurement in the financial statements of international commercial organisations

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I

I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

107

IFRS For Oil And Gas

ILM Endorsed Aligning Budgeting With Strategy

Finance

Earn 24 CPE credits

(In association with Institute of Leadership and Management)

Course Overview

With the advent of IFRS, it has become critical to understand the impact of various provisions of IFRS on accounting reports of companies in the oil and gas sector. There are few other industries which are as complex, competitive, and entwined with the economy as the oil and gas.

This course will take you through, in detail, various policy and implementation issues involving typical transactions in oil and gas sector and how IFRS affects them. Much beyond a generic course on IFRS, this sector specific course introduces you to issues which are typical to the sector and are not covered in a generic course. The scope of the course is wide – encompassing issues involving fixed assets, leases, inventories, financial instruments, etc. It also includes the impact of latest IFRS releases IFRS 10, 11, 12, and 13 in addition to discussion paper of extractive industries.

Course Content • • • •

Understand the impact of IFRS on various items of financial statements by offering detailed practical examples relevant to the oil and gas Industry Assess the impact of new IFRS 9, 10, 11, 12 , and 13 and gain thorough hands-on through transition case studies Identify the accounting policies best suited to your company Review disclosure requirements with practical insight into real life disclosures

Who Should Attend?

This course will be highly beneficial for those working as company secretaries and legal heads that have had minimal formal training in labour law and wish to consolidate their experience in the region. In addition it would also benefit in-house counsel and lawyers who have recently been transferred to this region.

Benefits Of Attending

1. A unique opportunity to be exposed to a rare combination of understanding and practice wherein the knowledge you acquire will find immediate application in your work place 2. Includes a special section on issues involving first time transition and selection of accounting policies and disclosures

108

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

Course Overview

This unique management training course addresses these three interlinked business challenges in a course designed for managers who seek improvement in the management of both their organisation’s business strategy and budgeting, and who recognise the business benefits that can be achieved from such an approach. Modern techniques such as Value Based Budgeting, Asset Based Budgeting and KPI budgeting will be explored. At the end of the course you will be able to decide on which techniques will be the most beneficial for your specific organisation and you will also have the practical knowledge to implement those immediately!

Course Content • • • • • • • • •

Strategic management Budgeting and its alignment to strategy Modern budgetary applications Value Based Budgeting (VBB) Zero Based Budgeting (ZBB) Activity Based Management (ABM) Activity Based Budgeting (ABB) Rolling budgeting/forecasting Beyond budgeting

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for managers who seek improvement in the management of their organisation’s business strategy and budgeting and who recognise the business benefits that can be achieved by such an approach.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Use management tools and techniques to support strategic management 2. Incorporate budgeting into your organisation’s overall planning process by applying modern budgeting techniques 3. Understand how budget monitoring can fit in with business performance measurement

I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Islamic Product Development And Financial Engineering

ISO 31000 – Global Risk Framework (Includes One Day On Basel III)

This course offers a clear and understandable examination of this dynamic area of finance and is essential for bankers, lawyers, institutional investors and corporate executives. This course will help delegates to fully understand the fundamental religious principles underlying modern Islamic finance and banking.

It will offer the opportunity to understand the religious principles and their interpretation, as well as the diversity and adaptive mechanisms of Islam. This course will primarily focus on financial innovations in Islamic finance.

Course Content • • • •

Basic constructs of Islamic financial innovation Islamic derivatives and structured products Islamic fund and asset management Islamic hedge funds, Islamic REITs and Islamic venture capital

Who Should Attend?

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Accountants and Auditors Asset Managers Chief Financial Officers Corporate Strategists, Developers and Planners Financial Analysts and Brokers Financial Directors/ Managers Financial Planners Fund Managers and Investment Analysts Merchant Bankers Pension Fund Trustees Policy and Strategy Directors Portfolio Managers Risk Directors and Managers Structured Finance Specialists

• • • • • • •

Principles for managing risk ISO 31000 value proposition 11 core principles Framework for managing risk Process for managing risk Attributes of enhanced risk management Risk management through the setting of organisational performance goals Accountability for risk Risk reporting Governance performance

Who Should Attend?

1. Understand key Islamic financial products and learn about Shari’ah principles in Islamic product design 2. Structure appropriate rules for Islamic financial products and be aware of the principles of Islamic securitisation, Islamic bonds and certificates 3. Build hybrid Islamic financial contracts, Islamic Mutual Funds, REITs and hedge funds with confidence

= Earned Training Hours

Course Content

• • •

Benefits Of Attending

24 Hrs

A management course designed to provide a practical understanding of the new global framework for risk management. It covers five major subject areas from the standard and utilises a variety of training techniques. The key areas of the curriculum include understanding the evolution of the standard, the standards core risk principles, the risk framework design and application, a detailed understanding of the components of the standard and how they work and an understanding of the attributes of enhanced risk management. Emphasis is on practical and pragmatic approaches, rather than theoretical.

Finance

Course Overview Course Overview

I A

• • • • • • • • • • •

Senior management exposed to risk and compliance issues Risk Managers Risk Managers Money Laundering Reporting Officers Fraud Managers Compliance Officers and staff Operations Managers Operational Risk Managers AML Project Managers and AML Systems development staff Auditors and Internal Control Officers Regulators and Consultants

Benefits Of Attending

1. Obtain a thorough understanding of the ISO31000 eleven principles of risk management 2. Understand the nature of all five components of the new ISO31000 risk framework 3. Gain knowledge and be confident to apply the five core processes for managing risk

I A

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

109

Finance

Mergers And Acquisitions

Project Finance Modelling

Course Overview

Course Overview

Course Content

Course Content

• • • • • • • • • •

• • • • •

This intensive course aims to help you understand the elements of a good M&A strategy. It is designed to allow you to develop, design and implement a successful M&A strategy, which will help you turn the activity into a value creating exercise, not a value destroying one.

It will use case studies, discussion and presentations to illustrate the linkages between the strategic, financial and human aspects of the M&A process. It’s a hands-on course, which will require engagement by the delegates

Types of takeovers Market perspective (buyer and seller) M&A value creation Valuation issues M&A governance issues M&A processes Due Diligence Management Buyouts (MBOs)/Leveraged Buyouts (LBOs) Securities laws pertaining to takeovers Cross-border (international) M&A

Who Should Attend?

Senior executives, financial analysts/managers, bankers, strategic planners, financial decision-makers, corporate accountants, financial management consultants, market regulators and risk and complianceadvisory professionals and those executives responsible for governance.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the key drivers of an M&A decision 2. Identify all the elements of an M&A strategy and implement it successfully for competitive advantage 3. Know how to modify your corporation’s M&A strategy

110

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

In the course you will build and evaluate a range of project finance models, covering projects as diverse as Public-Private Partnerships (PPP), major energy investments and private hospitals. You will overcome themost complex aspects of building a reliable model, including uncertainty, currency and timescale mismatches, debt amortisation, depreciation, control account waterfall, cost structures, and the ability to easily shift time scales, as well as the ability to identify and control key sensitivities through spreadsheet simulation.

Using Excel For modeling Project cash flow Project finance models Equity Valuations Approaches To Rating In Project Finance Models

Who Should Attend?

This three day course is designed for professionals who are seeking to improve their technical modelling skills including: • • • •

Bankers and financiers involved in project finance Directors and business development executives from corporates, equity sponsors and consultancies Trade finance managers Accountants and lawyers

Benefits Of Attending

1. Overcome the most complex aspects of building a reliable project finance model and explore the role of equity and its rewards 2. Appreciate the structure of a project finance model, its relationship with project contracts and risks it models and be able to produce a detailed model that meets all users’ requirements 3. Understand and model debt, debt covenants, cash waterfalls, intercreditor relations, restructuring and there scheduling of debt

E I

18 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Reinsurance

Course Overview

The countries of the Gulf have growing populations and the governments’ are looking to create advanced technological societies in a single generation. As a result there is an enormous appetite for infrastructure and social development projects, ranging from airports and ports, roads and railways, to schools and hospitals. These are the most challenging and important investment opportunities anywhere in the world.

Although there are substantial funds available for co-investment, most Gulf countries are seeking private finance for these infrastructure investments. This course is about how private finance is and will be used: the logic, financial structure, risk analysis, legal background, contracts and scope of the Gulf infrastructure programme is examined in great depth with a range of relevant local case studies and plenty of group work and participation.

Course Content • • • • • • • • •

Origin and background to private finance in infrastructure Structures In PPP/PFI projects Key issues In PPP/PFI PPP/Private Finance project evaluation Comparative PPP procedures Sources and types of funding Overview of risk and risk allocation Reviewing PPP financial models Contract issues

Course Overview

Reinsurance (or Retrocession) is essential to the well being of virtually all insurers (and reinsurers). The Reinsurance is a two part course that will look at the basics of why reinsurance is critical and review each type, facultative, treaty, proportional, excess of loss.

This course is designed not only to help you understand what reinsurance is, and how it operates but also its importance to organisations operating in the risk transfer market.

Course Outline • • • • •

Buzz words and terminology used by the experts The impact of losses in recent years on reinsurance product design Spill-over, aggregate limits, reverse 2 risk warranty Various reinsurance tools The intent and operation of the major clauses in a reinsurance contract

Who Should Attend?

It is particularly targeted at those who will be actively involved in reinsurance whether in buying, selling or where a firm understanding of the varying reinsurance techniques and how they interact is necessary.

Benefits Of Attending

Who Should Attend?

• • • • •

Course One Proportional Reinsurance Course Two Non-Proportional( X/L) Reinsurance

Finance

Public Private Partnership (PPP)

1. An up -to- date view of reinsurance and its products and the current market place 2. The true cost of reinsurance and pricing techniques 3. A detailed understanding on how all the reinsurance products work and are used

Bankers and financiers involved in major projects Group Finance staff CFO/FD Group Controller Group Financial Consolidation and Reporting

Benefits Of Attending

1. Learn how Gulf countries intend to mobilise private finance for infrastructure 2. Compare Western and Gulf PPP projects and be able to appreciate the different structures for PPP and other styles of private finance investment 3. Review PPP financing structures and financial models by examining PPP contracts in detail

18 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

I

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

111

Finance

Risk Based Approach To Anti-Money Laundering (AML) And Combating Terrorist Financing (CTF)

Senior Executive Finance

Course Overview

Course Overview

This course is a must and of pivotal importance for bankers and policy makers/regulators as it provides the delegates with a holistic overview of money laundering issues; including schemes, effects, and the wide gamut of techniques for combatting it.

Course Outline

Money Laundering (ML) And Terrorist Financing (TF) Processes Money Laundering mechanisms Terrorist financing typologies International initiatives for combatting ML Red flags checklist FATF methodology assessment questionnaire AML/CTF risk-based approach Constructing a bank’s risk-based AML approach

• • • • • • • •

Who Should Attend?

2.

3.

112

= Earned Training Hours

• •

Maximising shareholder value: risk and return revisited Business operations, strategic transactions and other risks faced by organisations Risk and uncertainty Project appraisal Investments and portfolio analysis Portfolio/fund management Introduction to asset management

This course is designed for those working as finance directors and managers, financial controllers and analysts, vice presidents and senior vice presidents, accounting managers, chief accountants, heads of corporate planning, heads of business development.

Benefits Of Attending

Understand the nature and key processes in money laundering and terrorist financing Identify the economic impacts of money laundering and terrorist financing on international development and international safety/ security Comprehend the money-laundering methods and techniques

30 Hrs

Course Content

Who Should Attend?

Benefits Of Attending 1.

Companies today strive to deliver valuable products and services amidst the global recession and they recognise that executives must have a firm grasp of finance to maximise profitability. Every executive whether or not working directly in finance feels the urgent need to be abreast with current trends in financial decision making, latest investment appraisals and risk management techniques. Senior Executive Finance, will guide you through the latest finance concepts, tools and techniques which will help you to make accurate financial decisions and seize opportunities to drive strategic change at your workplace. The course will prepare you to leverage your organisation’s financial position for maximum corporate success.

• • • • •

Board of Directors Senior Bank Management Members Central Bankers (Supervision Department) Regulators Government Policy Makers Compliance and Governance Officers Private Bankers and Wealth Managers (must course) Risk Managers Chief Finance Officers Finance Directors and Comptrollers Securities Analysts Investment Professionals Law Enforcement Agencies MIS and Operations Executives

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

I

1. Obtain an appreciation of the concept of shareholder value and its contemporary application to corporate performance 2. Understand the different methods of project appraisal in contemporary use and how they have evolved over recent years 3. Analyse cutting edge techniques for estimating the cost of capital and capital budgeting

A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Finance

Trading, Custodial Services And International Payment And Settlement Systems Course Overview

This comprehensive course has been specifically designed to provide delegates with a detailed knowledge of the financial markets, the key participants and their roles, the clearing and settlement processes for major products, risk and regulatory issues and best practices in international markets. Throughout the course there will be exercises, case studies and tasks plus a comprehensive glossary of terms and supporting material to provide them with a complete learning experience.

Course Content • • • • • •

Anatomy of a trade – the trade life cycle – process Operational and operations risk categories Clearing, settlement, custodial services and corporate actions National and international payment and settlement systems, reconciliations, exceptions handling, failed trades, funds transfer pricing and the margining function Market structures Fraud in international payment and settlement processes

Who Should Attend?

This is a benchmark course for individuals working in operations and settlements. It is ideal for settlement officers in foreign exchange, securities and derivatives, operations officers, custodians, clearing house staff, compliance officers, risk controllers, auditors and accountants.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Gain a complete understanding of all aspects of clearing and settlement processes for major products and learn how to manage the process with maximum effectiveness!

2. Understand the role of the key participants in the trading and investment environments 3. Develop an appreciation for types of corporate actions, their impact on derivatives positions and how to manage the material for reports

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I

113 Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

A E H

C H LT

E R A

HEALTHCARE

Cost Control And Financial Performance For Healthcare Organisations _____________________________________________________ 118 Effective Performance Appraisal In Healthcare _________________________________________________________________________ 118 Healthcare Mini MBA _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 119 Healthcare Supply Chain Management ______________________________________________________________________________ 119 IHM Certificate In Healthcare Financial Management (In association with the Institute Of Healthcare Management) ___________________________ 120 IHM Certificate In Healthcare Information And Communication Management (In association with the Institute Of Healthcare Management) _______ 120

Healthcare

Table Of Contents

IHM Certificate In Healthcare Leadership And Management (In association with the Institute Of H0ealthcare Management) _____________________ 121 IHM Certificate In Healthcare Marketing, PR And Communications (In association with the Institute Of Healthcare Management) ________________ 121 IHM Certificate In Healthcare Quality And Performance Improvement (In association with the Institute Of Healthcare Management) ______________ 122 IHM Certificate In Healthcare Strategy And Strategic Planning (In association with the Institute Of Healthcare Management) ____________________ 122 IHM Certificate In HR Management For Healthcare (In association with the Institute Of Healthcare Management) _____________________________ 123 IHM Certificate In Patient Flow Management And Redesigning Care (In association with the Institute Of Healthcare Management) _______________ 123 IHM Certificate In Patient Safety And Risk Management (In association with the Institute Of Healthcare Management) _________________________ 124 Leaders In Healthcare _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 124 Making e-Health Happen__________________________________________________________________________________________ 125 Managing And Leading Change In Healthcare Organisations _____________________________________________________________ 125 The Balanced Scorecard For Healthcare Foundation Certificate: Linking Strategy To Operations

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ________________________________________________________________

The Balanced Scorecard For Healthcare Advanced Certificate: Developing and Implementing KPIs

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ________________________________________________________________

126 126

Transforming The Patient Experience ________________________________________________________________________________ 127

117

Healthcare

Cost Control And Financial Performance For Healthcare Organisations

Effective Performance Appraisal In Healthcare

Course Overview

Course Overview

Accurately measuring costs and outcomes is the single most powerful lever available today for transforming your healthcare organisation’s financial performance. With accurate and appropriate cost information, healthcare providers can then make bold and decisive plans to improve their hospital or clinic’s efficiency while sustaining or improving outcomes.

This course puts highly practical tools into participant’s hands – tools which they can take away and put to work immediately to transform their healthcare organisation’s financial performance.

Course Content • • • •

Course Content

Measuring healthcare costs Understanding healthcare costs Reducing healthcare costs Enhancing healthcare revenues

• • • •

Benefits Of Attending

1. Discover easy to use tools for minimising a healthcare organisation’s costs and maximising its revenues.

2. Understand a hospital’s or department’s costs across the entire cycle of patient care using the new ‘Gold Standard’ in healthcare cost measurement techniques.

3. Transform hospital performance using proven process improvement tools.

118

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

Most healthcare organisations have formal processes for managing and agreeing expectations of performance from their staff. When done well, these processes – known as ‘performance appraisal’ – can bring about improved individual motivation and performance, which will in turn lead to enhanced organisational performance. But done badly, performance appraisal can actually lower performance, quickly leading to resentment, disengagement and absenteeism.

This course reviews, step-by-step, the tools, techniques and skills required of both HR and line managers for delivering effect performance management within a healthcare organisation.

A

Putting performance appraisal into context Preparing for a performance appraisal Performing an appraisal After an appraisal: supporting staff development

Benefits Of Attending

1. Discover the role of performance appraisal in aligning individual performance with a healthcare organisation’s strategic goals.

2. Understand the four phases of a performance appraisal cycle and the activities and processes that should take place within each phase.

3. Practice the principle management skills through which effective performance appraisal should be delivered and learn how to handle difficult and sensitive appraisal situations sensitively and effectively.

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Healthcare Supply Chain Management

Course Overview

Course Overview

Course Content

Course Content

• • • • •

• • • •

Our flagship programme, the Healthcare Mini MBA provides both healthcare managers and clinicians who have management responsibilities with the essential skills and knowledge they need – both for personal career success and to lead their hospital, clinic or department in a competitive and ever-changing environment.

The course is based on the core principles of a healthcare-focused MBA from a leading business school. The course format mixes high energy teaching sessions with hands on leadership development activities that provide participants with a forum for discussion, debate and peer-to-peer interaction: sharing experiences and collaborating to solve each other’s healthcare management challenges.

Planning and executing healthcare strategy Healthcare marketing and customer relations Managing people and their performance Managing financial resources Leadership and change

1. First hand look at the latest healthcare management innovations from the world’s leading business schools and healthcare management gurus.

2. Hands on, interactive learning experiences to develop the skills and knowledge that are essential to becoming a future healthcare leader.

3. Total immersion into the business of healthcare and what it takes to deliver sustained high performance.

= Earned Training Hours

Planning demand and supply in the healthcare supply chain Planning and managing inventories in the healthcare supply chain Designing a healthcare supply chain and transportation network Managing the cross-functional drivers in a healthcare supply chain

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending

30 Hrs

The pressures on healthcare supply chains are changing. In the past, a hospital that managed its purchasing costs well could operate efficiently. Today, the cost of materials management can exceed 35 per cent of a hospital’s operating budget.

This course will shows healthcare managers how they can achieve substantial benefits by not only changing purchasing practices, but also improving how they manage their labour force, supplies, equipment and facilities. With nearly 80 per cent of total hospital expenses accounted for in patient care costs, the impact of this course for hospitals and other healthcare organisations can be truly significant.

Healthcare

Healthcare Mini MBA

A

1. Ensure a strategic fit between hospital and supply chain strategy and reduce safety inventory without harming product availability.

2. Manage the trade-offs between inventory cost, transportation cost and responsiveness effectively.

3. Leverage sourcing, pricing and information to deliver better supply chain co-ordination.

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

119

Healthcare

IHM Certificate In Healthcare Financial Management

IHM Certificate in Healthcare Marketing, PR and Communications

Course Overview

Course Overview

(In association with the Institute Of Healthcare Management) This certified course introduces participants to the fundamental concepts and knowledge needed for effective financial management and to actively participate in decision-making about how to allocate financial resources.

The course discusses the context for financial management in healthcare and the basics of financial statements and working capital management. The course goes on to consider a range of techniques for managing healthcare budgets, evaluating capital projects and investments and measuring and understanding healthcare costs.

Course Content • • • • •

The context for healthcare financial management Financial statements and working capital management in healthcare Managing healthcare budgets Evaluating capital projects and investments Cost behaviour and cost-finding methods for healthcare

1. Become empowered to participate in financial decision-making in your healthcare organisation and confident when being held accountable for financial performance.

2. Discover tools and techniques for understanding financial statements and managing a budget at departmental or organisational level.

3. Learn how to look behind the numbers to discover what they tell you about the financial health of your organisation and the true cost of delivering patient care.

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

This certified course focuses on management information and communication systems as a means of providing information to support healthcare decision-making.

Participants will learn how they can improve the flow of information in their work area, department or project in order to support the effective delivery of healthcare services, examine the different kinds of threat to information security, consider the nature of healthcare information and how that information can be collected to support decision-making and to demonstrate that quality standards and performance targets have been achieved.

Course Content • • • • •

Information and communication in support of healthcare Information, decisions and communication Making information work for you Developing information and communication systems Implementation and beyond

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending

120

(In association with the Institute Of Healthcare Management)

E I

1. Review a department or organisation’s information requirements – and those of the teams that depend on them – and understand how to meet those requirements effectively.

2. Discover the importance of timely and accurate information in management decision-making and how to assure managers have the data necessary to make the right decisions.

3. Identify where management information comes from and how to capture it and store it effectively.

E I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

IHM Certificate In Healthcare Marketing, PR And Communications

Course Overview

Course Overview

(In association with the Institute Of Healthcare Management)

After over forty years of research in the field of healthcare leadership and management there is a remarkable amount of agreement between both academics and business leaders regarding the qualities of the effective leader and manager.

This certified course is designed to turn that research into interventions that target the four domains in which healthcare managers and supervisors need to perform well: managing themselves, managing their business unit or department, managing others and managing change.

Course Content • • • • •

Participants will learn how to visualise their improvement programme to dramatically improve patient flow, make processes transparent, create process improvement teams and deliver successful change.

Areas such as queuing theory and their application to healthcare are explored, as are simple measures of capacity and demand relevant to clinics, in-patient services, diagnostic and support services.

• • • • •

Benefits Of Attending

1. Improvement through self-development and practice – take part in a number of individual and team exercises.

2. A transformational, interactive and fun experience for all participants that will lead to lasting behaviour change, increased confidence and better job performance.

3. Explore the complexity of ideas, values and beliefs that influence the culture and performance of a healthcare organisation.

= Earned Training Hours

In this certified course participants will be guided through the principles of process improvement and shown how to apply the lessons of Lean Thinking to enable true process redesign in a healthcare setting.

Course Content

Managing yourself Managing your development Managing your business unit or department Managing other people Managing change

30 Hrs

(In association with the Institute Of Healthcare Management)

Healthcare

IHM Certificate In Healthcare Leadership And Management

E I

Introduction to healthcare process improvement Improving processes and patient flow Getting the focus right: managing a patient flow project Lean tools for healthcare process improvement Managing and leading process change

Benefits Of Attending

1. Analyse your healthcare organisation or department to discover bottlenecks and areas for improvement.

2. Discover and implement best practice ideas which will help you achieve healthcare process excellence.

3. Proactively manage clinic, bed, diagnostic or support services capacity and resource allocation to minimise waiting times and transform the patient experience.

E I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

121

Healthcare

IHM Certificate In Healthcare Quality And Performance Improvement

IHM Certificate In Healthcare Strategy And Strategic Planning

Course Overview

Course Overview

(In association with the Institute Of Healthcare Management)

It must be the mission of every healthcare organisation to achieve the highest possible quality of care. Quality improvement – the process of continually evaluating existing processes of care and developing new standards of practice – therefore has to be a core competency for every healthcare manager and clinician at every level of medical practice: be they in primary care clinics, acute hospitals, specialist centres of excellence or regulatory bodies.

This certified course provides comprehensive coverage of the fundamental concepts, tools and management techniques through which quality management and improvement can be delivered in a healthcare setting.

Course Content • • • • •

The theory and practice of healthcare quality improvement Making the business case for healthcare quality Collecting and analysing healthcare quality data Performance measurement and improvement Managing and leading quality improvement projects

Benefits Of Attending

1. Hands on, interactive learning experience using case studies, roleplaying and simulations to develop the skills and knowledge that are essential to delivering quality and patient safety improvement projects.

2. First hand look at the latest quality techniques that are transforming the healthcare industry.

3. Comprehensive coverage of the full content of the CPHQ examination.

122

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I

(In association with the Institute Of Healthcare Management)

Having a clear strategy is essential for competitive advantage in the Middle East’s growing healthcare market. A properly articulated strategy will help chart a successful course for a hospital, clinic or health system – focusing the efforts of staff on doing what matters: delivering first class, high quality patient care.

This certified course brings together a range of management ideas, methods and principles to show healthcare managers how to undertake strategic planning in a healthcare organisation or department. Through this course, participants can gain the tools to create strategy and evaluate strategic choices as well as to subsequently deliver it and monitor its execution.

Course Content • • • • •

Understanding your strategic position Making strategic choices Turning strategy into action Leadership and strategic change Writing a strategic plan

Benefits Of Attending

1. Discover how to use appropriate planning models to develop a business plan for a healthcare service or organisation.

2. Discover how the world’s leading hospitals and clinics have used strategy to create competitive advantage and achieve excellence in patient care.

3. Successfully implement and sustain strategic change across an entire healthcare organisation or department.

E I

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

IHM Certificate In Healthcare Patient Flow Management And Redesigning Care

Course Overview

Course Overview

(In association with the Institute Of Healthcare Management) The need for healthcare talent in the Middle East is greater than ever, yet talent management in the region’s healthcare sector is already in crisis. There are critical shortages of clinical leaders, high staff turnover rates and serious difficulties in finding and holding on to physicians, nurses and managers who have more attractive options in other regions.

This certified course shows participants how to introduce transformative, hospital-wide talent recruitment, retention and management plans. It delivers genuine thought leadership and practical solutions that are essential for winning the war for healthcare talent.

Course Content • • • • •

Workforce planning and the healthcare talent marketplace Recruiting and selecting healthcare talent Retaining healthcare talent The role of employer branding Development and succession of healthcare talent

Benefits Of Attending

1. Adopt better recruitment and selection methods that will assure your organisation is getting the competencies it needs to deliver first class patient care.

2. Stay competitive by benchmarking salary and benefits packages against other progressive healthcare organisations.

3. Use employer branding to enhance your attractiveness to healthcare staff, increase job applications and decrease staff turnover.

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I

(In association with the Institute Of Healthcare Management)

The growing tendency of consumers to go ‘shopping’ between hospitals, greater access to health information on the Internet and the rise of medical tourism are all making marketing – long practiced in other industries – ever more vital for success in the highly competitive business of healthcare.

Healthcare

IHM Certificate In HR Management For Healthcare

In this certified course participants learn how to apply the tools and techniques of strategic marketing to understand the needs and wants of healthcare customers, communicate with them effectively and deliver a superior patient experience.

Course Content • • • • •

Value exploration in healthcare Value creation in healthcare Value delivery in healthcare Value communication in healthcare Value measurement in healthcare

Benefits Of Attending

1. Create a compelling strategic marketing plan that will position your organisation exactly where you want it in today’s competitive healthcare market.

2. Understand what ‘value’ means to your customers – patients, their families and communities – and how you can deliver better value than your competitors.

3. Position your advertising and communications for the maximum impact and to deliver patient loyalty and commitment.

E I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

123

Healthcare

IHM Certificate In Patient Safety And Risk Management (In association with the Institute Of Healthcare Management) Course Overview

This course explores the fundamental knowledge, skills and understanding through which patient safety can be enhanced for you, your colleagues and your organisation.

It includes detailed instruction in: • Human factors in patient safety • Risk analysis and root cause analysis • System improvement and safer clinical systems • Teamskills • Practical, hands-on safety improvement tools and techniques

Course Outline

The Interaction Between Systems And Processes And People And Culture • An introduction to patient safety and human factors in risk management • Effective team working as part of patient safety • Managing working relationships for safety Risk Management Processes • Learning from harm – undertaking a Root Cause Analysis (RCA) • Exploring risk analysis • Undertaking a Failure Mode Effect Analysis (FMEA) • Emerging developments in healthcare – generating a safety case The Human Factor Human Fallibility Understanding Error • Managing failures of cognition • Managing failures in communication • Behaviours for safe practice

Leaders In Healthcare Course Overview

The exciting Leaders in Healthcare programme provides senior healthcare leaders – and future leaders – with unparalleled insights through which they can better understand themselves and their organisations.

A unique developmental opportunity, the course involves a series of expert lectures, interactive case studies, leadership roundtables and laboratories and a mentoring opportunity that continues after the course concludes: enabling participants to deliver immediate, sustainable change and giving them the tools to deliver their organisation’s strategic objectives.

Course Content • • • •

The effective healthcare leader Leading people in healthcare Leading results in healthcare Leading change in healthcare

Benefits Of Attending

1. Bringing healthcare leaders together to share and resolve their healthcare leadership dilemmas.

2. Network and collaborate with peers from the region’s leading healthcare organisations while an unrivalled expert faculty helps to develop the competencies that are essential to leadership success.

3. Learn the tools that work to deliver lasting change and sustained high performance in the challenging new healthcare economy.

Tools And Techniques In Practice • Dealing with the consequence of failures of safety • Practical, hands-on tools and techniques for safe practice • Embedding and sustaining safety practices

Who Should Attend?

• • • • • •

Patient Safety and Risk Management Managers Clinical Directors and Heads of Departments Physicians and Surgeons at all levels Heads of Nursing and other Senior Nurses Any manager with a responsibility for, or interest in, Patient Safety Professionals allied to health, Radiographers, Laboratory, Pharmacy and Scientific Staff

Benefits Of Attending

1. Gain the essential knowledge, skills and understanding to improve patient safety and manage risk 2. Understand how to manage human factors as a critical part of individual and organisational risk management 3. Tools and techniques – learning from safer clinical systems. The practical application of risk analysis, root cause analysis, team skills, checklists, briefing and debriefing, SBAR communication tool and more

124

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I

A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Managing And Leading Change In Healthcare Organisations

Course Overview

E-Health applications like health information systems, electronic records and telemedicine have incredible potential for improving the quality of patient care. They have been shown to reduce medical errors, automate and streamline the clinician’s workflow, help capture more accurate clinical data, facilitate clinical decision-making and significantly reduce healthcare costs.

However, managing the deployment of such systems is an extraordinarily complex task – e-health projects can sometimes last for several years and have many interdependencies across nearly every aspect of a hospital’s operation.

Through the practical tools taught on this course, participants will be better equipped to deliver e-health programs and, in doing so, improve the availability, accessibility, quality and use of the information that is vital for improving the health of patients and communities.

Course Content • • • •

An introduction to e-health Leadership co-ordination and assessment Priority setting and planning Overcoming barriers to implementation

1. Review case studies showing the critical success factors for developing and implementing e-health systems successfully.

2. Create a roadmap for designing, planning, implementing or improving e-health systems.

3. Learn how to integrate e-health solutions into clinical workflow and engage and communicate with all the involved stakeholders.

= Earned Training Hours

Change can be unsettling and difficult. Lots of healthcare managers and clinicians find it hard to cope with. This course enables them to make change happen in their organisation or department by equipping them with the tools and techniques with which they can manage and lead change in a variety of healthcare contexts.

The course has a strong emphasis on interactive team-working, problem-solving and individual reflection, designed to facilitate real behaviour change and to enhance change leadership skills

Course Content • • • •

The drivers of change Getting ready to change Making change happen Embedding and sustaining change

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending

24 Hrs

Course Overview

Healthcare

Making e-Health Happen

I A

1. Understand what drives change – both in the healthcare sector in general and in healthcare organisations specifically.

2. Learn how to design a change project become an effective leader and role-model during times of change.

3. Discover a ‘toolbox’ of effective change techniques to achieve permanent and lasting change.

A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

125

Healthcare

The Balanced Scorecard For Healthcare Foundation Certificate: Linking Strategy To Operations

The Balanced Scorecard For Healthcare Advanced Certificate: Developing And Implementing KPIs

Course Overview

Course Overview

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Since Robert Kaplan and David Norton first published the Balanced Scorecard some two decades ago their Scorecard concept has been widely adopted by healthcare organisations. This certified 3-day course shows healthcare managers how to get the most from the Balanced Scorecard.

With the help of numerous interactive case studies, the course explores how the Scorecard can be modified for use across a wide variety of healthcare organisations: from small independent clinics to major health systems and ministries.

Course Content • • •

Developing Your Strategy Strategic Planning Using Strategy Maps and Balanced Scorecards Aligning the Healthcare Organisation with Its Strategy

Benefits Of Attending

1. Learn how to manage or lead Scorecard-based projects and initiatives in a healthcare organisation – confidently and professionally.

2. Step-by-step guidance through the process of developing and implementing a Scorecard for healthcare users.

3. Optimise their practicality and usefulness of Scorecards in healthcare.

126

18 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

A

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Frameworks such as the Balanced Scorecard have revolutionised the way hospitals and other healthcare organisations are managed by showing how different Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) can be used to monitor the execution of strategic plans and the delivery of performance improvement projects.

However, the success of KPIs greatly depends on the strength of their relationship with the plans and projects they are intended to monitor.

This certified 3-day course uses interactive case studies from numerous hospitals and health systems to show healthcare managers how to assure success when using KPIs

Course Content • • •

Critical Success Factors for Healthcare KPIs Developing KPIs and Minimum Data Sets Selected KPI Applications in Healthcare

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the critical success factors for using KPIs in healthcare organisations.

2. Step-by-step guidance through the process of developing, selecting and using KPIs in a variety of healthcare settings.

3. Assure a proper cause-and-effect relationship between KPIs and the plans or improvements they are trying to implement.

A

18 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Transforming The Patient Experience Course Overview

Healthcare

Healthcare institutions are having to effectively distinguish themselves from the competition. The creation of a superior customer service culture has never been more crucial in determining current and future success. The hospitals which will emerge victorious will be those that offer unrivalled consistency throughout the patient journey.

This course offers practical strategies and solutions to enable the creation of a focused patient experience programme for your healthcare organisation.

Course Content • • • •

Strategic Planning for customer service Communication and clarification of core values from the top down Competency framework for service excellence Customer service training programmes

Benefits Of Attending

1. Identify key drivers for a superior patient experience and create meaningful standards for service excellence.

2. Transform employee standards for service excellence and enhance the roles of leaders.

3. Establish strategies for hiring, reviewing and assessing employees on customer service competencies.

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

A

127 Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

N S A E M C U R H OU S E R

HUMAN RESOURCES

Budgeting And Budget Control Of The HR Function/Effective Manpower Planning (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) __ 132 Certificate In Advanced Compensation And Benefits (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ___________________ 132 Certificate In Career Development Planning (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) __________________________ 133 Certificate In Compensation And Reward Management (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) _________________ 133 Certificate In Developing HR Policy Manuals (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) __________________________ 134 Certificate In Dynamic Recruitment, Interviewing And Appraisal Techniques (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) __ 134 Certificate In Employee Engagement (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ________________________________ 135 Certificate In Employee Training And Development (In association with Society for Human Resource Management (SHRM)) ______________________ 135 Certificate In HR Administration (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ____________________________________ 136 Certificate In HR Audit (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ____________________________________________ 136

Human Resources

Table Of Contents

Certificate In HR Governance ______________________________________________________________________________________ 137 Certificate In HR Metrics And Workforce Analytics (In association with Society for Human Resource Management (SHRM)) ________________________ 137 Certificate In HR Policies And Procedures (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ____________________________ 138 Certificate In HR Skills I (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ___________________________________________ 138 Certificate In HR Skills II (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ___________________________________________ 139 Certificate In HR Strategy (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) _________________________________________ 139 Certificate In Job Analysis And Description, Job Evaluation And Grades (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ____ 140 Certificate In Nationalisation Strategies (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ______________________________ 140 Certificate In Performance Management And Performance Appraisals (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) _____ 141 Certificate In Resource Management, Recruitment And Talent Planning (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ____ 141 Certificate In Succession Planning And Career Development (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ____________ 142 Certificate In Talent Acquisition And Succession Planning (In association with Society for Human Resource Management (SHRM)) _________________ 142 Certificate In Training Coordination (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) _________________________________ 143 Certificate In Training Management (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) _________________________________ 143 Chief Learning Officer (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ____________________________________________ 144 Competency Based Ineterview And Selection For Hiring Managers (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) _______ 144 Developing And Implementing A Dynamic HR Strategy (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)_________________ 145 Employee Relations (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ______________________________________________ 145 HR Next - HR Management Best Practice (In association with Society for Human Resource Management (SHRM)) _______________________________ 146 ILM Endorsed Recruitment, Selection And Retention Programme (Endorsed by ILM (Institute for Leadership and Management), UK) ______________ 146 Immigration And Labour Law In Bahrain _____________________________________________________________________________ 147 Immigration And Labour Law In Oman ______________________________________________________________________________ 147 Immigration And Labour Law In Qatar _______________________________________________________________________________ 148 Labour And Employment Law In Saudi Arabia _________________________________________________________________________ 148 Labour And Employment Law In The UAE ____________________________________________________________________________ 149 The A - Z Of Competency Frameworks (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) _______________________________ 149

131

Human Resources

Budgeting And Budget Control Of The HR Function/Effective Manpower Planning

Certificate In Advanced Compensation And Benefits

Course Overview

Course Overview

This course will provide delegates with the skills needed to fully understand the costs involved with HR that allow them to present a realistic case to management. It will feature case studies, business simulation and practical group exercises to show delegates how to prepare, monitor and control the HR budget and, most importantly, understand the link between organisational finance and HR budgets.

This course will touch on all areas of compensation and reward management, including grading structures, salary structures and payscales, allowances, pay reviews, bonus and incentive schemes, benefits and non-financial reward opportunities such as recognition and retention schemes. It will provide delegates with the information and guidance to ensure their salary and grading structure meets business needs, while allowing the company to attract and retain employees in an increasingly competitive market.

Course Content

What is a budget?

The purpose of budgets Components of an HR budget Building an HR budget Budget metrics for HR Measuring financial performance

• • • • • •

Course Content

Who Should Attend?

This course has been specifically designed for all HR professionals responsible for the budgeting for the function in their organisations.

It will help anyone who is planning to introduce new HR initiatives to forecast the budgetary requirements and to calculate the expected ROI.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Fundamental components of compensation and reward management and HR are grade and basics salary structures, and these are often taken for granted. Rather than make changes, HR and reward professionals try to fit the ever changing needs of their employees into a system that may not have been reviewed for many years.

Understand the link between organisational finance and HR budgets Investigate advanced techniques of professional budgeting inline with managing and forecasting Identify the key components and cost factors in an HR budget and learn how to build, monitor and control an HR budget

• • • • • • •

Defining a pay policy for employee compensation Matching pay structures to organisational objectives Developing grading and salary structures The role of job evaluation and salary surveys Integrating pay structures with other HR initiatives Implementing new grading and salary structures Managing performance and linking pay with performance via merit pay

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for all everyone who requires an in-depth knowledge of working with, and managing, salary structures and reward issues, including all professionals who work in human resources at all career levels and all specialists who work in compensation and benefits.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

132

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I

Increase your business performance and employee effectiveness through implementing reward systems that attract, retain and motivate staff Align basic salary structures, grades and reward systems to a business’ objectives and human resources strategy, and discover practical steps to implement a grading system with a basic salary structure and pay scheme or update existing structures Find practical solutions to your own reward issues and challenges through analysis of case studies and interactive course and clinic discussions

A

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Certificate In Compensation And Reward Management (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Course Overview

Introducing a smart career development programme to an organisation can fulfil a variety of functions – the most important of which is to improve the performance of the organisation, which is, of course, a factor of individual performance. Implementation of the programme encourages staff to make themselves more marketable in the long term, and increases their contribution to the organisation.

Investment in staff development is reflected in their motivation.

Succession planning takes career development one step further by preparing those with potential to fill vacancies in key positions, reducing disruption when there are planned and unplanned vacancies.

At this course delegates will discover how to align their organisation’s career development strategy with organisational capabilities.

Course Content • • • • • • • • •

Context for career management and succession planning in the Middle East The framework Identifying areas for development The development plan Options for development Why do we need succession planning?

Six steps to succession planning Identifying targeted positions Monitoring and evaluating succession planning and the associated benefits

This course has been specifically designed for any HR professional responsible for the development of staff.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Explore why career development and succession planning are vital to an organisation’s success 2. Discover how to take a systematic approach to career development and succession planning 3. Learn how to integrate a career development and succession planning based on real business needs and potential benefits

= Earned Training Hours

Fundamental components of compensation and reward management and HR are grade and basics salary structures, and these are often taken for granted. Rather than make changes, HR and reward professionals try to fit the ever changing needs of their employees into a system that may not have been reviewed for many years.

This course will touch on all areas of compensation and reward management, including grading structures, salary structures and payscales, allowances, pay reviews, bonus and incentive schemes, benefits and non-financial reward opportunities such as recognition and retention schemes. It will provide delegates with the information and guidance to ensure their salary and grading structure meets business needs, while allowing the company to attract and retain employees in an increasingly competitive market.

Course Content • • • • • • •

Defining a pay policy for employee compensation Matching pay structures to organisational objectives Developing grading and salary structures The role of job evaluation and salary surveys Integrating pay structures with other HR initiatives Implementing new grading and salary structures Managing performance and linking pay with performance via merit pay

Who Should Attend?

Who Should Attend?

24 Hrs

Course Overview

Human Resources

Certificate In Career Development

I

This course is designed for all everyone who requires an in-depth knowledge of working with, and managing, salary structures and reward issues, including all professionals who work in human resources at all career levels and all specialists who work in compensation and benefits.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Increase your business performance and employee effectiveness through implementing reward systems that attract, retain and motivate staff 2. Align basic salary structures, grades and reward systems to a business’ objectives and human resources strategy, and discover practical steps to implement a grading system with a basic salary structure and pay scheme or update existing structures 3. Find practical solutions to your own reward issues and challenges through analysis of case studies and interactive course and clinic discussions

I

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

133

Human Resources

Certificate In Developing HR Policy Manuals

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

Course Overview

This course looks at the fundamentals of HR policy development from strategy alignment through to policy identification and implementation. You will look at HR policies as a strategic alignment tool, rather than as a policing mechanism. You will learn how to carry out an in-depth analysis of your organisation’s HR policy and to benchmark it against best practice and the latest thinking.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Fundamentals of policy development Developing a content outline for a policy manual Designing and shaping an HR policy Stakeholder involvement How to ensure line managers buy-in through good communication Recent policy developments Confidentiality and controlling access Dealing with sensitive areas of HR policy How the relationship between employer and employee (the psychological contract) has changed HR policy developments in a downturn Identifying organisational needs Developing solutions Policy changes and amendments Policies for specific strategic initiatives Developing a supporting user-friendly HR manual

Who Should Attend?

This course has been specifically designed for all HR practitioners responsible for policy development and implementation, and managers involved in organisational change and transformation.

1. Successfully communicate your HR policies by developing the skills and expertise to produce clear and coherent policy documents 2. Review the role of Human Resource Management (HRM), and develop appropriate policies taking into consideration the importance of HR policy and where it fits into the organisation 3. Develop an appropriate handbook design by examining and learning from best practice examples

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

By 2020 employers will need to adjust to the unprecedented challenge of having five generations of employees working together: employees with vastly different interests and life experiences from varied regional and ethnic backgrounds.

Recruiting, developing and motivating such diverse employees will become crucial to your organisation’s success and will depend on the quality of its human resources department.

This course will review all the desirable attributes, qualities and styles to be successful at screening, interviewing, evaluating applicants and employees. You will learn principles and frameworks, do’s and don’ts, and explore best practice examples from large organisations. You will have the opportunity to build a screening, interviewing and evaluating portfolio through the various practical workshops that will be undertaken during the course.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Attracting top performers The hidden costs Profiling the employee of the future Develop a recruitment plan Screening Preparing for the interview Meeting the applicant Past behaviour is a predictor of future behaviour Guidelines on asking difficult questions Sharing information with the candidate Ending the interview professionally Conducting background checks for final candidates The interview arena Keeping your top performers Introduction to performance appraisals

Who Should Attend?

Benefits Of Attending

134

Certificate In Dynamic Interviewing, Recruitment And Appraisal Techniques

I A

This course is designed for HR practitioners and line managers who wish to develop their interviewing skills for staff selection and appraisal, including HR Managers and Directors, HR Officers, Department Heads, Section Heads, Team Leaders and Supervisors.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Increase the likelihood of higher job satisfaction and reduce turnover rates. Hire the right employee for the job 2. Help your employees maximise their job performance to improve team and organisational outcomes 3. Focus on the critical steps in selection and performance management interviews to ensure you get the best possible outcome for the organisation

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

University School of Business)

(In association with Society for Human Resource Management (SHRM))

Course Overview

How we behave towards our employees is of increasing importance.

Globalisation and increased competition has intensified the ‘Talent War’. The relationship between the employer and employee has changed. New definitions of loyalty are emerging. ‘Jobs for life’ appear to have gone. Employees are more discriminating and certainly more mobile. This practical course to produce ideas and plans for successful Employee Relations (ER) is designed around answers to our research into determining what constitutes an effective ER programme.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

The psychological contract and Employee Relations (ER) Corporate culture and its impact upon ER Designing supportive ER policies and procedures Impact of stress upon ER Impact of managing Human Resource Key Result Areas (KRAs) The line managers’ role in ER – we are all HR managers!

Changing perceptions – staff as a revenue centre not a cost centre Impact of staff on the bottom-line Defining competency to use individuals to greatest effect Securing profit and increased efficiency through innovation Opening channels for employees’ ideas Assessing and using the intellectual capital of an organisation Motivating staff and managing performance The employee as internal customer – revealing what employees really think New concepts of human capital management ’accounting for people’ Preparing a ‘way ahead’ policy – fitting ER into a strategic plan

Who Should Attend?

Whilst ER is an integral part of HR, this course is not just for HR staff.

The importance of high quality ER has a direct impact upon levels of service, profit, standards, business ethics, corporate social responsibility and corporate governance. As such it is important for any manager who has charge of staff to understand the latest thinking regarding ER.

Course Overview

Discuss the scope of employee development: how it falls under the talent management umbrella, how it ties to your organisation, how to develop individuals’ careers and potential leaders, and how to build an actual training programme from the ground up. You will be able to develop, implement, and evaluate effective employee development programmes.

Course Outline • • • • • • •

Human Resources

Certificate In Employee Engagement Certificate In Employee Training And (In association with The George Washington Development

Understanding your organisation and its relationship to employee development Assessing organisational needs Connecting culture, employee development, and engagement Learning methodologies Development activities Career development Leadership development

Who Should Attend • • • • •

Mid-level HR professionals who: Are generalists or senior specialists Typically have three to seven years of HR experience Manage projects or programmes Hold a formal title such as, but not limited to, HR Manager, Generalist or Senior Specialist

Benefits Of Attending

1. Describe the scope and trends in employee development and assess the employee development needs in your organisation 2. Describe how your career development strategy links to your organisational needs 3. Apply employee development activities to support development and effective learning methodologies for employee training

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand what constitutes an effective Employee Relations programme 2. Appreciate the impact of employee relations on organisational development 3. Clearly demonstrate how Employee Relations impacts the bottom line of organisations

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I

I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

135

Human Resources

Certificate In HR Administration

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

This is a certificate course introduced by SHRM. It is based on contemporary research and best practices conducted by SHRM globally. It is a generalist program that focuses on the application of conceptual knowledge in everyday work. It is facilitated by certified SHRM-trained subject matter experts. The aim of the course is for delegates to fully understand the five main domains of HR within the context of a value-added HR model.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • •

Overall roles, functions and importance of HR Understand the screening process and the selection funnel Enhance turnovers and productivity at optimal costs Develop an appreciation of stakeholders’ role and interest in talent acquisition and management Awareness of critical legal frameworks that affect acquisition Apply structured analysis to needs assessment, learning objectives, program design and effectiveness assessment Appreciate the principles of learning styles, human behavior, competencies, knowledge, training methods and development planning processes Principles of performance and its assessment Performance Management System (PMS) Conceptual framework behind compensation, benefit structures and their application in the overall business

Who Should Attend?

This course is for HR professionals with two to five years’ supervisory/ managerial level experience, typically in sectors like IT, ITES, banking and financial services, telecom, and retail. It is also ideal for those who have managerial roles, which require a high degree of interface with line functions or businesses. Job titles include: HR Manager, HR Business Partner, HR Advisor, HR Supervisor, HR Consultant.

Alternatively, Operational Managers moving into HR who have little-to-no formal HR theoretical studies.

Certificate In HR Audit

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

It is vitally important for HR to keep pace with the demands of dynamic business environments and legal frameworks. The HR audit is used to highlight areas of weakness in the HR function, areas that can be improved and even areas where there are no policies or procedures.

To avoid costly litigation your policies, procedures and processes must reflect the law, which frequently changes. The HR audit is an essential preventative strategy to ensure you remain legally compliant.

Course Content • • • • •

The HR audit – something to welcome Initial analysis, audit methodology – instruments and deliverables Scope of the audit Measuring HR and auditing against business needs The audit findings, feedback and action, and taking HR to the next level

Who Should Attend?

This course has been designed for all HR professionals interested in improving HR performance. It is an essential course for HR department heads, HR generalists and specialists in resourcing, compensation and benefits, payroll, training, personnel, HR, talent management and employee services. Organisational development specialists will also benefit from attending this course.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Prepare for and conduct an informal HR audit to ensure that your policies and procedures meet the business needs and minimise potential exposure 2. Implement cutting-edge processes to ensure the complete legal compliance of your HR function 3. Measure the effectiveness of the organisation’s procedures and how they affect the bottom line, and ensure management buy-in by providing compelling HR data, to establish your role as a true strategic partner

Benefits Of Attending

1. Apply a structured analysis to assess learning needs, learning objectives and programme designs to ensure the effectiveness of your learning and development initiatives 2. Understand the conceptual framework behind compensation, benefit structures and their application in the overall business 3. Understand employee engagement, its framework and HR’s role in engaging employees

136

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I

I

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

The course has been designed to address traditional limitations to Human Resource Management ( HRM) thinking. HR Governance is a relatively new organisational practice which is concerned with enabling the HR function to facilitate the achievement of corporate strategic and operational objectives and performance outcomes, including corporate governance objectives, in a structured and systematic way.

Course Outline • • • • • • • •

Human Resource models and governance Human Resource Management and the ethical organisation Governance and the role of Human Resource management Creating corporate codes Of conduct Human resource And compliance Human Resource management and intellectual capital Human Resource management and enterprise risk Human Resource Adaptive Governance Model (HRAGM)

Who Should Attend?

The course is designed for middle to senior level HR executives, managers and directors in both public and private sectors. However as a significant management issue, it is also catering for compliance executives and managers, governance officers and managers, including senior corporate managers and official company officers, and company directors interested in fulfilling their corporate governance obligations.

Benefits Of Attending

Certificate In HR Metrics And Workforce Analytics

(In association with Society for Human Resource Management (SHRM)) Course Overview

HR professionals will learn how to drive organisational change around human capital activities by linking evidence based data to business strategy and performance. HR professionals will learn to apply HR analytics to a broad spectrum of human capital activities.

From facilitating outcome-based conversations, to interpreting and benchmarking organisational results, this course provides HR professionals hands-on experience that will help acquire the confidence needed to build consensus and acceptance around human capital measures that support operational goals.

Course Outline • • • • • • • •

• •

•

1.

3.

= Earned Training Hours

I A

Mid-level HR professionals with three to seven years of HR experience HR professionals who need a greater understanding of the drivers of business performance HR professionals who want to communicate with business leaders around financial metrics HR professionals who support business leaders

Benefits Of Attending

2.

24 Hrs

Introduction to HR metrics and workforce analytics The SHRM Human Capital Analytics Model Assess and plan Link and align Identify and build Implement and execute Evaluate and enhance Organisation and HR impacts

Who Should Attend?

•

1. Understand the concept of Human Resource Governance (HRG) and its contribution to achieving shareholders value 2. Investigate strategic models of Human Resource Management as sources of sustainable corporate strategic advantage 3. Manage the strategic role of Human Resource Management in achieving corporate governance performance

Human Resources

Certificate In HR Governance

Describe the importance and potential uses of business metrics and the role Human Capital Analytics play in evaluating an organisation’s performance Utilise the HR and Workforce Analytics Model to better link human capital results and activities to business performance Design a plan for gathering data and implementing human capital measurement in your organisation

I

18 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

137

Human Resources

Certificate In HR Policies And Procedures (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Certificate In HR Policies And Procedures emphasises the value of the skills and expertise to create fair, easy-to-understand HR policies and procedures and an up-to-date HR policy manual. Take this unique opportunity to learn how to achieve buy-in from your line managers, share and discuss your organisational needs, review your existing HR policies, and amend and update your policies. This course will guide you to develop and implement HR P&Ps in your organisation. You will ensure that your employment contracts and HR manuals meet your business needs, whilst attracting, retaining, engaging and motivating employees.

Course Content

Terms and Conditions of employment (T&Cs) Human Resources Policies and Procedures (P&Ps) Sensitive critical policy areas Employment contracts Policies and procedures to support wider HR strategies Human resources manuals Policies and procedures for international assignments Psychological contract of employment Achieving Work-Life Balance Implementing HR policies and procedures Review your manual

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for everyone who requires either a generalist understanding or an in-depth knowledge of managing HR policies and procedures, and terms and conditions of employment. HR specialists and other HR professionals at all career levels working in the areas of HR Policies and Procedures, Employee Relations, Employee Communications and Personnel Administration will benefit from attending this course.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand how HR policies and procedures fit into your organisation and how they affect employee relations 2. Increase business performance and employee effectiveness through clear, fair and reasonable HR policies and procedures which help retain and motivate staff 3. Align your terms and conditions of employment with your remuneration strategy and develop detailed employment contracts to improve employer branding and employee engagement

138

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) 30 hours each

Course Overview

Course Overview

• • • • • • • • • • •

Certificate In HR Skills I

E I

This programme, which has a strategic focus, consists of two five-day courses and examines the HR needs in organisations, and how to audit and evaluate HR. The programme establishes the context for HR, examines up-to-date concepts to improve your HR performance and explores the main specialisms within HR. As well as covering HR technical issues, the programme includes some personal management and supervisory skills development.

Course Content

Course I: Certificate In HR Skills I • • • • • • • •

Human Resources in context Defining the HR role today Leadership in HR Motivation Competencies Human Resource audit Recruitment Becoming an Employer of Choice

Who Should Attend?

This programme has been specifically designed to provide background in HRM for HR practitioners in all industries. The first course is suitable for new entries to the HR profession and the second course focuses on developing some of the themes highlighted in the first course. The second course is most suitable for HR practitioners with two – three years of experience.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Develop effective HR policies and procedures, based on a thorough understanding of HRM, and its impact on your organisation 2. Discover the importance of training and development activities and their impact on the bottom line of having the right staff, with the right skills, in the right place at the right time (and at the right cost) 3. Examine the issues around performance management and its implementation to understand its links to organisational performance and the organisation’s bottom line.

E I

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) 30 hours each

This programme, which has a strategic focus, consists of two five-day courses and examines the HR needs in organisations, and how to audit and evaluate HR. The programme establishes the context for HR, examines up-to-date concepts to improve your HR performance and explores the main specialisms within HR. As well as covering HR technical issues, the programme includes some personal management and supervisory skills development.

Course II: Certificate In HR Skills II Policies and procedures Training and development Performance management Pay and reward

Who Should Attend?

This programme has been specifically designed to provide background in HRM for HR practitioners in all industries. The first course is suitable for new entries to the HR profession and the second course focuses on developing some of the themes highlighted in the first course. The second course is most suitable for HR practitioners with two – three years of experience.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Develop effective HR policies and procedures, based on a thorough understanding of HRM, and its impact on your organisation 2. Discover the importance of training and development activities and their impact on the bottom line of having the right staff, with the right skills, in the right place at the right time (and at the right cost) 3. Examine the issues around performance management and its implementation to understand its links to organisational performance and the organisation’s bottom line.

= Earned Training Hours

The course will outline how to develop an HR strategy taking into account both internal and external considerations. It will show you how to develop frameworks on all the key areas of HR and an overall roadmap against which you can develop an implementation and communication plan.

Course Outline • • • • • • • •

Course Content

30 Hrs

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

Course Overview

• • • •

Certificate In HR Strategy

E I

Managing in challenging times in the Middle East Role of HR in business Role of strategy in business Carrying out an HR audit Business and cultural drivers HR strategy framework Building the HR strategy Implementing the new HR strategy

Human Resources

Certificate In HR Skills II

Who Should Attend?

This course is for you if you are an HR director, manager or practitioner who wants to understand how to develop and deliver an HR strategy that meets business needs.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Design a business focused HR strategy, business case and marketing plan 2. Carry out an HR audit and link HR and people needs with business requirements 3. Explore global best practice and how this can be applied in the Middle East, and design an implementation and communication plan to roll out the HR strategy

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

139

Human Resources

Certificate In Job Analysis And Descriptions, Job Evaluation And Grades (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

Course Overview

Establishing and managing a framework for job analysis, understanding all the roles in an organisation and describing them through job profiles or job descriptions is a component of the HR role.

Another is to have a suitable grade and salary structure that supports the needs of the organisation.

This course will provide you with key job analysis tools and provide a detailed familiarisation with job evaluation, including an introduction to the most commonly used best-practice approaches.

• • • • • • • • •

The aim of this course is to enable you to get a better understanding of the latest best practice approaches for managing Nationalisation, and give practical guidance to enable you to implement your own plans for Nationalisation, and achieve better results in your programmes for Nationalisation. You will gain an in-depth understanding of the core factors that determine the success or failure of Nationalisation programmes. You will come away with a practical action plan that you can deploy within your own organisation, driving results and providing a better return on investment for your Nationals.

Course Outline

Course Content

Understanding the main components of job analysis Establishing a job analysis framework Using job analysis to understand job roles and accountabilities Step-by-step guide to developing job descriptions Linking job analysis to performance management and competency libraries How to communicate results of job analysis to employees Using job profiles in other areas of HR The role of job evaluations Overview of commonly used best-practice proprietary systems of job evaluations in the GCC

• • • • • • • •

Situation on Nationalisation in the GCC countries and differences across the GCC Trends in public sector versus private sector, and relevant laws in the GCC Planning career development for Nationals Reward and employment terms for Nationals Retention of Nationals Motivation and performance management of Nationals Managing daily working life for Nationals Managing displacements – redundancies of Non-Nationals

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for everyone who requires an appreciation or an in-depth knowledge of writing job profiles and job descriptions, and/or an understanding of how to implement a job evaluation scheme and develop grade structures underpinned by professional job analysis and job evaluation techniques. This includes staff in all areas of human resources as well as specialists who focus on compensation and benefits, and reward.

This course is designed for anyone and everyone who is involved in any way with either “Nationalisation” or “Localisation” in any of the six GCC countries, including UAE (Emiratisation), KSA (Saudisation), Qatar (Qatarisation), Oman (Omanisation), Bahrain (Bahrainisation) and Kuwait (Kuwaitisation). Whilst this course is primarily designed for HR Business Partners, Learning And Development (L&D) Specialists and Compensation And Benefits (C&B) Specialists, it is also suitable for all professionals in the HR function, and indeed from any other functions, if they are actively involved in managing the issues of “Nationalisation”.

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending

Who Should Attend?

1. Increase your business performance and employee effectiveness by developing clear job profiles, job descriptions and key accountability statements that communicate clearly what is expected of employees and effectively underpin your performance management system 2. Align your grade structures to your organisational objectives and HR strategy, by learning how to implement an effective job evaluation and grading system 3. Discover practical steps which will help you build your new system effectively, taking into consideration the different approaches available and your own organisation’s aims

140

Certificate In Nationalisation Strategies

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I

1.

2.

3.

Develop solutions for your own policies and practices for Nationalisation Increase business performance and employee effectiveness through effective Nationalisation programmes that attract, reward, motivate and retain Nationals Understand key elements of a successful Nationalisation programme, and common failure factors that hinder Nationalisation

I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Certificate In Resource Management, Recruitment And Talent Planning

Course Overview

Course Overview

(In association with The George Washington University)

Performance Management After this course you will be able to establish and manage a performance culture, determine Key Results Areas (KRAs), set objectives and Key Performance Indicators (KPIs), and establish the right competencies and behaviours for all the roles in your organisation. You will design and define the right performance management system to support your organisation’s goals and business objectives, and encourage the development of each individual employee.

Performance Appraisal Individual performance appraisals help you manage the performance of each employee in your organisation. However, unless you clearly link a performance appraisal to corporate goals and see it as part of the responsibilities of an effective manager, it can be nothing more than a tick-box paper exercise.

Course Content

Performance Management (Including Objectives [KRAs, KPIs] And Competencies [Behaviours]) • What is performance management?

• Creating a performance culture • Performance based on objectives and goals Performance Appraisal (Including Appraisal Forms, Rating Systems And Pay-For-Performance) • Performance appraisal cycle and planning • Preparing for an appraisal discussion • Key skills in performance appraisal

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for everyone who requires an appreciation or an in-depth knowledge of managing performance and implementing a performance appraisal system underpinned by objectives and competencies as part of an overall performance management approach. This includes HR generalists at all levels of their careers, as well as specialists who focus on performance and compensation and wish to develop their skills in performance management and appraisal.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Support business effectiveness by implementing a best-practice performance management system and performance appraisal process 2. Understand the three critical components of an effective performance management system – setting objectives, measuring competencies and planning development 3. Increase overall business and individual employee performance by developing clear and SMART objectives which communicate to your employees what is expected of them

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I

(In association with The George Washington University) This course gives you the knowledge and skills to contribute to the resourcing and talent planning process of your organisation. Delegates will understand the factors that affect an organisation’s talent planning, recruitment and selection policy, identifying appropriate recruitment and selection methods, contributing to the interviewing process and understanding the importance of effective induction.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Strategy and organisation design and links to resource planning Organisation design and resourcing Strategic importance of resourcing, recruitment and talent planning Developing a resource framework and methodology Recruitment and becoming an Employer Of Choice Utilising employee branding The recruitment process and the role of HR and managers Job descriptions, job analysis and establishing the package Recruitment interview techniques and exercises Using head hunters, agencies, job boards and social media Utilising recruitment agencies and headhunters Use of online recruitment and developing an online recruitment strategy Utilising your company website and social media channels in recruitment and branding Completing the recruitment process, references, employment contracts, administration etc.

Moving from induction to ‘onboarding’ Probation period and how to assess performance in the first few months From induction to ‘onboarding’, how to make an impact on your new employees Develop a talent management strategy and framework How HR can add value in resourcing, recruitment and talent management

Human Resources

Certificate In Performance Management And Performance Appraisals

Who Should Attend?

This course is for you if you are in an HR support role, or looking to become involved in recruitment, selection and resourcing talent.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Explain the factors that affect your organisation’s talent planning, recruitment and selection policy 2. Identify appropriate recruitment and selection methods 3. Develop and implement an effective online recruitment strategy

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

141

Human Resources

Certificate In Succession Planning And Career Development (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

(In association with Society for Human Resource Management (SHRM)) Course Overview

Course Overview

Succession planning has been identified as a key issue that “keeps CEOs awake at night”. Organisations that implement effective succession planning and career development ensure business continuity while motivating and retaining their talent. In the GCC region it is a key driver of localisation by ensuring that strategies are in place to meet challenging localisation targets.

Course Content • • • • •

Certificate In Talent Acquisition And Succession Planning

Succession planning or external market forces?

Compiling the succession plan Career development Impact on HR and organisational processes Implementation of the succession and career development plan

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed specifically for all management professionals with an interest in ensuring business continuity and improving performance, motivation and loyalty of employees. It is an essential course for Department Heads, Directors, Senior Managers and Section Heads. HR professionals, People Development Officers and Career Development specialists will also benefit from the outcomes of this course.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Ensure business continuity by planning succession into key organisational positions and preparing people appropriately to step up to leadership roles 2. Identify talented employees and provide structured career development opportunities to enable them to take on higher level and broader responsibilities 3. Attract and retain the top talent you need to meet your organisation’s current and future objectives

This course provides HR professionals the concepts and information to be able to develop a talent acquisition strategy that will ultimately attract qualified employees who have the keys skills necessary to support the organisation in achieving its goals. This interactive course forms a framework within which HR professionals can create, develop and implement an in-depth succession plan according to their organisation’s current and future needs.

Delegates will also learn how monitoring, developing and retaining critical talent creates a positive impact on the bottom line.

Course Outline • • • • • • • • • • •

Understanding your organisation Workforce planning Employment branding Recruiting Sourcing and targeting Interviewing Evaluation and selection Onboarding and retention Metrics Understand the organisation and succession planning relationship Developing and implementing a succession plan

Who Should Attend?

• • • • •

Mid to senior-level HR professionals with three to 14 years of HR experience HR professionals who need a greater understanding of the drivers of business performance HR professionals who want to communicate with business leaders around financial metrics HR professionals who support business leaders HR managers, directors and vice presidents responsible for working with business leaders

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

142

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I

Identify the importance of a talent acquisition strategy and where it fits into the overall HR and business strategies Recognise the importance and need for workforce planning Appreciate the importance of organisational culture and its impact on talent acquisition

I

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Certificate In Training Management

Course Overview

Course Overview

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

This course provides the foundation knowledge and skills required to be an effective training coordinator. It introduces delegates to the role of personal and organisation effectiveness, the importance of building relationships and creating a customer-focused function. It also focuses on the need to make sure that the training and development initiatives put in place deliver results and have clear value to the organisation.

Course Content • • • • • • • • •

Personal and organisational learning HRD department effectiveness Core competencies Operational performance, causal analyses and learning needs analysis Individual and team learning journeys Managing a training intervention Validation and evaluation Administration processes and procedures The numbers game

Who Should Attend?

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

A Human Resource Development, as an organisational process, comprises the skillful planning and facilitation of a variety of formal and informal learning and knowledge processes and experiences, primarily but not exclusively in the workplace, in order that organisational progress and individual potential can be enhanced through the competence, adaptability, commitment and knowledge-creating activity of all who work in the organisation.’

Harrison and Kessels (2004) This course addresses the whole arena of Human Resource Development to identify how training managers should be positioning themselves to be effective producers of business results. In addition to developing the skills of a training manager, it looks to develop the policies and procedures required to ensure alignment of learning initiatives and interventions with the business requirements, the visible support of senior executives, delivering efficiency and effectiveness of the department, linking learning to measurable performance and broadening the department offerings beyond formal classroom training.

Course Content

The strategic partnership The need for a total system A flexible approach to Learning Needs Analysis (LNA) Intervention design and delivery The HRD manager Effective communication techniques

This course has been specifically designed to provide the background information required for training coordinators. It is appropriate for newly appointed training professionals from all industries, and all those wishing to extend and update their foundation knowledge to become effective training coordinators.

• • • • • •

Benefits Of Attending

Who Should Attend?

1. Link learning with change and performance by recognising and understanding the key concepts of both personal and organisational learning 2. Analyse learning needs, plan training, organise training delivery and control the training budget 3. Provide analysis and advice to operational managers on how learning interventions will improve their departmental performance

This course has been designed for middle to senior level executives in the training sector including Heads of Human Resource Development, Training and Development Managers, Employee Performance Managers and anyone looking to build a career in training management.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E

Human Resources

Certificate In Training Coordination

Assess organisational, departmental, team and individual needs, linking human performance to the effectiveness of the organisation Create a broad range of effective and efficient solutions and interventions Ensure that programmes are effectively designed in accordance with developmental principles

I

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

143

Human Resources

Chief Learning Officer (CLO)

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Course Overview

This course invites senior Learning and Development managers to identify how Chief Learning Officers should be positioning themselves to be effective producers of business results.

In this course, you will work with like-minded people striving to make the learning professional relevant to their organisation.

Overall, you will identify a strategy to encourage the visible support of senior executives, linking learning to measurable performance and broadening the department offerings beyond formal classroom training.

Course Content • • • • • • •

The Strategic Partnership The HRD Value Proposition Getting The Policies Right Blended Learning – Creating Effective And Efficient Solutions And Interventions Evaluating The HRD Function Effective Relationship Action Plan

Who Should Attend?

• • • •

Training and Development Managers who are seeking to influence in the boardroom HRD Managers HR Directors General Managers – HRD

1.

2.

3.

Communicate effectively with senior managers about strategy and write a value proposition Align the Learning and Development (L&D)/HRD strategy with the organisation’s goals Develop solutions based on latest trends in L&D and ensure that evaluation of learning actually happens

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

Course Overview

The difference between minimum acceptable performance and excellent performance is in the behaviours and attitudes that people bring to the workplace. What type of performance do we demand from our people and what standard of performance are we recruiting for? If you rely on skills, experience and qualifications to make your selection decision, you are probably recruiting for a minimum standard of performance.

This course will give you the skills and practical experience through role plays and custom built assessment criteria to ensure you select the right type of people for your organisation.

Course Content • • • • • • • •

The Benefits Of A Competency Based Interview Structuring The Interview Setting The Objectives For Selection Interviewing And Making The Selection Decision Each Delegate Will Leave The Course With: A custom made list of questions for key positions in their organisation A custom built marking criteria for assessing candidates A set of common competency based interview processes

Who Should Attend?

The course is designed for hiring managers outside of HR, as well as recruitment specialists within HR, and all with responsibilities for interviewing and selection of employees.

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending

144

Competency Based Interview And Selection For Hiring Managers

I A

1.

2.

3.

Learn how to assess behaviours at an interview and design an objective marking criteria to assess candidates Create situational questions that probe real behaviours Ensure you select the right fit of candidate for your organisation and reduce recruitment errors

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

University School of Business) Course Overview

Course Overview

Human resources input is key to managing business and recessionary risk; it is the most important function of an organisation in today’s turbulent economy. Organisations need proactive human resource strategies that ensure long-term sustainability.

This comprehensive course provides insight, depth and understanding into the principles, models and frameworks used for developing and implementing an HR strategy that aligns with organisational strategic objectives.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Changing times and your HR strategy Strategic modelling Strategic analysis Analysing the environment Analysing resources and strategic capability Analysing cultural and stakeholder expectations Identifying critical success factors Strategic choice Identifying strategic options – generic strategies Identifying strategic options – alternative directions Evaluating options Selecting strategy Strategic implementation Managing strategic change Organisational structure and design

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

•

This course is designed for middle to senior level HR professionals responsible for developing HR strategies, and for contributing to organisational strategy, and who want to develop their repertoire of strategy analysis tools and techniques.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand HR’s role in organisational strategy development and implementation and ensure that your organisation’s objectives and critical success factors are supported by a comprehensive, proactive HR strategy 2. Ensure your HR strategy is based on a detailed and comprehensive understanding of the environment through sound strategic analysis and considered evaluation of alternatives 3. Successfully implement your HR strategy by managing the strategic change process appropriately

= Earned Training Hours

Course Content

•

Who Should Attend?

24 Hrs

How we behave towards our employees is of increasing importance.

Globalisation and increased competition has intensified the ‘Talent War’. The relationship between the employer and employee has changed. New definitions of loyalty are emerging. ‘Jobs for life’ appear to have gone. Employees are more discriminating and certainly more mobile. This practical course to produce ideas and plans for successful Employee Relations (ER) is designed around answers to our research into determining what constitutes an effective ER programme.

I

Human Resources

Developing And Implementing A Dynamic Employee Relations (In association with The George Washington HR Strategy

The psychological contract and Employee Relations (ER) Corporate culture and its impact upon ER Designing supportive ER policies and procedures Impact of stress upon ER Impact of managing Human Resource Key Result Areas (KRAs) The line managers’ role in ER – we are all HR managers!

Changing perceptions – staff as a revenue centre not a cost centre Impact of staff on the bottom-line Defining competency to use individuals to greatest effect Securing profit and increased efficiency through innovation Opening channels for employees’ ideas Assessing and using the intellectual capital of an organisation Motivating staff and managing performance The employee as internal customer – revealing what employees really think New concepts of human capital management ’accounting for people’ Preparing a ‘way ahead’ policy – fitting ER into a strategic plan

Who Should Attend?

Whilst ER is an integral part of HR, this course is not just for HR staff.

The importance of high quality ER has a direct impact upon levels of service, profit, standards, business ethics, corporate social responsibility and corporate governance. As such it is important for any manager who has charge of staff to understand the latest thinking regarding ER.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand what constitutes an effective Employee Relations programme 2. Appreciate the impact of employee relations on organisational development 3. Clearly demonstrate how Employee Relations impacts the bottom line of organisations

I

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

145

Human Resources

HR Next: HR Management Best Practices

(In association with Society for Human Resource Management (SHRM))

ILM Endorsed Recruitment, Selection And Retention Programme (Endorsed by ILM (Institute for Leadership and Management), UK)

Course Overview

This is a certificate course introduced by SHRM. It is based on contemporary research and best practices conducted by SHRM globally. It is a generalist program that focuses on the application of conceptual knowledge in everyday work. It is facilitated by certified SHRM-trained subject matter experts. The aim of the course is for delegates to fully understand the five main domains of HR within the context of a value-added HR model.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • •

Overall roles, functions and importance of HR Understand the screening process and the selection funnel Enhance turnovers and productivity at optimal costs Develop an appreciation of stakeholders’ role and interest in talent acquisition and management Awareness of critical legal frameworks that affect acquisition Apply structured analysis to need assessment, learning objectives, program design and effectiveness assessment Appreciate the principles of learning styles, human behavior, competencies, knowledge, training methods and development planning processes Principles of performance and its assessment Performance Management System (PMS) Conceptual framework behind compensation, benefit structures and their application in the overall business

Who Should Attend?

This course is for HR professionals with two to five years’ supervisory/ managerial level experience, typically in sectors like IT, ITES, banking and financial services, telecom, and retail. It is also ideal for those who have managerial roles, which require a high degree of interface with line functions or businesses. Job titles include: HR Manager, HR Business Partner, HR Advisor, HR Supervisor, HR Consultant.

Alternatively, Operational Managers moving into HR who have littleto-no formal HR theoretical studies.

Course Overview

This course, which is endorsed by ILM, has been specifically designed to help delegates recruit, retain and manage the talent needed to fulfil their strategic plans. Learn the latest thinking and approaches to the pressing issues you are facing and return to your office equipped to address current challenges in these aspects of HR. Delegates will be challenged to face current difficulties and encouraged to discuss them in an open, professional exchange of ideas.

Programme Content • • • • • •

The approach – competencies, culture Recruitment – get the right candidate Placement Retention – keep top performers Exciting ways to change Managing knowledge for successful retention

Who Should Attend?

This innovative course has been specially designed for HR managers, recruitment specialists and all other professionals involved in attracting, recruiting and retaining talent within their organisation.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Explore current best practice in recruitment, retention and development and how you can adapt these practices and strategies to best suit your organisational environment 2. Discover how to achieve best value for money through adopting precise selection measures, careful placement procedures and constructing exciting retention initiatives which help you get the right people on board in the right places 3. Win the management support you need to develop superior recruitment, retention and development programmes

Benefits Of Attending

1. Apply a structured analysis to assess learning needs, learning objectives and programme designs to ensure the effectiveness of your learning and development initiatives 2. Understand the conceptual framework behind compensation, benefit structures and their application in the overall business 3. Understand employee engagement, its framework and HR’s role in engaging employees

146

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

E I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Immigration And Labour Law In Oman

Course Overview

Course Overview

This two day course will provide delegates a solid understanding of existing and newly issued labour regulation in Bahrain. By attending this course, delegates will learn the framework and best practices for labour law compliance and the methods to minimise potential liability arising from employee terminations.

Course Content • • • • •

Overview Of Bahrain Labour Regulations 2012 Labour Law (A comparative study) Employee mobility Lawful termination Employment disputes

This course is being launched in Oman in 2014 in response to high demands for a dedicated course to address the most common labour issues in Oman. This course will help you understand Omanisation and its application including Omanisation rates applicable to different business sectors and restricted positions. You will identify the key elements of an employment contract, with particular attention to salary structure and mandatory benefits.

Course Content •

Employment and Omanisation policy in the various business sectors Types of employment contracts The components of the salary Minimum salary for Omani employees and its allocation Minimum yearly increase What is a mandatory benefit?

Working hours Wage Protection System (WPS) Termination of employment Protecting the company Employment disputes

This course would be highly beneficial for HR professionals responsible for their employees in the Kingdom of Bahrain and offshore entities seeking to establish or expand their presence in Bahrain. Corporate executives and in-house counsel should view this course as an opportunity to understand the implications of the 2012 Bahrain Labour Law which may require an update to their company’s model for recruitment, development and allocation of human capital.

• • • • • • • • • •

Benefits Of Attending

Who Should Attend?

Who Should Attend?

1. Gain an overview of the 2012 Kingdom of Bahrain Labour Law through comparative analysis 2. Understand employee mobility rights and how they can affect your business 3. Manage lawful termination of the employment relationship

Human Resources

Immigration And Labour Law In Bahrain

This course has been developed for all HR professionals within the Oman. It would also be highly beneficial for those working as company secretaries and legal heads who have had minimal formal training in labour law and wish to consolidate their experience in the region. In addition it would also benefit in-house counsel and lawyers who have recently been transferred to Oman.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

12 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E

Gain an understanding of employment regulations and benefits in Oman Understand Omanisation policy and be able to analyse an employment contract Manage termination clauses and manage labour disputes

E I A

12 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

147

Human Resources

Labour And Employment Law In Qatar

Labour And Employment Law In Saudi Arabia

Course Overview

Current Trends In Labour And Employment Law In Qatar has been developed for all those working in Qatar who want a recap of the Qatar labour laws; or want to gain a better understanding of Qatar labour laws and current practices; and for anyone who is new to the region or to an HR role. It has been designed for those who want an update on the regulatory trends and an insight of how to address issues that often arise in the employment context, in the new economic landscape in Qatar

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • •

Overview of the key employment/labour legislation and the sponsorship/immigration systems in Qatar and in the Qatar Financial Centre (QFC) Applicability of the labour law, Human Resources law, and QFC employment Regulations 2005 Employment and the nature of sponsorship Employee benefits Issues for companies (Discrimination/data protection/repatriation/ health and life insurance/exit visas) Employer civil and criminal liability for employees End of employment Resignation by employee Termination Protecting the company Employment disputes

Who Should Attend?

This course will be highly beneficial for those working as company secretaries and legal heads that have had minimal formal training in labour law and wish to consolidate their experience in the region. In addition it would also benefit in-house counsel and lawyers who have recently been transferred to this region.

Benefits Of Attending

Course Overview

This two day course will provide the delegates with a solid knowledge of KSA labour law and an employer’s obligation towards employees. As a result of attending the course, delegates will learn the framework for employing and terminating employees as well as the potential liability arising out of termination.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • •

Registering as an employer Immigration considerations Recruitment- Nitiquat and Hafiz system Termination of employment Social security Employment disputes Resignation Visa cancellation Saudisation Company policies All kinds of leaves

Who Should Attend?

This course will be highly beneficial for those working in the HR role as well as company secretaries and legal heads that have had minimal formal training in labour law and wish to consolidate their experience in the region.

In addition it would also benefit in-house counsel and lawyers who have recently been transferred to the KSA region

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Understand the labour and immigration framework in KSA Manage and fulfil the requirements to hire KSA nationals Learn the process for effecting lawful termination of employment

1. Understand the significance of local and international employment contracts 2. Identify the implications of terminating an employee and know which employee entitlements are discretionary for employers 3. Gain an understanding of the statutory provisions relating to immigration and sponsorship

148

12 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I

E I A

12 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Course Overview

This course has been developed for HR professionals within the UAE industry sectors who want a recap of the UAE labour laws; or want a better understanding of UAE labour laws and current practices; and for anyone who is new to the region or to an HR role. It has been designed for those who want an update on the regulatory trends and an insight of how to address issues that often arise in the employment context.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Overview, recruitment and in-term issues Employment contracts Emiratisation and the recruitment of host country national employees Employee benefits during the term of employment Holding employee passports Health and safety obligations Employee resignation and termination Notice periods and garden leave Employee entitlements upon termination Employment disputes The Ministry of Labour processes Labour and employment disputes in the local courts Protecting employer data and confidential information

Who Should Attend?

This course has been developed for all HR professionals within the UAE industry sector. It would also be highly beneficial for those working as company secretaries, legal heads who have had minimal formal training in labour law and wish to consolidate their experience in the region. In addition it would also benefit In-House Counsel, lawyers who recently have been transferred to the UAE.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand key principles of the labour laws of the UAE and the regulatory and enforcement trends at the Ministry of Labour 2. Manage the legal requirements organisations have to fulfil in relation to salaries, leave and other benefits 3. Identify the special considerations involving terminations/ redundancies of senior professionals and end of service benefits including severance pay/gratuity and other benefits

12 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I

The A – Z Of Competency Frameworks (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

Being tasked with introducing competencies into your organisation can seem at times like a mission impossible. This highly informative and interactive course will give delegates the tools, models, knowledge and understanding to be able to effectively design, build and implement a competency framework that contributes to your organisation’s strategy and long term success.

Gain an overall understanding of Human Resources as it relates to an organisation’s goals and strategic objectives. You will examine the issues of Human Resources management and its various functions, activities and processes.

Human Resources

Labour And Employment Law In The UAE

Course Content • • • •

Why introduce a competency framework?

Designing a competency framework Preparing to implement Implementation

Who Should Attend?

This course is appropriate for anyone who is considering reviewing or implementing a competency framework as part of the HR strategy.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Develop and define competencies that are a valuable management tool providing a common language and framework for understanding your organisation’s performance 2. Gain top management commitment to the framework, ensure that it is based on the mission, vision, values and strategy of your organisation, and then communicate it effectively 3. Learn how to implement the competency framework, using it to build a linked and cohesive suite of critical HR processes and discover how to overcome common implementation pitfalls

I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

149

T C I

ICT

Advanced Document And Records Management _______________________________________________________________________ 154 Building Strategic IT Capability For Improved Business ProďŹ tability (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)_________ 154

ICT

Table Of Contents

Business Continuity Management And IT Disaster Recovery (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)______________ 155 Business Driven Strategic IT Planning_________________________________________________________________________________ 155 Certified Information Systems Auditor (CISAÂŽ) Exam Preparation Course ____________________________________________________ 156 Cloud Computing Foundation Certificate Examination With Business Simulations ____________________________________________ 156 COBIT 5 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 157 Developing A Successful Web Portal Strategy__________________________________________________________________________ 157 Enterprise Application Integration___________________________________________________________________________________ 158 Essential IT Management___________________________________________________________________________________________ 158 Implementing Information Management Solutions Using SharePoint 2010 __________________________________________________ 159 Integrated Document And Records Management_______________________________________________________________________ 159 ITIL V3 Foundation Certificate In IT Service Management_________________________________________________________________ 160 IT Leadership____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 160 IT Project Management (PMI)_______________________________________________________________________________________ 161 Management Information Systems (MIS) ______________________________________________________________________________ 161 Service Level Agreements And IT Contracts (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)____________________________ 162 Strategic IT Manager______________________________________________________________________________________________ 162 Strategic Information Security Management___________________________________________________________________________ 163 Systems Analysis And Design_______________________________________________________________________________________ 163 The IT Scorecard__________________________________________________________________________________________________ 164 Transforming Your IT Organisation___________________________________________________________________________________ 164

153

ICT

Advanced Document And Records Management

Building Strategic IT Capability For Improved Business Profitability

Course Overview

This course is intended for people who have an understanding of the basics of document and records management and who wish to gain a deeper understanding of some of the techniques and steps involved in designing, implementing and running a document and records management solution. This course provides delegates with a more detailed understanding and experience of the major deliverables when implementing a DRM solution. This course uses a case study to take you through the typical stages of identifying, implementing and operating a document and records management solution. Exercises throughout the course get attendees to produce actual document and records management deliverables.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Setting the scene and investigating the feasibility of a DRM solution Elements of information management Business drivers for information management Information flows Standards and best practices for information management National, international and global compliance Discovery and disclosure Operational and reputational risk Solution implementation – business case and design Change management Procuring and implementing a document and records management solution Governance Requirements Selecting a solution

This brand new course is for those who are responsible for managing documents and records. Those involved in planning, developing and implementing a DRM solution. Those wishing to learn more about how to plan, implement and operate a document and records management solution. Anyone wishing to increase their level of understanding and expertise in document and records management will also benefit from this course.

1. Understand the lifecycle of document and records management solutions and be able to design an effective document and records management solution 2. Develop actual deliverables that occur throughout a document and records management project 3. Learn how the various project deliverables interact to provide an overall solution

= Earned Training Hours

This highly valuable course will provide you with a strategic approach to using IT as an integrated business capability, using the ITR4 TM model to determine the roles that will provide the organisation with a competitive edge, by increasing agility, controlling costs, reducing risk, improving stakeholder satisfaction and ultimately delivering valuable benefits to the organisation, by managing change proactively.

Course Outline

Theme - The Strategic IT Environment • The Environment In The 2010s • Governance • Organisational IT Maturity Theme - Strategic Planning And Innovation • Strategic Planning • Identifying And Managing Strategic IT Initiatives • Innovation In Strategic IT Management Theme – Developing The Right Business Architecture • Business Architecture • Assessing The Business Requirements • Managing IT Change Theme – Running The IT Operations • Setting Performance Targets • Performance Management • Corrective And Preventive Action • Review This course is primarily for executives/managers within the IT function who need to strengthen their strategic planning and management capabilities. It will also benefit: • IT professionals seeking to broaden their knowledge and prepare for a management role • Business managers/executives wishing to know more about strategic IT management and the benefits it delivers

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending

24 Hrs

Course Overview

Who Should Attend?

Who Should Attend?

154

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

A

1. Integrate IT activities into the strategic business plan, increasing value delivered and transform your IT activities from a cost overhead to strategic value-adding competitive edge for your organisation 2. Use the ITR4 TM model to balance the four classic roles of the IT department and provide the organisation with the IT capability it needs 3. Produce inter-layered IT plans, from strategic to operational levels, to deliver ‘quick wins’ and sustainable longer term value

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

This highly interactive and practical course will provide delegates with tools and show them how to use them to meet these demands and ensure continuity of business functions and processes.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Project initiation and management Risk evaluation and control Vital materials protection Developing continuity strategies Public relations and crisis communication: key to survival Why insurance won’t save you Emergency response and operations Business continuity roles and responsibilities Public relations and media management Structuring the business continuity plan Auditing, testing and maintaining business continuity plans The purpose of IT disaster recovery planning Backup regimes Recovery concepts/options Third party solutions, network solutions and voice solutions Integrating and testing the plan

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for: business continuity and disaster recovery professionals, audit professionals – internal auditors, external auditors, IT and telecommunication managers, project managers, analysts, strategy planners, consultants, heads of operations, and business analysts and business continuity managers. It will also be of interest to: financial controllers, heads of finance, risk managers, crisis managers, technical support managers and staff, security managers, planners, advisers and consultants, and property and facilities management.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Learn how to initiate and control a business continuity programme 2. Gain the latest techniques to make business continuity planning easier 3. Identify critical risks and analyse their impact

Business Driven Strategic IT Planning Course Overview

The IT function is subject to pressure from new technology as well as business volatility. These pressures demand better information technology management and planning.

ICT

Business Continuity Management And IT Disaster Recovery

Strategic IT planning helps ensure your organisation’s technology plans are consistent or aligned with its business plans. If effective, strategic IT planning can ensure delivery of IT services that balance cost and efficiency while enabling the business units to meet the competitive demands of the marketplace.

The course offers an approach to plan the fusion of IT with other strategic resources to achieve and sustain leadership. It includes a number of key tasks such as aligning IT with the direction of the business, understanding the role of IT in the business and implementing a reliable methodology for developing the IT plan.

Strategic IT planning is an effective management tool that will help you gain a greater understanding of your organisation’s IT capabilities and define its course for the future.

Course Content • • • • • • • • •

Introduction – the evolving role of IT strategy Strategy setting in business Strategic planning management and methodology Aligning business and IT Establishing IT strategic direction Determining business need IT goals and objectives Establishing the IT future Building the strategic plan

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for CIOs, IT directors and senior IT executives, corporate and IT planners, and senior business executives/strategists who have responsibilities in implementing IT initiatives in their organisation. IT managers, IT executives and other senior professionals responsible for strategic IT planning in an organisation will certainly benefit.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the strategic IT planning framework and formalise and document the IT master plan 2. Learn how to progress from business and organisation analysis to identification of IT opportunities 3. Plan the fusion of IT with other strategic resources to achieve and sustain leadership

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

155

ICT

Certified Information Systems Auditor (CISA®) Exam Preparation Course Course Overview

This course will help you to succeed in the CISA ® exam. The course will adhere to ISACA’s content area listing as outlined below.

It will assist your preparation when using ISACA’s CISA Review Manual and Question Database or other learning material through class-room discussions, exercises and thorough review of the exam content.

Course Content • • • • • •

Introduction to the exam, content, survival tips The IS audit process Governance and management of IT IS acquisition, development and maintenance IS operations, maintenance and support Protection of information assets

• •

Course Overview

This course provides a balanced approach to learning the business perspectives, the technical perspectives, and adopting, operating and governing the cloud. These concepts are strengthened throughout the course by assignments based on a fictitious company “PureNRG”. The Cloud Computing Foundation Certificate Examination With Business Simulations course introduces good practices for the cloud domain, and will enable you to pass the associated foundation exam to achieve the Cloud-Ready-Professional® (CRP) certification.

Course Content

Who Should Attend?

•

Cloud Computing Foundation Certificate Examination With Business Simulations 11 PDUs

Information Systems (IS) auditors, experienced IS-oriented internal and external auditors, and IS audit/audit/IS risk service experts aiming to demonstrate professionalism by earning the gold standard certification in IS auditing IT experts and management involved in IS assurance function Newly appointed IS audit professionals with IT background

This course contains seven graduated modules: • Module 2 introduces the basic definitions and concepts of cloud computing • Module 3 discusses the opportunities and challenges that cloud computing brings to the organisation • Module 4 will explain how techniques apply to each of the cloud service models • Module 5 contains suggestions for adopting the cloud • The final two modules cover operating and governing cloud computing

Who Should Attend?

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the requirements for achieving the CISA ® designation 2. Review key assurance aspects of IT governance, operation and security 3. Prepare for the CISA ® exam with the right approach and information

This course is aimed at IT professionals at different levels and from various organisations, including; • IT Support Staff • Business Process Owners • IT Consultants • IT Developers • Specialists (IT, security, • Service Providers infrastructure, services, • System Integrators systems, test, and others) • IT Middle Management

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

156

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

Demonstrate and apply the characteristic of cloud computing leading to business value Identify the organisational capabilities that are relevant for realising cloud benefits Successfully manage the impact and changes of cloud computing on IT service management

E

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Developing A Successful Web Portal Strategy

Course Overview

Knowledge of COBIT is critical to management and IT practitioners.

COBIT 5 framework established in 2012, is the foundation for better and aligned IT governance. As security, fairness, and transparency become key to good management, governance needs to move from boardrooms to every corner of the enterprise. Information is all pervasive and IT is a custodian. Business role in IT governance is critical to ensuring business achieving its goals. COBIT helps to identify and map business goals to IT processes and goals.

Course Outline • • • • • • •

Overview of COBIT 5 principles of COBIT 7 Enablers of COBIT 5 Systematic governance and management through interconnected enablers COBIT 5 enabler dimensions Implementation guidance COBIT 5 process capability model and its alignment to ISO 15504

Who Should Attend?

This course is essentially meant for IT managers, technical heads, service delivery and support staff and managers, managers responsible for ensuring governance within IT strategic planning and execution.

This course will add value to business managers who are directly responsible for IT services to run their business

Course Overview

This course will provide insight into the online business, social networking, collaboration, portal technology and content management for implementing your business strategy on the web.

You will be introduced to the concepts of solution conceptualisation and implementation using proven methods that can be used within your organisation to define and launch your strategic e-business and collaboration portals. The course will provide you with an in-depth overview of essential market assessment methods, technology and associated business management and IT processes.

ICT

COBIT 5

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Portal strategy Business case Portal framework Portal life-cycle Portal technology and components Portal Content Management (CM) Programme management Hosting operations and services Technology change and risk management Customer service Logistics and order fulfillment Portal performance and marketing Portal governance process and policies Regulatory compliance, issues and challenges

Who Should Attend?

Benefits Of Attending

COBIT 5 improves the planning, executing, monitoring of IT. COBIT 5 addresses the concerns faced by organisations including: 1. Strategic IT alignment with business 2. IT performance monitoring from a business perspective 3. IT governance issues allowing business to derive value from it

Managers and executives in government and corporate organisations, who need to acquire a high competency in portal solutions, development and content management tools, processes and governance Non-IT professionals, across all industry sectors associated with e-business, collaboration and content management initiatives and business transformation projects in management capacities

Benefits Of Attending

1. Gain insight into your business, web, portals and content management for implementing your internet channel strategy and unique customer experience 2. Build online brands and implement a successful business strategy and enhance overall customer experience and loyalty 3. Define government to citizen services (E-governance) portal architecture and implementation

24Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

157

ICT

Enterprise Application Integration

Essential IT Management

Course Overview

Course Overview

Enterprise Application Integration (EAI) is the unrestricted sharing of data and business processes among any connected application or data sources in the enterprise. At the Enterprise Application Integration (EAI) course the different integration approaches, architectures, methods and tools for achieving the degree of business and application integration for competitive business execution will be explained.

The relationship of various integration strategies is presented and an EAI methodology is defined with supporting methods for major EAI steps. Exercises performed at the end of key sections and product demonstrations will provide a head start in framing an effective EAI solution or evaluating your current efforts.

Course Content

Introduction and overview – enterprise application integration Enterprise Business Integration approach (EBI) The enterprise application integration approach Developing integration strategies Enterprise segregation – a new issue Architecture driven integration requirements The integration project Data integration techniques The service oriented architecture approach to integration Process, logic and workflow integration using the portal concept Tool selection and the integration approach

• • • • • • • • • • •

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for IT professionals and supervisors who are responsible for integrating IT, business applications and content.

It will benefit all professionals responsible for business processes and planning, business process analysis, IT projects, IT operations, applications, networks, information systems, business systems, IT architecture, IT infrastructure and IT strategy.

IT management today is under considerable pressure to perform.

That performance has many facets not the least which are to deliver services, control costs and protect the IT assets of the enterprise.

The focus in this course is on understanding what has been changing in IT, what the current thinking is and what might happen in the near future that requires attention of today’s IT managers.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • •

IT management today Management roles in IT Managing the IT staff Managing user support Managing operations Managing IT infrastructure IT and their role with the web Project management Managing IT change IT security IT performance management

Who Should Attend?

IT managers, supervisors, business systems teams, systems analysts, development professionals and managers who want to know what IT faces today.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Examine ways to measure IT performance and identify the correct tools for IT performance management Develop IT plans which are linked to your organisation’s business objectives Understand how to manage IT change and how to implement positive IT change into your organisation

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

158

Successfully address the challenges of Enterprise Application Integration (EAI) to generate new business opportunities Integrate mission critical applications to achieve a flexible enterprise Present different integration approaches, architectures, methods and tools to achieve competitive application integration

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I

E

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Course Overview

SharePoint 2010 is being widely adopted as the user platform of choice for many organisations. It has established itself as the corporate information vehicle for a wide range of desktop user services, including collaboration, web publishing and information sharing.

With SharePoint 2007 Microsoft incorporated records management capabilities for the first time. Microsoft has developed this capability further in SharePoint 2010. Organisations are now beginning to adopt these features to provide their corporate Electronic Document and Records Management (EDRM).

Developing a solid and sustainable information management capability within SharePoint requires careful planning, design and implementation. This course helps guide you through the document and records management features within SharePoint and presents a 12-step method to undertaking information architecture and design.

Integrated Document And Records Management Course Overview

This course will discuss the importance of document and record management processes, providing advice and insight into how it can substantially improve and enhance organisational efficiency and profitability.

Course Content • • • • • • • •

Course Content • • • • • • •

An understanding of the corporate information management system requirements and options.

An overview of Microsoft SharePoint 2007 and 2010 An assessment of the capability of SharePoint to meet information management requirements A description of the various versions of SharePoint and a key comparison of the features An explanation of Microsoft SharePoint and its record management capability; what it does and what it does not do A method for designing a Microsoft SharePoint information architecture Guidelines for implementing a solution and the key stages to consider

Who Should Attend?

• • • •

Records and Information managers who need to know more about Microsoft SharePoint 2010 to develop records management strategies and systems Business and Information Analysts who need to understand how to design solutions using Microsoft SharePoint 2010 SharePoint Designers/Programmers who need to understand more about information and records management ICT managers who need to implement effective information storage strategies for their Microsoft SharePoint 2010 systems

ICT

Implementing Information Management Solutions Using SharePoint 2010

Introduction to information management needs and drivers Business drivers for information management National, international and global compliance Digital preservation Search and retrieval Pre-implemenation planning Business and system requirements Selecting and implementing EDRM (Electric Document And Record Management) Systems

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for business managers, IT managers, supervisors and executives, heads of technical support, systems analysts, audit managers, compliance officers, archivists, librarians, records managers, document managers, operations managers and information managers, as well as for solution providers, sales consultants, project managers and technical staff.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Get a clear vision of the application of document and record management technologies including document imaging, record management, content management and knowledge management Look at opportunities for improving core business processes without compromising the data Identify where changes could be beneficial and how to reengineer them and determine the document management technologies to support those changes

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Create more efficient storage structures, avoiding duplication and thus reducing storage costs Increase accessibility of information, enabling staff to be more productive Apply effective lifecycle management, deleting redundant information both reducing storage costs and improving information searches

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

E I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

159

ICT

ITIL V3 Foundation Certificate In IT Service IT Leadership Management Course Overview Course Overview

The course introduces delegates to the lifecycle of managing IT services to deliver to business expectations. As well as an engaging, case study based approach to learning the core disciplines of the ITIL best practice, this course also positions you to successfully complete the associated exam, required for entry into the future ITIL V3 intermediate level training courses.

The ITIL Version 3 best practice is composed of five core disciplines: service strategy, service design, service transition, service operations and continual service improvement. These disciplines represent a service life cycle framework that further enhances alignment to the business while demonstrating business value, ROI and enabling IT to solve specific operational needs.

This course will teach delegates the skills that they need to take their service management to the next level. It will teach delegates to define the business’ key IT drivers, understand what tools will work best for their organisation and align IT and business strategic planning.

Course Content

Service management as a practice – key principles Service design Service operation Continual Service Improvement (CSI)

• • • •

This course is designed for all IT professionals, system and network administrators, managers and executives who are responsible for the delivery of IT services in an organisation..

3.

160

Gain a better understanding of the value IT delivers to support a business Understand the role of integrated tool sets in the successful implementation of IT Service Management (ITSM) Achieve a professional qualification recognised within the IT industry – which is a requirement to attend intermediate or advanced ITIL courses

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

Course Content • • • • • • •

Personal leadership Strategic leadership Innovation and technology leadership Change leadership Crisis leadership Team leadership Corporate leadership

This course is designed for IT directors and senior IT executives and IT planners. IT professionals and supervisors who are responsible for developing an IT strategy, leading IT teams or particular IT projects, IT (project) managers and IT operations managers interested in bridging the gap between IT and business goals will surely benefit as well.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

Benefits Of Attending 2.

This course will provide participants with tools, frameworks and processes that will help them become more effective in their work.

Participants will gain an understanding of their obligations as IT leaders and their role in the wider organisation governance, manage change and improve financial performance. This course offers an approach to plan the fusion of IT to achieve and sustain leadership.

Who Should Attend?

Who Should Attend?

1.

IT has become critical in shaping new strategies and redefining the organisation and the industry. The new paradigm calls for technology leaders to align and integrate IT with the business processes and goals as it is becoming even more crucial to achieve and sustain a competitive edge in today’s volatile environment.

E

2.

3.

Measure the true benefits of projects and build better business cases and develop world class IT strategy and plans Understand business strategy models and be able to develop your own world class technology strategy Manage crises better through improved communication and organise innovation workshops to become an innovation leader

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Management Information Systems (MIS)

Course Overview

Course Overview

(24 PDUs)

This course will enable delegates to take control of scheduling, budgeting and resource allocation. Participants will also explore how to avoid common pitfalls that side track IT projects. Maximum opportunities will be given to inject their own examples and issues into the course and continually relate the material to their own organisation.

Course Content • • • • • • • •

The project management background The project manager and project team assembly Project leadership, motivation and people skills Project initialisation process Project planning process Project execution process Project monitoring and controlling processes Project case studies

Course Content

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for managers and executives who are directly involved in planning and implementing IT projects or setting up a Project Management Office and those requiring an advance set of IT tools to assist in cost estimation, cost tracking, procurement, contracting, risk assessment and management, quality control and scope verification.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Digitising an enterprise is a core approach to designing effective and efficient solutions to business problems. The key idea for digitising the enterprise is systems and systems thinking. A system is an integrated set of elements that accomplish defined objectives. A digitised enterprise is not the same as a digital enterprise. The digitised enterprise is one that extensively uses digitised processes to solve business problems. A digital enterprise is a web based enterprise.

System thinking has driven the understanding of business for many years. At the core of systems thinking is creating a boundary around a number of components of something and then understanding how the components influence and relate to each other. There is no better example of systems than the structure of a typical business. Adding the feedback idea to systems we get a dynamic and adaptive view of a business, a key need in responding to changes in the environment around the business

ICT

IT Project Management (PMI)

Gain a comprehensive understanding of the key processes of IT project management Have a ready set of working templates, forms and checklists relevant for use in projects Create standard project management documentation and communications, status, resource and budget plans

• • • • • • • • • • • •

MIS today Systems thinking and doing Types of systems Business analysis – what should the system do?

Enterprise analysis – the business structure Articulating requirements for business systems Types of operational systems Business performance and reporting systems Assessing information system viability Methods of delivering solutions Delivering systems – the role of it Information economics

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for business managers and directors, business analysts, IT heads and directors, process analysts, systems analysts, supervisors, business systems teams, and managers who want to know how to adapt to today’s changed business environment

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the key role of systems in the business by developing insights into the value of information 2. Learn the core application of systems to increase business performance 3. Recognise how systems can improve thinking about the business structure and develop a world class digital enabled enterprise

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I

I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

161

ICT

Service Level Agreements (SLAs) And IT Contracts (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

A formal SLA between the user and the provider of the computing service is one of the keystones of today’s IT and telecommunications management. SLAs are as appropriate to in-house computing, communications, development and support activities as they are to commercial or facilities management operations. By embracing the business case of the user, SLAs can help to justify the company’s overall computing requirements, ease capacity planning, justify resources and establish the case for security and disaster recovery planning.

Course Content

Implementing SLAs: The SLA project Measuring the service: what, where and how to measure Managing SLAs Creating an SLA Format and structure of the SLA Effective negotiation and management of IT contracts Tendering response and supplier evaluation Tactics and behaviour in negotiation Managing supplier performance How suppliers charge

• • • • • • • • • •

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for IT managers, all users and customers of IT and telecommunications services wishing to optimise the value of services they receive from their service provider, Hi-tech Service Vendors, ISPs, ASPs, ISVs, NSPs, Software Vendors, Hardware Vendors, Application Integrators and IT Managers new to the purchasing and negotiation of IT services. It will also be beneficial for purchasing, sales/marketing managers, supervisors and staff taking up such appointments for the first time and those who have had little formal training in purchasing and negotiation and wish to consolidate their experience.

Strategic IT Manager Course Overview

At Strategic IT Manager, delegates will learn how to be a business oriented IT manager. They will find out how to be a strategic thinker by developing IT plans which are linked to an organisation’s business objectives and establish performance indicators which extend beyond the IT department.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • •

Enterprise architecture and IT strategy Technology forecasting for IT IT performance and dashboards Computing using services Cloud Computing Risk and value management in IT Electronic services and IT change IT governance Technology forecasting for IT Improving IT customer value The role of the CIO

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for managers and executives who are directly involved in planning and implementing IT projects or setting up a Project Management Office and those requiring an advance set of IT tools to assist in cost estimation, cost tracking, procurement, contracting, risk assessment and management, quality control and scope verification.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Determine the best IT processes, policies and standards for an organisation Examine ways to measure IT performance and identify the correct tools for IT performance management Learn to develop IT plans which are linked to an organisation’s business objectives

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

162

Gain an in-depth understanding of the strategic value of Service Level Agreements (SLAs) Design an SLA format for use in an organisation Learn how to ensure vendors supply services that exactly match an organisation’s needs

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Systems Analysis And Design Course Overview

Course Overview

This course encompasses all new developments in the field with focus on threats and risks, compliance and regulations, security frameworks, architecture, effective policies and effective integration of standards and metrics.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • •

Planning for information security Understanding external threats – Who is the hacker?

Security architecture Security domains Managing security Effective integration of standards and metrics Incident management Planning for Business Continuity (BCP) and disaster recovery plans Defining your BCP and disaster recovery plans Implementing your BCP and disaster recovery plans Testing your BCP and disaster recovery plans Maintaining your BCP and disaster recovery plans

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for IT professionals who, through their involvement in managing or directing their organisation’s IT infrastructure, are responsible for establishing and maintaining information security policies, practices and procedures. It will also be of value to financial and operational audit professionals as well as non-IT professionals tasked with the responsibility of assessing their organisation’s IT operations, infrastructure and security.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Establish the threats and risks to a business and define a security strategy which matches the risk Develop a strong case for Business Continuity Planning (BCP) and learn to evolve a suitable framework Effectively address incidence response, crisis management, disaster recovery and business continuity

This course deals with information, information processing and information systems. It will help you appreciate the need for analysis and design of the information systems in your organisation, discuss the merits of a system and introduce various roles involved in the system development cycle. You will be introduced to different types of system development methodologies and their advantages and disadvantages.

The course also discusses object oriented analysis and design. As UML helps object oriented modelling, the course provides an indepth view of Unified Modelling Language - one of the widely used modelling languages for visualising, communicating, documenting and constructing software systems.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

This course is designed for software professionals who lead, manage, execute or control the development of software systems. It will be of immense value to product managers, project managers, team leaders, systems engineers, software engineers, programmers, programmer analysts, systems analysts, business analysts and web developers.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

3.

= Earned Training Hours

I A

Software engineering Software in focus Software development models Extreme Programming (XP) Rapid Application Development (RAD) Dynamic Systems Development Model (DSDM) The waterfall model Requirements analysis and design Object oriented analysis and design Software construction, testing and software quality Object oriented analysis and design Overview of Unified Modelling Language (UML) Advanced structural modelling Architectural modelling

Who Should Attend?

2.

24 Hrs

ICT

Strategic Information Security Management

Understand the evolution of software development and recognise various development methodologies best suited for your organisation Appreciate the need for a systematic approach to software development by realising the importance of software testing and software quality Explore the software development life cycle and the need for structured analysis and design

I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

163

ICT

The IT Scorecard

Transforming Your IT Organisation

Course Overview

The adoption of the Balanced Scorecard (BSC) is credited with a revolutionary improvement in business mission achievement. Learn how the IT BSC can demonstrate business-IT alignment and support delivery of corporate strategy.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • •

The Balanced Scorecard – aligning IT with corporate strategy Who is doing bsc and why?

The IT balanced scorecard Why IT is different: adjusting the BSC for IT Developing the ICT bsc IT Balanced Scorecard value metrics Steps to successful ict BSC development and implementation Cascaded BSC for it activities Middle east case studies BSC reporting Balanced Scorecard software Making BSC stick

Who Should Attend?

• • • • • • • •

Board/Executive members responsible for ICT CIOs, MIS, IT, ICT and Computer Service Managers ICT Operations, Infrastructure, Applications and Customer Service Managers ICT project managers Systems managers Corporate strategists Finance managers Auditors

Course Overview

In today’s business climate, an organisation’s IT service has to support - and often even fuel - the required transformations of the business.

Businesses require a more practical, more effective and more aligned IT-improvement. This course offers a proven approach by replacing the traditional IT process views by a new paradigm. You will be able to achieve a drastic re-alignment of your IT operations and the business will start to appreciate IT as a strategic partner, instead of just a support and a cost.

Course Content • • • • • • • •

Who Should Attend?

• • •

Benefits Of Attending

1. Meet governance requirements. Address increasingly important IT governance needs and improve business-IT alignment 2. Learn to drive better value from ICT by linking ICT budget to strategic achievement 3. Discover how the ICT BSC can improve productivity, efficiency and effectiveness

1.

2.

5.

6.

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

CFOs, CIOs and IT Directors, IT Strategists and IT Governance Consultants Newly appointed CIO’s and IT Managers Managers of IT Relationship Management, Managers of Service Management, Change Managers and Programme Managers of IT Improvement Programmes

Benefits Of Attending

3.

4.

164

Analysing your current position vis-à-vis your internal clients Analysing your current processes, throughout the complete Information Value Chain (including IT Governance, IT Demand, IT Supply) Collecting the most relevant facts on your performance Defining improvement requirements, with maximum effect Selecting best practices, from the confusingly available variety: COBIT, ITIL, PMP, Prince2, CMMi, SCRUM, etc.

Planning practical, structural improvements Achieving quick wins, for immediate improvement of your relation with the business Influencing your internal clients (and your boss) to take up their own role in creating value-add

Reposition your IT department by improving its impact on - and appreciation by - the business Organise effective IT relationship management and expectation management, rapidly improving relations with the business Measure the quality/cost ratio of your IT services and improve it Understand and use the full set of best practices and improvement techniques, from both IT Industry and Management Sciences Understand what it takes for real IT Leadership Propagate a self-steering IT organisation, to allow you more time devoted to strategy development

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

I

D N

T S U

L A I R

INDUSTRIAL

Asset Integrity Management _______________________________________________________________________________________ 168 Associate Certificate in Environmental Management ____________________________________________________________________ 168 Certificate In Bearings And Lubrication (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)_______________________________ 169 Certificate In Managing And Maintaining Spare Parts (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)____________________ 169 Certificate In Mechanical Seals And Dry Seals (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)__________________________ 170 Certificate In Pumps – Selection, Operation And Troubleshooting (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)__________ 170

Industrial

Table Of Contents

Certificate In Reciprocating Compressors: Design, Operation And Maintenance (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)___ 171 Certificate In Reliability And Maintenance Management Course I – Managing Maintenance Improvement Tools (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)________________________________________________________________ 171 Certificate In Reliability And Maintenance Management Course II – Advanced Maintenance Management Practices (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)________________________________________________________________ 172 Certificate In Reliability And Maintenance Management Course III – Building Value In Maintenance Through Reliability (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)________________________________________________________________ 172 Certificate In Root Cause Failure Analysis (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)______________________________ 173 Certificate In Technical Report Writing (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)________________________________ 173 Corrosion And Corrosion Control____________________________________________________________________________________ 174 Electrical Engineering_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 174 Emergency Response Planning _____________________________________________________________________________________ 175 Foundation Certificate in Environmental Management __________________________________________________________________ 175 HV Switchgear (In association with Aston University)___________________________________________________________________________ 176 Physical Asset Management (PAM) (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) __________________________________ 176 Reliability Centred Maintenance (RCM) (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) _______________________________ 177 Total Productive Maintenance (TPM) (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) _________________________________ 177

167

Industrial

Asset Integrity Management

Associate Certificate in Environmental Management (In association with IEMA)

Course Overview

The objective of this course is to bridge the gap between the theoretical and practical knowledge of asset integrity management methodology and processes. You will understand the operational risks induced by the reservoir as a result of its dynamic changes and how these changes affect the risk identification process for pipelines and subsurface equipment.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Integrity management strategy Data management and acquisition Hazard identification and risk assessment Corrosion monitoring and inspection Implementation Performance measures and reporting schedules Roles and responsibilities Tactical review and audit Experience gained and lessons learnt Origin and production of oil and gas Corrosion and corrosion control options Flow assurance problems in the oilfield Integrity management of subsea pipelines, risers and subsea equipment and downhole equipment Risk identification and assessment Monitoring and inspection

Who Should Attend?

• • • • • • • • • • • • •

Pipeline, Subsea Maintenance/ Inspection/Repair Engineers Corrosion, Inspection and Integrity Engineers Reservoir, Drilling, Production and Petroleum Technology Engineers, Team Leaders and Managers Petro Physicists, Well Integrity Engineers, Team Leaders and Managers Quality Assurance Engineers and Leaders Senior Corrosion and Material Engineers Heads of Corrosion and Inspection Heads of Performance and Reliability Structural Integrity Specialists Technical Integrity Support Managers Process Safety Managers Integrity Systems Managers Asset Managers

Benefits Of Attending

1. Optimally design, maintain, operate and decommission assets to consistently high standards 2. Effectively manage the integrity and reliability of your assets throughout the entire life cycle 3. Recognise the different corrosion control options and use good corrosion mitigation techniques to address the life extension requirements of ageing assets

168

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

Course Overview

The Associate Certificate in Environmental Management is designed to raise the professional competence of environmental practitioners by developing and assessing your knowledge, understanding and application of environmental management and assessment. Successful completion of the certificate exam results in the award of Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment (IEMA) Associate membership, which is the essential professional qualification for working in an environmental role.

Course Outline • • • • • • • • • •

Environmental And Sustainability Principles Environmental Policy Issues Key Environmental Legislation And Compliance Measures Environmental Management And Sustainable Development In A Business Context Collect, Analyse And Report On Environmental Information And Data Applying Environmental Management And Assessment Tools Analysing Problems And Opportunities To Deliver Sustainable Solutions Developing And Implementing Programmes To Deliver Environmental Performance Improvement Communicating Effectively With Internal And External Stakeholders Influencing Behaviour And Implementing Change To Improve Sustainability

Who Should Attend?

The Associate Certificate is the essential professional status for anyone who is working in an environmental role or has responsibility for environmental issues. These include, but are not limited to: Environmental managers, advisers, consultants and HSE managers and consultants.

This course will also be relevant to professionals taking on Environmental Management as part of their job role, such as: • Project Managers • Facilities Managers • Construction Managers • Management Representatives • HSE regulatory bodies

Benefits Of Attending

1. Analyse problems and opportunities to deliver sustainable solutions 2. Develop and implement programmes to deliver environmental performance improvement 3. Influence behaviour and implement change to improve sustainability

I A

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In association with The George Washington University) Course Overview

Bearings are essential parts of rotating machinery. This course is designed to discuss different aspects of bearing tribology, proper selection of bearings and lubricants. The course will also discuss relubrication maintenance.

Course Content

Bearings Fundamentals • Rolling element, journal, hydrostatic and electromagnetic bearing Bearing Selection • Bearing loads calculation • Journal bearings design chart • Fatigue life calculation • Shaft and house fittings • Bearing deflection and pre-loading Lubricants • Boundary, elastohydrodynamic and full fluid-film lubrication • Liquid lubricants • Properties of lubricants • Viscosity index • Lubricant additives • Grease lubrication • Polymeric and solid lubricants Lubrication Techniques • Oil bath/splash, forced, oil-mist, semi-fluid lubrication • Lubricant contamination • Bearing and mechanical seals

Who Should Attend?

Engineers and Technicians responsible for rotating equipment and plant machinery maintenance will benefit from attending this course.

Certificate In Managing And Maintaining Spare Parts (In association with The George Washington University) Course Overview

The course provides a solid grounding in understanding the critical importance of a smooth, cost effective and timely supply of spare parts. Delegates will explore the various types of spare parts, why the differences matter and how each should be managed. Using practical examples, this course will familiarise delegates with the best practices and how they can be introduced and maintained. Delegates will also learn the principal ways to forecast spares – based on historical consumption plus future operations, based on reliability of components, and based on the required reliability of the plant.

The course will also address the more recently-developed advanced spares management concepts and delegates will build action plans to take back to their workplace. A central theme throughout will be financial KPI’s that are essential for measuring the effectiveness of the sparing program – thus ensuring that the supply of spares meets the overall organisations criterion of cost-effectiveness.

Course Content • • • • • •

Introduction to spare parts management Key tools in spare parts management Physical management of spares Forecasting spare parts requirements KPIs and other performance measurement tools Advanced spares management

Who Should Attend?

• • •

Benefits Of Attending

1. Learn how to increase reliability of rotating machinery and reduce bearing failure by minimising the friction and wear between interacting surfaces of bearings 2. Improve the tribology characteristics of bearings 3. Increase the life of bearings and minimise fatigue failure by proper lubricant selection, republication, and lubricant protection from different contaminations

Industrial

Certificate In Bearings And Lubrication

• • • •

Managers and supervisors looking to learn the discipline of spare parts management Managers, supervisors, senior technicians involved in spare parts and warehousing Operations, design, mechanical, electrical and instrumentation engineers wishing to expand their knowledge and experience of maintenance spare parts management Logistics, procurement, buyers, expeditors involved in spares acquisition Planners, schedulers, reliability engineers responsible for maintenance work Supervisors from departments such as operations, HSE, HR, finance, QA, inspection Maintenance support staff seeking to better understand the maintenance spare parts business

Benefits Of Attending

1. Experience a full range of spares management practices 2. Learn how to apply the most effective practices and tools for spares management to your own workplace 3. Understand and apply the most effective Spares KPI’s – learn which do not work

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I

I A

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

169

Industrial

Certificate In Mechanical Seals And Dry Seals: Design, Application, Selection, Installation, Troubleshooting and Maintenance (In association with The George Washington University) Course Overview

An intensive, highly practical course to give delegates a practical understanding of the applications, troubleshooting and failure diagnosis, installation and maintenance of mechanical seals.

Mechanical seals for pumps and compressor applications, and recent designs like dry mechanical seals will also be addressed.

Course Content

Mechanical Seals – Fundamentals • Allowable leak rates • Friction and heat transfer • Applications • Material consideration • Operating conditions and operating limits Mechanical Seals Selection • Data requirements for seal selection • Mechanical seals configurations and applications Dry Seals • Advantages and disadvantages of dry seals • Dry seal retrofit • Mechanical seals – pump and compressor considerations Mechanical Seals Troubleshooting And Maintenance • Failure diagnosis and visual seal examination • Common seal failure modes • Seal installation tolerances • Vibration, high temperature, running speed and rotor balance effects

(In association with The George Washington University) Course Overview

This course details best practice procedures for selecting and operating pumps. It is a comprehensive training course on troubleshooting and maintaining pumps, to minimise the likelihood of failures, ensure higher reliability and prolonging the life of your asset and reducing the associated maintenance costs.

Course Content Pumping types and performance • Pumps classifications • Single stage and multi-stage pumps • Pumps auxiliary systems • Pumps materials • Pumps installation Pump operation and control • Pumps performance curves • Pumps operation • Pumps capacity controls Pump selection • Pumps standards • Piping system calculations • Pump specific speed • Pumps rating • Pumps applications

Pumps troubleshooting • Principles of troubleshooting • Troubles: causes and remedies • Troubles diagnoses Pumps troubleshooting • Maintenance strategies • Pumps monitoring systems • Pump testing • Running clearances • Rotor unbalance • Pumps misalignment • Shaft seals defects • Bearing defects • Cost and control pumps maintenance

Who Should Attend?

Engineers and technicians responsible for Operation, Troubleshooting and Maintenance of Turbo-Machines, Procurement and Purchase professionals will benefit from attending

The course is aimed at mechanical engineers responsible for specifying, selecting, operating, maintaining and troubleshooting pumps of different types. It will also benefit maintenance and operation technicians responsible for pumps.

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending

Who Should Attend?

1.

2.

3.

170

Certificate In Pumps – Selection, Operation And Troubleshooting

Understand the different types of seals and explore selection, operation and maintenance strategies Be able to troubleshoot seal problems Understand how seals are fitted and tested

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I

1. Understand the different pump designs, their construction and applications and learn about pump performance, limits of operation, trouble-free operation 2. Practice methods of selecting and specifying the most appropriate pumps for your application based on the pertinent standards and codes 3. Learn the most appropriate maintenance practices that leads to cost reduction and more reliable pumps

I A

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In association with The George Washington University)

Certificate In Reliability And Maintenance Management Course I – Managing Maintenance Improvement Tools (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Course Overview

This course covers different aspects of the most widely used type of compressors, the Reciprocating Compressors. The theory, construction and functions of different components, operation and control of these compressors will be discussed in detail. The parameters affecting the performance of these compressors will also be demonstrated. Major known problems and troubles of reciprocators will be discussed.

Analysis of the reciprocator performance is also included in the course.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Compression theory and methods International codes and standards Principles of operation Basic reciprocating compressor types Compressor configurations Compressor construction and components Performance and control Compressor system interaction Capacity control Compressor cooling systems Compressor major problems and troubleshooting Compressors sealing Analysis of reciprocating compressor using a P-V diagram Compressor pressure/time (PT) analysis Compressor vibration analysis

Who Should Attend?

Engineers and Technicians from Operations, Maintenance, Procurement and Purchase departmentsTroubleshooting and Monitoring personnel

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the construction and functions of different components in compressors to effectively operate and control them 2. Maximise the performance of compressors 3. Troubleshoot challenges in handling reciprocating compressors

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

Course Overview

This practical course will introduce delegates to a range of tools to improve the performance of their maintenance function. Delegates will examine best practice tools, including benchmarking and maintenance optimisation, and define effective key performance indicators (KPIs) for the maintenance function. You will also learn about the selection and application of Computerised Maintenance Management Systems (CMMS) and Enterprise Asset Management Systems (EAMS). Effective planning, scheduling and control tools will be discussed and the foundation laid for reliability and maintenance improvement. Most importantly, you will learn the tips and techniques needed to start right away to apply these tools successfully in your workplace.

Industrial

Certificate In Reciprocating Compressors: Design, Operation And Maintenance

Course Content • • • • • • •

Best practice tools Maintenance performance improvement and KPIs CMMS/EAM – Introduction CMMS/EAM – Selection Maintenance improvement – Applying CMMS/EAM Maintenance improvement – Effective planning, scheduling and control Laying the foundation for reliability – RCM and maintenance improvement

Who Should Attend?

Senior maintenance technicians, senior materials technicians, aspiring supervisors of maintenance and materials, planners and schedulers.

Supervisors and managers of materials, maintenance and reliability who would like a refresher would also benefit from the course.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the basic building blocks of maintenance and reliability and lay the foundation for continuous maintenance improvement 2. Assess and upgrade personal and maintenance department performance 3. Build a personal development plan as a springboard for career advancement

I A

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

171

Industrial

Certificate In Reliability And Maintenance Management Course II – Advanced Maintenance Management Practices (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

This course has been designed around advanced maintenance management practices. Through practical exercises and case studies delegates will be able to lead long-term change and improvement initiatives using asset management strategies and total productive maintenance (TPM). Delegates will examine all aspects of maintenance project management and use practical failure management techniques to strategically improve decision-making. By selecting smart maintenance tactics and advanced methods of CMMS optimisation you will achieve effective cost control and reliability of your processes and equipment. The emphasis throughout will be on the practical application of these techniques every day in your workplace.

Asset management strategy CMMS/EAM optimisation – Advanced methods and practices Putting smart ideas into practice – Selecting the right maintenance tactics Putting smart ideas into practice – Failure management techniques Maintenance project management Implementing lasting change – Change management in maintenance and physical asset management

• • • • • •

Achieving and managing reliability Maintenance risk management Financial management in maintenance Using financial management in maintenance – Practical workshops New and advanced technologies – Ensuring continuous maintenance improvement with living reliability New and advanced technologies – Maintenance expert systems

Who Should Attend?

Graduates of Course I, aspiring managers, maintenance and materials supervisors and managers, senior planners, schedulers and technicians, and reliability specialists.

Graduates of Courses I and II, senior maintenance and materials supervisors, maintenance managers, materials managers, superintendents, senior maintenance and materials specialists, senior reliability specialists, planning and scheduling supervisors and managers.

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending

Who Should Attend?

1.

2.

3.

172

This practical, intensive and advanced course is the final stage of the programme and focuses on techniques to achieve and manage reliability. Delegates will be able to make effective maintenance decisions and determine their maintenance strategy using risk measurement practices. Practical workshops will expose you to financial management and budgeting so that you build value for the maintenance department. You will discuss the usage and maintenance of expert systems and their relation to other maintenance tools. This course will equip you with advanced skills and knowledge for you to ensure continuous maintenance improvement through Living Reliability. Once again, delegates will concentrate on identifying how best to apply these skills to their workplace.

Course Content

Course Content

• • •

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

Course Overview

• • •

Certificate In Reliability And Maintenance Management Course III – Building Value In Maintenance Through Reliability

Recognise and benefit from new ideas and techniques whilst effectively avoiding pitfalls Expand your maintenance knowledge base to enhance your career and the company’s business. Discuss and practice latest techniques during the course workshops Build on your personal development plan by focusing on success factors

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

1. Understand the impact of financial management – why and how we must become more astute as business managers – not just maintenance managers 2. Reliability improvement is not happenstance; learn how attention to some straightforward techniques and basic analyses can improve your overall reliability 3. See why EAM’s will not give you the answers you need – and how you can use their base data to feed advanced analysis

A

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Certificate In Root Cause Failure Analysis

Certificate In Technical Report Writing

Course Overview

Course Overview

The course covers the fundamentals of RCFA – where did it come from, and how does it fit with other aspects of Maintenance and Reliability.

Delegates will explore the advantages and disadvantages; learn when to use the technique and when not to use it. The core of the course is about dealing with how RCFA actually works, what are the prerequisites on which to build the success and how to increase the probability of success. Delegates will cover the RCFA process in all aspects – focusing on the practical application of the techniques. Delegates will also learn how to successfully implement RCFA in a business; what to do if the analysis does not seem to work and there is a repeat failure; how to keep their knowledge up-to-date by integrating feedback related to the latest equipment and process information.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • •

Use and application of RCFA to equipment and other forms of failure Advantages and disadvantages of RCFA Comparison to other forms of analysis such as Fault Tree, Cause and Effect A rigorous definition of the problem plus the preliminary assessment Data gathering – a critical step in capturing the knowledge on which the RCFA is based The analysis process – including exercises using fishbone and other techniques’ Categories of equipment failure Selecting the right remedy and relating it to the alternative maintenance work tactics Understanding work tactics Evaluating the costs and benefits of the remedies and tactics Preparation and content of the final report and recommendations

Who Should Attend?

• • • •

Reliability analysts and engineers, planners, schedulers and their supervisors and managers Engineers, inspectors, maintenance project specialists involved in failure analysis, failure prevention, preventive maintenance, planning and scheduling Senior technicians wishing to understand failure analysis and preventive maintenance Technical supervisors and managers responsible for delivery and quality of maintenance

2.

3.

Determine how Root Cause Failure Analysis (RCFA) gets to the bottom of expensive failures and apply RCFA in the workplace to reduce the cost of maintenance and the cost of failure Practice the techniques that make the application of RCFA significantly easier Understand how to keep the knowledge from going stale so the quality of the analysis and the results continue to pay dividends

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

For many, writing a good report may turn out to be an even more difficult task than conducting the technical assignment itself. This may be especially true for most Technicians, Engineers, Scientists and similar professionals. The consequence of an unclear report is information loss. The report submitted must be well structured in a logical, flowing manner to enable the information to be well understood by the reader.

This course is expected to lead delegates to effectively write reports that reflect the outcome from their technical assignments. We shall look into building a structured approach into our reports, without the undue stress this may bring. We attempt to mitigate the risk of breaking the communication link through poor reporting.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • •

Communication And Process Waste – What Is The Link?

Introduction To Technical Report Writing – The Goal: Your Audience Report Writing: Efficiency And Effectiveness – Where Do You Stand?

The Deming Cycle In Report Writing Developing The Report Layouts And Formats – Make It Flow!

Presentation Of Complex And Complicated Information – Does It Add Value?

Writing The Report Generating The Report How Should My Report Look?

Value And Quality – Not Quantity

Who Should Attend?

The target audience for this training course can be from different sectors and may include both anticipated authors as well as reviewers and readers of such reports: • Technicians and Engineers • Lab Officers/Technicians/Managers • R&D Technicians/Scientists • Technical Supervisors and Managers • Maintenance Technicians and Engineers • IT Specialists • Quality Technicians and Inspectors

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending 1.

(In association with The George Washington University)

Industrial

(In association with The George Washington University)

I A

1. Structure and compose sound technical reports that convey the message to the intended audience 2. Communicate effectively through the use of graphical means, avoiding ambiguity in interpretation of complex statements 3. Express the outcome of your research, analysis or findings in a clear manner – present concluding statements in written and spoken presentations

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

173

Industrial

Corrosion And Corrosion Control

Electrical Engineering

Course Overview

Course Overview

The objective of this course is to bridge the gap between the theoretical and practical knowledge of asset integrity management methodology and processes. You will understand the operational risks induced by the reservoir as a result of its dynamic changes and how these changes affect the risk identification process for pipelines and subsurface equipment.

Course Content

Course Content

Safety Moment • Origin And Production Of Oil & Gas • Corrosion Damage Corrosion Control Techniques • Material Change Cathodic Protection • Material Change • Barrier Film (Coatings And Lining) Chemical Treatment • Corrosion Problems Related To Design • Good Engineering And Corrosion Management • Developing A Plant Corrosion Map • Plant Failure Report Cost Of Corrosion • Corrosion Key Performance Indicators KPI’s • Corrosion And Corrosion Mitigation In Pipelines • Computer And Corrosion Management

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for industrial professionals engaged in corrosion and chemical treatments related activities and non-metallic material applications in pipelines, topside facilities and Downhole equipment: • All Production and Operation Personnel who are engaged in daily routine plant operations and have a defined business relation with the implementation of the corrosion and corrosion mitigation measures • Drilling and Petroleum Technology Engineers • Corrosion, Production Chemistry, Metallurgists and Integrity Engineers • Mechanical, Maintenance, Process and Pipelines Engineers

Benefits Of Attending

1. Enable solid understanding of the corrosion process, forms of corrosion and failure mechanisms 2. Understand inspection, monitoring, prediction and testing protocols to ensure that the corrosion damage mechanism and mitigation measures are implemented 3. Develop and improve your skills to revise your own corrosion control schemes and implementation plans

174

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

Electrical engineers need to be fully conversant with all the latest tools, techniques and knowledge to be able to design electrical systems and deal with typical electrical problems. This course is designed to assist those involved in the running and maintenance of the current electrical infrastructure, to be able to more efficiently and effectively handle the growth trends in the region.

I A

Fundamental electrical theory and problem solving Understanding electromagnetism Fault current calculations % Impedance Per unit system Key system components Typical electrical problems Protection design principles Earthing applications Protection grading and cable calculations using computer software SCADA UPS systems Batteries Electrical safety and implementation of safety rules Isolation of electrical systems Maintenance – background of the development of maintenance techniques Maintenance strategies and activities

Who Should Attend?

• • • • • • • •

Electrical Engineers System Operations Planners Heads of Operations Heads of Utilities Heads of Maintenance Heads of Planning Sections Network Engineers Quality Control Engineers

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the essential elements of successful electrical system design, including selection and specification of components with a practical awareness of the latest requirements of electrical safety rules 2. Position yourself at the vanguard of the industry with workable applications for UPS and SCADA systems, assessing the guidance on ratings, performance and configuration and explanations of circuit diagrams 3. Evaluate effective maintenance requirements for major components in electrical systems and appreciate the need for planned maintenance and maintenance management systems

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Foundation Certificate in Environmental Management

Course Overview

This course will give you a greater understanding of the emergency response planning process. It is ideal for middle to senior managers or new employees who may, in the course of their normal duties, be called upon to take up a position in their company’s emergency response organisation. Alternatively, the course would suit anyone within the company who wishes to understand the principles of emergency response as it applies to their industry.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Identify hazards Producing a framework for managing crisis Identifying and managing hazards Fires and explosions Total fire hazard management Natural disasters Organising for emergencies Route to successful emergency response The emergency organisation Emergency response teams Putting things together Emergency response exercises Crisis command and control Incident command hierarchy Incident command system principles Mobilisation and documentation Taking command Forward control tactics Emergency response centre Emergency response centre design Software for emergencies Incident investigation Hr issues and communications Mission bow tie diagrams

Course Overview

In this course, through practical examples and sharing experiences from successful organisations, you will learn the basic fundamentals of EMS, how to understand and measure the initial environmental performance, how to assess the environmental aspects and impacts of your organisations’ operations, products and services and how to set meaningful environmental performance indicators to monitor and measure your performance against the set environmental objectives and targets and how a simple but very effective P-D-C-A cycle can be used as a strong management tool to assist you to improve your environmental performance.

Industrial

Emergency Response Planning

Course Content • • • • • • •

Introduction & Terminology Environmental Aspects, Impacts & Risks Identification of Environmental Legal & Interested Parties Requirements Setting Environmental Policy, Objectives, Targets and Management Plans Environmental Operational Controls & Emergency Preparedness Session 6: Environmental Incidents & Accidents Environmental Auditing

Who Should Attend?

This course is ideal for either senior managers or new employees who may, in the course of their normal duties, be called upon to take up a position in their company’s emergency response organisation.

Alternatively, the course would suit anyone within the company who wishes to understand the principles of emergency response as it applies to industry.

Benefits Of Attending

Who Should Attend?

This course is ideal for either senior managers or new employees who may, in the course of their normal duties, be called upon to take up a position in their company’s emergency response organisation.

Alternatively, the course would suit anyone within the company who wishes to understand the principles of emergency response as it applies to industry.

1. Understand the impact your organisation has on the environment 2. Be able to incorporate environmental issues into the management of your organisation 3. Be updated on GCC environmental legislation and other requirements 4. Assess your organisation’s environmental performance

Benefits Of Attending

1. Know how to prepare, write and test emergency plans that are appropriate to the risk that your organisation is exposed to 2. Learn how to identify hazards and prepare a comprehensive hazard register 3. Establish an incident command system and ensure your communication lines between your team and external support groups are perfect

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I

E I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

175

HV Switchgear

Physical Asset Management (PAM)

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Industrial

(In association with Aston University) Course Overview

This highly technical course, in association with Aston University, will establish delegates’ understanding of electrical switchgear design, operation, maintenance and testing issues with a strong emphasis on safety procedures.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Switchgear design and performance General requirements Types of switchgear Switchgear ancillaries and operational requirements Auto reclosing LV switchgear Switchgear ancillaries Fixed and withdrawable pattern circuit breakers Safety policies Personnel issues Working in substations Switching schedules Safety systems Switchgear inspection and maintenance Switchgear asset management and HV maintenance Personal protective equipment (PPE) Oil testing Switchgear defects Substation ancillaries HV cable termination and joints Switchgear asset management

Course Overview

The objective of the course is to target managers, supervisors and senior technicians who wish to understand how the pieces of the maintenance puzzle can be fit together to provide an integrated whole. Delegates will learn how to make effective preventive and strategic replacement decisions, measure success through smart KPIs and determine the optimal frequency and depth required for inspection and monitoring. The course will explore how to define, predict and prevent asset and component failure, help you understand the benefits and pitfalls of CMMS/Enterprise Asset Management Systems and show you how to improve effectiveness through good work order management. The course will develop delegates’ skills in cost and financial management of maintenance.

Course Outline • • • • •

Introduction to reliability and best maintenance practices Achieving and managing reliability CMMS/EAM and effective work order management KPIs and maintenance performance measurement Risk and financial management in maintenance

Who Should Attend?

The ideal candidate for this course is an engineer, manager of plant operations, facility manager or maintenance professional who is responsible for maintaining and managing physical equipment and assets. He or she typically represents facilities and plants from industries such as power generation and distribution, oil and gas, utilities, metals processing, fertiliser and cement, continuous processing and batch manufacturing and large sophisticated facilities.

Who Should Attend?

This highly beneficial training course is especially designed for electrical engineers, technicians, estate service managers and utility maintenance managers, supervisors, operational engineers including (senior) authorised personnel and electrical section heads. Network managers, technologists and other qualified engineering personnel will also benefit. It is also beneficial for professionals responsible for, or working with HV switchgear and also those seeking to refresh and update their knowledge in this critical area.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Learn the key strengths and weaknesses of different maintenance tactics Learn how to measure performance using KPIs and the Balanced Scorecard and develop methods of increasing the value of your CMMS/EAM Explore the practical steps in financial management of maintenance and discuss, calculate and manage risk in Reliability

Benefits Of Attending

1. Discover the latest and best maintenance and operation practices for the various types of switchgear available and in service today 2. Appreciate the differences between disconnectors, ring main units, contractors, fuse switches, circuit breakers and how they are utilised in electricity networks 3. Enhance and update your engineering skills

176

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I

I

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

This masterclass will focus on how to make RCM an effective and living tool. You will cover the fundamentals thoroughly and practice the key steps in exercises. The core of the course will be a review of what RCM is and the process necessary to put it into place. You will concentrate on understanding and managing these tools, defining how to bring financial returns to your organisation, and how to avoid the problem areas.

Course Outline

• • • • • • • • • •

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) 24 hours Intermediate level

Course Overview

• •

Total Productive Maintenance (TPM)

Defining and measuring reliability Identifying critical equipment and selecting target equipment for RCM Determining primary, secondary and protective functions Ensure a complete analysis of equipment failures Selecting tasks and schedules Analysis and feedback Implementing RCM RCM and KPIs Maintenance tactics Identifying and evaluating the costs of failure Value in maintenance From Reliability to Living Reliability

Who Should Attend?

Course Overview

TPM originated in the Japanese manufacturing industry and was one of the principle reasons for the rise of the Japanese Automotive industry. It is based on the implementation of basic but important and logical methods using teamwork as a core discipline. This course looks closely at the advantages and disadvantages of TPM, with a focus on the practicalities of implementation. The focus will be on how to make TPM an effective and living tool. Delegates will cover the fundamentals thoroughly by practicing the key steps in workshop exercises. The process and benefits of TPM will be addressed in depth, as well as its pitfalls and requirements. Delegates will concentrate on understanding and managing this technique, defining how to bring the significant returns to the organisations which implement them, and how to avoid the problem areas.

Course Outline • • • • • • •

Managers, Directors, Heads, Superintendents, Supervisors, Engineers, Senior Analysts, Specialists, Senior Technicians, Contractors and Subcontractors in: • Maintenance, Preventive Maintenance, Breakdown Maintenance • Inspections, Condition Monitoring and Maintenance Performance Management • Plant, Operations, Manufacturing, Production and Facilities • Mechanical, Electrical, Utilities, Civil Engineering • Planning, Scheduling and Quality Control • Equipment, System and Asset Management • Reliability, Failure Management and Failure Prevention • Maintenance and Technical Support • Warehouse, Spare Parts and Materials • Tools and Tool Cribs

• • •

Benefits Of Attending

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

Learn and practice the fundamentals of RCM and gain practical exposure to this important maintenance technique Identify the pitfalls of RCM and develop strategies to avoid them Understand the process of planning and implementing RCM, and integrating it with Enterprise Asset Management (EAM) and Computerised Maintenance Management Software (CMMS)

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I

Industrial

Reliability Centred Maintenance (RCM)

Introduction – Why TPM Core principles and practices of TPM Implementing TPM TPM phases The key steps in developing and implementing TPM Seven practical steps to get us going Typical TPM implementation problems – recognising, resolving and avoiding them Expected results Time frames Putting together a persuasive case – measuring the costs and benefits

Who Should Attend?

Managers, Supervisors, Engineers, Senior Analysts, Specialists and Senior Technicians involved in TPM implementation and practice.

TPM teams typically include operations, maintenance, engineering and technical services, reliability, planning, QA, inspection, spares management, procurement and utilities.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

Learn and practice the fundamentals of TPM and understand the process of planning and implementing TPM Identify the pitfalls of TPM and develop strategies to avoid them Understand how to keep TPM fresh, effective and current and see how to integrate TPM with EAM/CMMS

I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

177

G E L

L A

LEGAL

Table Of Contents

Certificate In Due Diligence (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)________________________________________ 182 Common Law For UAE Lawyers______________________________________________________________________________________ 183 Contract Drafting For Non-Lawyers___________________________________________________________________________________ 183

Legal

Advanced Contract Drafting For Non-Lawyers _________________________________________________________________________ 182

Current Trends in Immigration And Labour Law in Qatar_________________________________________________________________ 184 Current Trends in Labour And Employment Law In UAE__________________________________________________________________ 184 Effective Legal Writing For Non-Lawyers ______________________________________________________________________________ 185 Finance And Accounting For Lawyers ________________________________________________________________________________ 185 Immigration And Labour Law in Bahrain ______________________________________________________________________________ 186 Labour And Employment Law In Saudi Arabia _________________________________________________________________________ 186 Legal Aspects Of Doing Business In The Middle East_____________________________________________________________________ 187 Litigation And Dispute Resolution In The UAE __________________________________________________________________________ 187 Tender Preparation And Evaluation___________________________________________________________________________________ 188 Understanding Commercial Law In Bahrain ____________________________________________________________________________ 188 Understanding Commercial Law In The UAE (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)___________________________ 189

181

Legal

Advanced Contract Drafting For NonLawyers Course Overview

This informative course is designed for managers who need to negotiate contracts, terms and discounts with outside suppliers of goods and services or manage contractor performance. The course will be taught in an interactive workshop/seminar format. It will be a hands-on course. Delegates will be expected to review on their own time after class materials provided by the trainer so that they can come to class prepared. Delegates will also be asked to provide draft contracts to be reviewed in class by the group.

It will also guide you through a step by step process to understand, draft and negotiate a successful contract and at the same time ensure that the interests of your organisation are well protected and also to strengthen your expertise to build sound contractual relationships.

The course format will entail team review and comment on the class materials

Certificate In Due Diligence

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course One: Financial And Commercial Due Diligence Course Overview

Course One will provide you with an understanding of the concepts and practices of Due Diligence. Due Diligence is critical for a whole range of corporate finance transactions: acquisitions, disposals and investments in companies. Each element of Due Diligence will be separately reviewed, looking at both the progress of the process and the different organisations involved.

Course Content • • • • •

When is Due Diligence required?

The phases of Due Diligence Sell Side Due Diligence Due Diligence in public offerings and private offerings Review of important judicial interpretations of Due Diligence

Course Two: Legal Due Diligence Course Overview

Course Content

Framework for sound contractual relationships Review, understand and negotiate effective contracts Hands-on collective review, mark-up and correction of draft contracts

• • •

Course Content

Who Should Attend?

This informative brand new course is designed for managers who need to negotiate contracts, terms and conditions with customers, vendors or suppliers of goods and services, or who frequently enter into management, licensing or joint venture relationships. This will include purchasing, sales or marketing managers, and supervisors and staff with moderate experience in contracts, negotiation or purchasing.

It will also be of benefit to those who have previously taken Contract Drafting for Non-Lawyers and who wish to enhance their experience with an advanced-level course.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

182

Understand the meaning and significance of common contract clauses Recognise the impact of different legal systems on contract drafting and interpretation Identify essential contract clauses, terms and conditions

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

This course covers legal issues specific to the Middle East. You will understand the essential tools you need to control even the most complex of deals, and will also gain first-hand insight into key issues in legal matters including acquisitions and financing, ownership of assets and pending and threatened litigations.

A

• • • • •

What is legal Due Diligence Transactions commonly involving Due Diligence Due Diligence tasks Sources of Due Diligence data Due Diligence processes

Who Should Attend?

These courses have been designed for those working within finance, investment and legal departments of medium to large corporates who are entrusted with the task of Due Diligence and reorganisation and wish to consolidate their knowledge to make intelligent and successful investment decisions and transactions.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Identify and overcome the most common Due Diligence pitfalls by advising the board of directors on the risks and opportunities of a contemplated transaction 2. Appraise the quality and reliability of information for effective decision making 3. Identify and verify worthwhile investment opportunities

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Contract Drafting For Non-Lawyers

Course Overview

Course Overview

In this course you will be introduced to the common law system; will learn the key structural differences between the common law system and other legal systems including the civil law system that prevails in continental Europe and the Arabic-speaking countries; and will learn about key common principles of contract law, tort law and evidence law.

Course Content • • • • • • •

Introduction – Overview of the common Law Distinguish the “Common law” from other legal systems Sources and methods of the common law The DIFC Court Common law principles of contract law Common law principles of tort law Common law principles of evidence law

Who Should Attend?

This course has been specially designed for corporate in-house lawyers, solicitors and partners from law firms and legal practices as well as professionals with the following titles: Lawyers, Senior Lawyers, Solicitors, Senior Solicitors, Attorneys, Legal Counsels and Counsellors, Advocates, Arbitrators, Notaries, Legal Advisors, Consultants and Partners in fields including: mergers and acquisitions, commercial law, real estate and construction law, employment law and tax law as well as tax advisors.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Learn what the “Common law” is and how it differs from other legal systems 2. Understand how a common law court differs from a UAE Court 3. Identify the role of the DIFC Court in the UAE legal system

As the business world gets more complex, ensuring smooth and uninterrupted operations coupled with long-term relationships with all parties is extremely critical. Contracts are now considered vital as they not only instill high levels of confidence in the organisation one deals with, but also save the time and effort one might face in dealing with unpredictable concerns and arguments. This course will guide you through a step by step process to understand, draft and negotiate a successful contract and at the same time ensure that the interests of your organisation are well protected. You also will strengthen your expertise to build sound contractual relationships.

Legal

Common Law For UAE Lawyers

Course Content • • • • • • • •

Backdrop to contracts: overview of the legal system General principles of contract drafting Taking the mystery out of contracts: specific parts of the contract and what they mean Focus on important clauses Types of contracts and special considerations Standard terms and conditions E-commerce Model and template contracts

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for managers who need to negotiate contracts, terms and discounts with outside suppliers of goods and services or manage contractor performance. This will include purchasing, sales or marketing managers, and supervisors and staff taking up such appointments for the first time. It will also be of benefit to those who have had little formal training in contracts, purchasing and negotiation and who wish to consolidate their experience.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the meaning and significance of common contract clauses by identifying essential contract clauses, terms and conditions 2. Learn to establish the right framework for sound contractual relationships 3. Achieve the confidence and skills to properly review, understand and negotiate effective contracts

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I A

I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

183

Legal

Current Trends In Labour And Employment Law In Qatar

Current Trends In Labour And Employment Law In The UAE

Course Overview

Course Overview

Current Trends In Labour And Employment Law In Qatar has been developed for all those working within the Qatar industry sectors who want a recap of the Qatar labour laws; or want to gain a better understanding of Qatar labour laws and current practices; and for anyone who is new to the region or to an HR role. It has been designed for those who want an update on the regulatory trends and an insight of how to address issues that often arise in the employment context, in the new economic landscape in Qatar

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • •

Overview of the key employment / labour legislation and the sponsorship/ immigration systems in Qatar and in the Qatar Financial Centre (QFC) Applicability of the labour law, Human Resources law, and QFC employment Regulations 2005 Employment and the nature of sponsorship Employee benefits Issues for companies (Discrimination/data protection/repatriation/ health and life insurance/exit visas) Employer civil and criminal liability for employees End of employment Resignation by employee Termination Protecting the company Employment disputes

Who Should Attend?

This course will be highly beneficial for those working as company secretaries and legal heads that have had minimal formal training in labour law and wish to consolidate their experience in the region. In addition it would also benefit in-house counsel and lawyers who have recently been transferred to this region.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the significance of local and international employment contracts 2. Identify the implications of terminating an employee and know which employee entitlements are discretionary for employers.

Successfully be able to calculate end of services gratuities 3. Gain an understanding of the statutory provisions relating to immigration and sponsorship

184

12 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I

This course has been developed for HR professionals within the UAE industry sectors who want a recap of the UAE labour laws; or want a better understanding of UAE labour laws and current practices; and for anyone who is new to the region or to an HR role. It has been designed for those who want an update on the regulatory trends and an insight of how to address issues that often arise in the employment context.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Overview, recruitment and in-term issues Employment contracts Emiratisation and the recruitment of host country national employees Employee benefits during the term of employment Holding employee passports Health and safety obligations Employee resignation and termination Notice periods and garden leave Employee entitlements upon termination Employment disputes The Ministry of Labour processes Labour and employment disputes in the local courts Protecting employer data and confidential information

Who Should Attend?

This course has been developed for all HR professionals within the UAE industry sector. It would also be highly beneficial for those working as company secretaries, legal heads who have had minimal formal training in labour law and wish to consolidate their experience in the region. In addition it would also benefit In-House Counsel, lawyers who recently have been transferred to the UAE.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand key principles of the labour laws of the UAE and the regulatory and enforcement trends at the Ministry of Labour 2. Manage the legal requirements organisations have to fulfil in relation to salaries, leave and other benefits 3. Identify the special considerations involving terminations/ redundancies of senior professionals and end of service benefits including severance pay/gratuity and other benefits

E I

12 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Effective Legal Writing For Non-Lawyers

Finance And Accounting For Lawyers

In this course, delegates will learn how to decipher legal jargon, how and when to use or avoid legal jargon in their own writing, how to recognize and better understand legal documents written by others, and how to enhance their own legal writing skills through techniques that result in clearer and more effective writing.

Course Content

The goal of the course is to provide financial and accounting language to legal practitioners who would in turn be able to understand, communicate, structure, and document a variety of transactions and concepts.

The materials encompass a range of financial topics and try to intermix the legal concepts or concerns that may be related to the topics. The lectures will be interactive and there is a general aim to employ one financial case for the class to read, comment, and work on.

Legal

Course Overview

Course Overview

Introduction to legal writing Understanding legal writing: how non-lawyers can become better consumers of documents written by lawyers Course Content • How non-lawyers can become better legal writers • Fundamentals Of Financial Accounting • Interest Rates • Fundamentals Of Finance Who Should Attend?

• Time Adjustment • Professionals who are responsible for drafting or editing • Risk Adjustment documents that have legal implications • Modern Portfolio Theory • People who want hands-on training in improving their skills in • Corporate Finance Three Fundamental Topics drafting/editing contracts: • Case Assignment: Marriott And Cost Of Capital • Contract officers and managers • Option Structures • Valuation Methods Benefits Of Attending • Profits, Economic Rents, And The Law 1. Improve your understanding of the legal documents you • Case Assignment: Netscape – Going Public encounter in your workplace • Case Assignment: MCI – 1983 2. Enhance your writing confidence by using practical techniques to • Special Finance Topics improve the clarity of your legal writing 3. Learn how to distinguish between the different types of legal Who Should Attend? writing sent to you by lawyers including analytical writing and This course has been specially designed for corporate in-house persuasive writing lawyers, solicitors and partners from law firms and legal practices as well as professionals with the following titles: Lawyers, Senior Lawyers, Solicitors, Senior Solicitors, Attorneys, Legal Counsels and Counsellors, Advocates, Arbitrators, Notaries, Legal Advisors, Consultants and Partners in fields including: mergers and acquisitions, commercial law, real estate and construction law, employment law and tax law as well as tax advisors.

• •

Benefits Of Attending

1. Enhance your financial knowledge and understanding to enable you to better and more productively interact with accountants and clients 2. Gain a thorough understanding of corporate finance theory and practice from a financial perspective 3. Discover how to identify and value a potential target acquisition

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

185

Legal

Immigration And Labour Law In Bahrain

Labour And Employment Law In Saudi Arabia

Course Overview

Course Overview

This two day course will provide delegates a solid understanding of existing and newly issued labour regulation in Bahrain. By attending this course, delegates will learn the framework and best practices for labour law compliance and the methods to minimize potential liability arising from employee terminations.

This two day course will provide the delegates with a solid knowledge of KSA labour law and an employer’s obligation towards employees.

As a result of attending the course, delegates will learn the framework for employing and terminating employees as well as the potential liability arising out of termination.

Course Content

Course Content

• • • • •

Overview Of Bahrain Labour Regulations 2012 Labour Law (A comparative study) Employee mobility Lawful termination Employment disputes

Who Should Attend?

This course would be highly beneficial for HR professionals responsible for their employees in the Kingdom of Bahrain and offshore entities seeking to establish or expand their presence in Bahrain. Corporate executives and in-house counsel should view this course as an opportunity to understand the implications of the 2012 Bahrain Labour Law which may require an update to their company’s model for recruitment, development and allocation of human capital.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Gain an overview of the 2012 Kingdom of Bahrain Labour Law through comparative analysis 2. Understand employee mobility rights and how they can affect your business 3. Manage lawful termination of the employment relationship

• • • • • • • • • • •

Registering as an employer Immigration considerations Recruitment- Nitiquat and Hafiz system Termination of employment Social security Employment disputes Resignation Visa cancellation Saudisation Company policies All kinds of leaves

Who Should Attend?

This course will be highly beneficial for those working in the HR role as well as company secretaries and legal heads that have had minimal formal training in labour law and wish to consolidate their experience in the region.

In addition it would also benefit in-house counsel and lawyers who have recently been transferred to the KSA region

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

186

12 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E

Understand the labour and immigration framework in KSA Manage and fulfil the requirements to hire KSA nationals Learn the process for effecting lawful termination of employment

E I A

12 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Litigation And Dispute Resolution In The UAE

Course Overview

Course Overview

There are many preconceptions and stereotypes of the Middle East The global economic meltdown has reached these shores. This has that may obscure your understanding of your counterparts’ true values, unfortunately dramatically increased the number of disputes in the attitudes or motivations. region. If the laws and procedures that govern disputes are unclear and unpredictable, it can be quite a complicated situation to deal with.

Doing business in the Middle East’ has been designed to help you prepare for your dealings in the region and will provide you with the Informa’s Dispute Resolution In The UAE course will equip you with necessary knowledge to ensure your success in these countries and appropriate solutions to handle corporate disputes. It will provide combines in-depth background information with hands-on practical the right techniques that you would need in your work place and will legal advice. This course will provide you opportunities to discuss guide you through a process to understand the full range of legal potential issues involved in establishing business in the Middle East. issues related to disputes. Having mapped the course content directly to the stated course objectives, we are confident that you will leave this course with comprehensive insights and a balanced perspective.

Course Content Economic systems of the Middle East Language and culture Cultural differences Market entry Barriers to entry Foreign investment issues Free zones Political risk Focus on specific regulatory areas Entity selection; company formation and set-up Labour and employment regulation in the Middle East Dispute resolution in the Middle East

• • • • • • • • • • • •

Course Content • • • • • • • •

Senior managers and owners of SMEs (small-to-medium sized enterprises) In-house lawyers In each instance, professionals from companies interested in expanding their company’s operations to the UAE and broader Middle East region

• •

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

The role and purpose of a formal dispute resolution process Practical exercises in dispute resolution Dispute resolution concepts in the UAE and elsewhere Important litigation concepts in the UAE legal system Important concepts in the Anglo-American legal system Introduction to arbitration Introduction to conciliation and mediation Other dispute resolution concepts

Who Should Attend?

Who Should Attend?

•

Legal

Legal Aspects Of Doing Business In The Middle East

This course will highly benefit professionals from the real estate, project management, construction, trading, supply chain and logistics sectors with the responsibility for their organisations’ exposure under disputes. While this may include in-house counsel and legal advisors, it also includes senior managers and decision makers responsible for the practical and operational management of contractual relationships and the disputes that may arise from them. It will be useful to those who negotiate contracts, terms and discounts with outside suppliers of goods and services or manage contractor performance.

Benefits Of Attending

Understand the framework for business culture in the Middle East 1. Develop strategies for resolving disputes without resorting to Be able to appreciate and do an analysis of cultural values and costly litigation behaviours prevalent in the Middle East 2. Explore the technical details of dispute resolution and advanced Implement practical strategies for working more effectively with negotiation counterparts in the Middle East 3. Understand the international and regional legal structures for dispute resolution

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I

E I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

187

Tender Preparation And Evaluation

Legal

Course Overview

Wrong tenders can result in buying the wrong service or product at the wrong price – and that can seriously harm the health of the customer organisation. The Tender Preparation And Evaluation course will help you avoid mistakes in tenders, show best practice and create winning tenders.

The course demystifies the process and provides guidance to developing truly effective tenders that make for better vendor evaluation and selection and facilitate ongoing contract management.

It is designed to teach you the best techniques for successful service procurement. The focus will be on selecting the right supplier for the right reasons and get the right deal in order to maximise business leverage from your tenders.

Course Content

Planning the procurement lifecycle Planning the tender stages – what to do before you go to market Identifying and developing the skills needed for a successful tender exercise Targeting and profiling the service Developing cost and service profiles and base-lining Drafting the tender document or market package Tender documents: the devil is in the detail Designing optimal evaluation criteria Managing exposure: effective risk management Facilitating the best responses to the tender Applying due diligence to ensure viability of the supplier, the bid and the contract Conditions, specifications and service level agreements Post-tender activities Debriefing the losing tenderers

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Understanding Commercial Law In Bahrain Course Overview

This course would be highly beneficial for business owners and managers in the Kingdom of Bahrain and offshore entities seeking to establish or expand their presence in Bahrain. The course will help you successfully protect your business venture through proper corporate structuring and legal advice.

Course Outline • • • • • • • •

Who Should Attend?

This course is for business owners and managers in the Kingdom of Bahrain and offshore entities seeking to establish or expand their presence in Bahrain. Corporate executives and in-house counsel should view this course as an opportunity to understand the structuring ideas to increase efficiency of operations while decreasing costs and liability risks.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for managers, coordinators, supervisors, engineers, assistants, officers and administrators responsible for tenders, contracts, procurement, purchasing, supply, projects/project management, planning, operations, construction, technical support.

Overview of the legal system in Bahrain – rule of law, basic themes, major legal concepts Major legislation and treaties Constitution of 2002 The Bahrain court system Principles of contract law Principles of employment law Principles of property law Doing business in Bahrain: structuring, company formation, commercial agency

Explore the Bahrain legal system in relation to commercial endeavors, labour law and property Understand key concepts in forming contracts and doing business in Bahrain Manage employment of citizens and expatriates to build your business

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

188

Discover essential service procurement and/or tendering tools and techniques Maximise business leverage from tenders Become an asset to the tender presentation/selection team of your organisation

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I

I

18 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Understanding Commercial Law In The UAE

Legal

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

Working within the legal department of a company can be very challenging in the current economic climate. Understanding Commercial Law In The UAE will help you gain a full understanding of the laws that affect your business. This course will help you be better equipped to handle the unforeseen situations that you could confront in your work place.

Course Content

Major federal statutes in the UAE Different views on contracts and key contract issues Principles of labour and employment law The UAE labour law Principles of property law Property ownership: the elements of the right of ownership Evolution of property law in the UAE Current property law issues in the UAE Property rights under the civil code Doing business revisited: entity selection, company formation and set-up, agencies, distributorships and franchises Formation under the companies law Formation in the various free zones Doing business through entities/presences and the licensing requirements Doing business through agents, representatives, distributors or franchisees

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for those working within legal departments.

It would also be highly beneficial for those working as company secretaries, legal heads of government offices and medium to large corporates who have had minimal formal training in commercial law and wish to consolidate their experience in the region. In addition it would also benefit in-house counsel, lawyers who recently have been transferred to the UAE.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Explore the similarities and differences between the UAE legal system and other legal systems Comprehend key concepts in UAE company and contract law Gain an overview of property and labour law in the UAE

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I

189 Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

, G N I R T P E d K n R a A M LES SA

MARKETING, SALES and PR

Certificate In Key Account Management (In Association with Institute of Sales & Marketing and Management (ISMM)) ____________________________ 194 Certificate In Public Relations Practice (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) _______________________________ 194 Certificate In Sales Management (In Association with Institute of Sales & Marketing and Management (ISMM)) __________________________________ 195 Certified Brand Manager (Certified by the Association of International Product Marketing and Management (AIPMM)) _______________________________ 195 Certified Networker ______________________________________________________________________________________________ 196 Certified Product Manager (Certified by the Association of International Product Marketing and Management (AIPMM)) _____________________________ 196 Certified Product Marketing Manager (Certified by the Association of International Product Marketing and Management (AIPMM)) ____________________ 197 Channel Management ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 197 Developing And Implementing A Social Media Strategy _________________________________________________________________ 198 Developing And Managing Marketing Teams _________________________________________________________________________ 198 Digital Marketing ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 199 Effective Marketing Executive ______________________________________________________________________________________ 199

Marketing, Sales & PR

Table Of Contents

ILM Endorsed Sales Management Programme (In association with Institute of Leadership and Management (ILM)) _____________________________ 200 Measuring ROI For Social Media ____________________________________________________________________________________ 200 Planning And Running Successful PR Campaigns ______________________________________________________________________ 201 Social Customer Service Development _______________________________________________________________________________ 201 Social Media Marketing Masterclass _________________________________________________________________________________ 202 Strategic Email Marketing _________________________________________________________________________________________ 202 Strategic Marketing For Decision Makers _____________________________________________________________________________ 203 Successful Product Launching And Brand Positioning (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) __________________ 203

193

Marketing, Sales & PR

Certificate In Key Account Management

Certificate In Public Relations Practice

Course Overview

Course Overview

Course Outline

Course Content

(In Association with Institute of Sales & Marketing and Management (ISMM))

This internationally recognised course, endorsed by the UK based ISMM, provides delegates with the strategies and skills needed to ensure that key account relationships are nurtured into highly valued partnerships. Delegates will use best practice principles to complete the individual assessments, account audits and account plans needed to maximise opportunities and to protect your key accounts from competitor attack.

• • • • • • • • • • • •

Determining the fundamentals of key account management Understanding key account relationships Profiling effective key account managers Developing a key account strategy Key account strategies – retention Key account strategies – acquisition Key account strategies – growth Account planning tools Practical planning session Relationship based communication Planning to influence Managing customer expectations

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

This course will take you step-by-step through the proven best approach to Public Relations (PR) planning and management. By following these guidelines, PR professionals will achieve results that can be measured and reported back to top management while directly enhancing the organisation’s reputation. This course provides a platform for all PR professionals who are looking for a bigger challenge and even better performance. You will be shown how the fundamentals of PR are vital and skilful diplomatic handling will help you understand reputation and relationships.

• • • • • • • • • •

Who Should Attend?

•

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for: • Existing account managers • Directors and managers responsible for introducing or implementing key account strategies • Senior sales staff and sales staff being trained to take on a key account management role • Customer focused managers from other departments who have responsibility for interfacing with customers as part of an account management team

Benefits Of Attending

1. Appreciate the importance of your key account management role and assess your understanding of the key accounts that you manage 2. Explore the concepts behind the Key Account Matrix and developing key account strategies 3. Complete business relationship audits for your own accounts and develop your key account plans 4. Develop acquisition, growth and retention strategies

•

•

• • • • •

•

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I

This course covers some fundamental factors and the basic planning processes; it also covers ground that few PR professionals at even the highest levels follow. Therefore, it will be suitable for those at senior levels looking for fresh approaches or wanting to add extra polish to their capabilities.

This course would also be right for younger or less experienced executives with the ambition to get ahead quickly in the business.

This might be particularly true of assistant or junior professionals where their boss would like to see them take on greater responsibilities.

As this course is focused on logical and proven management approaches, it would be ideal for an executive of any age moving in from another discipline to take up or manage Public Relations after attending this course.

Benefits Of Attending

•

194

Essential elements for a successful PR programme Key aims of a PR programme Strong foundations for the planning process The PR plan and top management support Research and evaluation Integrating your management plan across all PR activities Understanding and managing risk Writing a compelling plan Essential skills to manage PR plans Identifying and measuring your performance: Campaign skills

Research the perceptions, ambitions and objectives of management Convert researched management aims and objectives into achievable PR actions Write a compelling plan, evaluate strategic outcomes and present your proposals Report back on performance and improve using results to shape future activities Win support and confidence of key managers across all levels of the organisation Integrate divisional needs and activities into the broader corporate PR programme Evaluate the options, plan manage and run a powerful PR programme

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Certified Brand Manager

Course Overview

Course Overview

(In Association with Institute of Sales & Marketing and Management (ISMM))

(Certified by the Association of International Product Marketing and Management (AIPMM))

By the end of the course you will have the confidence to take on one of the most demanding of management roles: Structure and lead successful sales teams

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

The foundations of modern sales management Understanding and adapting your management style Transactional and transformational leadership Measuring and managing high impact sales activities The 8 habits of failed sales managers Creating high performance sales teams Setting motivational sales targets and high impact sales Role based compensation and commission schemes Running productive sales meetings Accurate sales forecasting 7 stages of effective delegation The key principals of motivating individuals and teams Using field accompaniment to improve performance Taking corrective action Conducting effective counselling and appraisal Team & individual development The GROW model of coaching Recruiting and keeping top performers

Who Should Attend?

• • • • •

Sales Managers/Directors/Team Leaders Marketing Managers / Directors Key Account Managers/Sales Negotiators/Telesales Managers/ Supervisor Business Development Managers Sales/Marketing Consultants/Channel Managers

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand how to recruit, motivate and manage your sales team in today’s challenging environment 2. Learn how to tailor reward and incentive packages to maximise profitability and meet corporate objectives 3. Explore a range of sales management tools including sales forecasting, CRM and PRM strategies

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I

Certified Brand Manager covers the roles and responsibilities of brand management, the key organisational interfaces, and the use of the classical marketing “Ps” to strengthen your brand. You will explore the different levels of your brand (e.g., elements, attributes, personality and core values), and how each plays an important role in developing and maintaining strong relationships with your customers. The course will provide insights into achieving the ultimate payoff by maximising brand equity and brand value.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Benefits of the brand to the brand-holder and the customer Trends in the relationship between customers and brands How brand management fits into the company The key organisational interfaces The components of the brand identity Core values Brand personality, attributes and elements Positioning your brand The marketing Ps and how each influences the brand/customer relationship Customer touch points and the customer journey Integrated marketing communications Measuring and optimizing brand equity Brand architecture and the brand portfolio Developing and maintaining the brand

Marketing, Sales & PR

Certificate In Sales Management

Who Should Attend?

• • • •

Brand managers and those responsible for managing the function Marketing managers Product managers, product marketing managers and others responsible for marketing products Business managers and others wanting to become more knowledgeable about the role of their brand

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the role of brand management and its relationship to functional marketing, product management and other key functions 2. Strengthen your brand to develop and maintain deeper, longer lasting relationships with your customers 3. Increase your effectiveness as a brand manager and receive the industry certification, “Certified Brand Manager” from AIPMM

I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

195

Certified Networker

Certified Product Manager

Marketing, Sales & PR

Course Overview

Many businesses record between 40 and 100% of new business acquisition through referral and word of mouth. But only 3% of these businesses have any proven system to increase this incredible and underutilised resource. Worryingly, this means that between 40 -100% of your business is coming by chance. This course will enable you to replace “chance” with a tried and tested system for developing new business.

The program’s customised curriculum is designed to provide business professionals with tips, tools and techniques to help you become more effective and productive business networkers. In addition, all delegates leave the program with your own customised referral-based marketing business plan.

The Certified Networker is taught in a series of 12 interactive modules designed to give delegates a complete overview of the referral marketing process along with requisite skills and a plan that insures success.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • •

Finding Your Starting Point Identifying Your Networks And Using The VCP PROCESS® The 10 Commandments Of Networking A Mixer Making Introductions that last Creating And Delivering An Effective Presentation Tools and Techniques for enhancing your business image Contact Spheres, Hub Firms, Mining A Vein And Seven Different Types Of Business Organisations The GAINS Profile And 15 Ways To Promote 18 Tactics To Motivate Your Referral Partners Training Your Referral Partners Evaluating Your Effectiveness, “it’s all my fault” Generating Referrals For Life®

Who Should Attend?

(Certified by the Association of International Product Marketing and Management (AIPMM)) Course Overview

Product management refers to the function that champions new products throughout the front end of the product lifecycle – from inception to launch. At this course delegates will discover best practices in product management that they can apply to improve the success rate of their products.

Course Content • • • • • • • • •

Understanding products and services Gathering market intelligence Product positioning The product lifecycle The special challenges in developing ‘services’ The value chain Pricing Preparing for the launch Product management tools

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for anyone involved in the product management function: working with internal resources to ensure successful product/service definition, design, development and launch.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand best practice in product management and how to apply it in your organisation 2. Manage the front end of the product lifecycle more effectively 3. Develop a more robust strategy for management of your product line

The Certified Networker is ideal for sales professionals, business development managers, business owners, and CEOs who have grown weary of time and cost-intensive lead acquisition and cold calling, expensive marketing and advertising and are looking for a powerful competitive edge.

Benefits of Attending

1. Acquire networking skills that will increase results by 300% 2. Develop your own referral marketing plan that will help you and your team get more sales in less time 3. Utilise social media, Public Relations and the Media to your advantage for FREE 4. Reduce your marketing spend and increase your revenue 5. Identify your top relationships that will send you regular, quality business5

196

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I

E I

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(Certified by the Association of International Product Marketing and Management (AIPMM)) Course Overview

Product marketing refers to the function of ensuring the success of the product in the marketplace. It starts with a successful launch and continues as the product moves through its lifecycle. This course will discuss best practice in product marketing to improve the success rate of your products.

Course Content • • • • • • • •

Channel Management Course Overview

Selecting the most appropriate distribution channels and motivating channel partners are key factors in selling profitably through third parties. It is essential for any organisation involved in the selection and management of channel partners to be able to build and manage effective working relationships that build trust, add value and avoid conflict

Course Outline • • • •

Branding The product lifecycle Strategic planning and the marketing strategy The marketing process and the marketing mix Market segmentation Consumer and business buying behaviour Distribution and logistics Pricing

• • • •

Identify the needs of channel members and customers Understand how the relationship should be managed with channel partners Recognise the benefits and pitfalls of a multi-channel strategy Identification of selection criteria for potential channel partners and applying weightings according to importance Motivate the channel partner, both the organisation and staff Evaluate and manage your channel partners Assess the performance criteria for channel partners Develop and agree an account plan with major partners outlining requirements, responsibilities and objectives

Who Should Attend?

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for anyone involved in the product marketing function, working with internal and external resources to launch the product and ensure its success in the marketplace.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand best practice in product marketing and how to apply it in your organisation 2. Manage the commercialisation phase of the product lifecycle more effectively 3. Develop a more robust strategy for management of your product line

Marketing, Sales & PR

Certified Product Marketing Manager

Managers and staff involved in the selection, motivation, evaluation and management of channel partners This could include: • Senior Sales Staff • National and Regional Sales Managers • Channel Managers, direct salespeople with channel responsibility • Distribution Managers • Senior Sales and Marketing Managers • Product Managers • Business Unit Managers • Operations Managers • Business Development Managers • Major and Global Account Managers • Key Account Managers • Project Managers • Communications Managers • Brand Managers

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I

Your channel teams will have a detailed template to select the most appropriate channel partners Increase sales and build customer loyalty by better managing the relationships, processes and practices in the sales/distribution channel Build partnerships and get more co-operation from channel partners to achieve higher customer service standards Using the latest management thinking, and developing a structured channel marketing plan, Organisations will begin to see an increase in sales, margin and co-operation from channel partners

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

197

Marketing, Sales & PR

Developing And Implementing A Social Media Strategy Course Overview

The course will share the marketing strategies that will help your business grow dramatically using social media. You will explore selling to the new generation of online buyers and the importance of aligning your content, social media and online technology to your sales and marketing strategy.

Learn new ways to promote and brand your business online using social media. You will use new, low-cost strategies for boosting your business with the minimum of effort and at the minimum of risk. Learn the power of the big four: YouTube, LinkedIn, Facebook and Twitter, and where and how they fit into your marketing strategy.

Assess your website and discover how to own the first page of Google for your chosen phrase. The course also includes practical video strategies where you will be involved in creating videos and getting instant views from YouTube.

Course Outline • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Your online strategy Search engines Google Your website Blogs YouTube Videos Success with videos on YouTube Audio-video communication LinkedIn Twitter Facebook Other social media

Developing And Managing Marketing Teams Course Overview

This course provides insight into the online business, social networking, collaboration, portal technology and content management for implementing your business strategy on the web.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • •

Business plan Essential elements of portals Web value chain versus traditional commerce value chain Branding Virtual communities Requirements Defining and designing your portal Researching customers Running marketing campaigns and tracking performance Architecture Governance

Who Should Attend?

This course has been designed for managers and executives in government and corporates who need to acquire a high competency in portal solutions, development and content management tools, processes and governance. It is also relevant for web and IT professionals associated with e-business, collaboration and content management initiatives.

Benefits Of Attending

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for anyone involved in marketing or responsible for the online strategy for their business. It is particularly relevant to entrepreneurs and small business owners who want to build their brand and online presence.

1. Gain insights into your business, web, portals and content management to implement your internet channel strategy and provide a unique customer experience 2. Explore global best practice for creating web portals and managing your brand identity 3. Build online brands and implement a successful strategy to enhance overall customer experience and loyalty

Benefits Of Attending

1. Learn how to dominate the first page of Google and understand the power of article marketing 2. Apply business strategies using blogs, Facebook, Twitter and LinkedIn 3. Understand how and where to use video marketing 4. Understand mobile media and its marketing strategies in business

198

18 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

E I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Effective Marketing Executive

Course Overview

Course Overview

This practical course covers key aspects of digital marketing, showing you how to integrate and reach customers, grow revenues and will help you to understand how to maximise online strategies and the performance of your online marketing investments. It will also provide you with insights on how digital marketing is approached from both, a client and an agency perspective.

Course Content • • • • • •

Digital Display Advertising and Remarketing Search Engine Optimisation Basic And Advanced Concepts Pay Per Click Advertising Mobile Marketing SoMoLo, Web And Apps Website Analytics Digital Marketing Strategy And Planning

Who Should Attend?

This course is suitable for a variety of professions and for all levels of marketing and business experience. It is designed for those with the responsibility of developing or implementing an organisation’s online marketing strategy, such as: • Senior management • Marketing and business development managers • Marketing executives • Small business owners • IT managers • Anyone who would like to pursue a career in digital marketin

1. Incorporate digital marketing as a vital component of your marketing strategy and your business goals 2. Drive new visitor traffic to your website and improve conversion rates 3. Create and manage online advertising and marketing campaigns 4. Effectively develop targeted PPC and mobile marketing campaigns 5. Measure and analyse visitor traffic to your website for optimised customer retention

= Earned Training Hours

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • •

What is the role of marketing?

The marketing mix Market analysis – situation audit Market intelligence Market segmentation Positioning Market analysis Marketing communications Maximising the use of agencies Selection of marcoms Implementing pricing policies Managing customer relationships Marketing planning

Who Should Attend?

This course is ideal for those who are in support positions in marketing or who are just starting in their marketing careers. It is also useful for anyone who wishes to develop a better understanding of the marketing process and for those who interact with the marketing department.

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending

24 Hrs

This course focuses on those areas of marketing which all marketing personnel should understand. It introduces the major marketing tools and the role of marketing within the wider organisation.

Marketing, Sales & PR

Digital Marketing

E

1. Boost business performance by ensuring that your marketing role and activities contribute to corporate objectives 2. Ensure that your marketing messages are consistent and aligned by developing and implementing an integrated communications strategy 3. Assist in delivering superior service by effectively managing customer relationships and improving customer care to gain loyalty and to retain customers

E

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

199

Marketing, Sales & PR

ILM Endorsed Sales Management Programme

Measuring ROI For Social Media

(In association with Institute of Leadership and Management) Course Overview

This course will help you increase your sales figures through effective and innovative sales management practices.

In this course we will address all of these needs, from your social media strategy and goal-setting, to identifying which metrics you should be tracking and monitoring. You should leave this course with a clear understanding of social media ROI and a Measurement Framework for your social media activities.

Course Content

Course Outline

• • • • • • • • • • •

Developing a strategic sales organisation Building a powerful sales strategy Creating customer loyalty Implementing and driving the sales strategy Coaching for high performance The role of innovation in selling Key account management Sales and change management Motivating through rewards and incentives Measuring sales performance Successful sales meetings

• • • • • • • • • •

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed to benefit professionals in sales, business development, marketing, public relations, advertising, promotions, merchandising management, product management, brand and channel management, key accounts and project management. It will be a useful for anyone who wants a better understanding of how to improve sales performance.

1. Build a strategic sales plan and set objectives that connect vision to action 2. Develop robust sales coaching and feedback skills and processes 3. This level 2 qualification will give you 13 credits on the Qualifications and Credit Framework (QCF)

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

What to measure in social media The challenge of measurement How to calculate social media Return On Investment (ROI) How to pick the right social media monitoring tool What is the value of a social media relationship?

Knowing which metrics matter Measuring success on Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, Pinterest, YouTube, Google+ and LinkedIn Creating your measurement framework Making the case for social media measurement within your organisation The future of social media measurement

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for: • Social Media Managers and Directors • Marketing Managers and Directors • PR/Communication Managers and Directors • Social Media Executives

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending

200

Course Overview

I A

1. Understand what Return On Investment (ROI) means in the context of social media and align targets with your social media strategy and goals 2. Monitor social media to measure buzz and brand sentiment and appreciate the value of influencer analysis and marketing 3. Create a Measurement Framework for social media and effectively communicate social media value and ROI within your organisation

I A

18 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

This course will guide you through all the essential factors in planning and running public relations programmes that will win the maximum corporate and marketing success.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • •

Campaign aims and objectives Policies and strategies Audiences and messages Performance measures The issues audit Crises and crisis management Supporting and engaging management Public relations resources Communications activities Feedback and fine tuning Media relations Media management

Discover the essential steps to take your organisation’s public relations to the highest performance levels Understand the key factors that will make your public relations build reputation and business success, especially when budgets are tight Double the impact of your public relations activities on your organisation’s reputation, its relationships, goodwill and performance

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

You will learn how to use social media effectively, making best use of the wide range of tools available. This will include use of social media monitoring tools to fully understand your audience, as well as social customer service tools to manage workflow and engagement.

Social Media And Customer Service In Perspective The Key Social Channels In Perspective Using Social Media Monitoring Tools Challenges Of Social Customer Service Social Media Measurement Approach Social Measurement Ratios Analytics And Customer Service Social Media And Customer Service Management Tools Social Customer Service – Policy And Process Workshop – Building Your Social Media Customer Service Plan

Who Should Attend?

The course is designed for anyone with responsibility for customer service or digital marketing within an organisation. It will also be highly relevant for those with responsibility for an overall customer satisfaction as well as those involved in PR and brand management.

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending

3.

Increasingly, customers are giving feedback, reviews and voicing their frustrations online. This can lead to a range of new and challenging circumstances in which to deal with customer service. This course will help you to identify and engage with your customers online using social media in a risk managed way.

• • • • • • • • • •

This course is designed specifically for middle to senior level public relations professionals who wish to further develop their PR and communications skills including PR directors and managers, corporate communications managers and directors of government relations and government affairs.

2.

Course Overview

Course Content

Who Should Attend?

1.

Social Customer Service Development

Marketing, Sales & PR

Planning And Running Successful PR Campaigns

I A

1. Understand how social media can be used for customer service and use the key social channels effectively 2. Use social media monitoring tools to manage feedback as well as social customer service management tools 3. Monitor, engage and delight your customers using social media

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

201

Marketing, Sales & PR

Social Media Marketing Masterclass

Strategic Email Marketing

Course Overview

Course Overview

This course is designed to help you fine tune your strategic understanding of social media and update your online media relations capabilities. It offers a breadth and depth of information that will advance your new media communications to the next level.

Course Content

Understanding the evolution of social media marketing and leveraging the tools of the trade Facebook Twitter LinkedIn Blogs Building a sustainable social media strategy: a step by step approach Engaging your customers by humanising the corporate brand: case studies and tactics

• • • • • • •

Who Should Attend?

This course is for anyone who wants to learn how to use social media marketing techniques to put them at the cutting edge in their quest for market share, including specialists in marketing, corporate communications, advertising and PR.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Discover the latest regional and international social media marketing trends and explore processes which will help you use online platforms to successfully build, launch and sustain your social media marketing strategy Learn about new tools to leverage your brand’s marketing mix, monitor your brand’s online presence and measure ROI to prove success Explore rules of engagement and best practices from international brands and evaluate current innovations, solutions and technologies to ensure your social media marketing campaign is a success

Email marketing is one of the most successful forms of marketing. Email has a high Return On Investment (ROI) when compared against other forms of marketing. Email marketing enables organisations to boost sales and revenues, increase customer awareness of products and services, establish ongoing relationship with customers, and reduce marketing expenses and overheads. However, email is only successful as a marketing channel if it is performed correctly. Email marketing must contain personalised, relevant and targeted messaging to be effective. This course will provide you with the insights and techniques to develop effective email marketing strategies, execute email campaigns and improve email marketing results.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Why is email marketing important?

Benefits of email marketing How does email marketing integrate with other forms of digital marketing?

Developing an effective email marketing strategy Setting realistic goals and objectives Reviewing options for email communications preferences and profiles Getting the most from your list through segmentation and targeting Strategies to improve deliverability Distribution time (schedule and time of day) Triggered email communications Best practices and filter checks for email communications Briefing on the latest privacy laws, guidelines and codes Discovering your audience and where they are online Leveraging social media to build your email database Using email to expand your reach Developing targeted content for each audience

Who Should Attend?

This course is intended for people who are managing email campaigns and want to improve their email marketing results.

Job Titles: Marketing Managers, Marketing Consultants, Marketing Executives, Sales Managers, Sales Consultants, Sales Executives, Business Development Managers, Advertising Managers, PR Managers, PR Consultants, Corporate Communications Managers, Social Media Managers

Benefits Of Attending

1. Learn how to develop an effective email marketing strategy for your organisation 2. Ensure your emails reach the right audience by building, segmenting and maintaining mailing lists 3. Discover best practice, tools and techniques to maximise email delivery and open rates

202

18 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I

I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Course Overview

This course will be delivered in workshop style with the emphasis on involvement and practical solutions. It covers at a fast pace, all the key marketing strategy issues which organisations face in their increasingly complex and competitive markets. This course will sharpen and extend your marketing strategy skills - enabling you to “work smarter, not harder” and “make things happen”.

Course Content • • • • • • • • •

Extending your strategic thinking Innovation and creativity in developing marketing strategies Completing your market place evaluation Product and market development strategy Innovative strategies to maximise profit The power of the brand Good strategic decisions depend on quality marketing information Delivering the strategy and “making it happen” Summary and action plan: re-evaluating your strategic thinking

This course is for all decision makers and those involved with strategy implementation, primarily in marketing but also in corporate and business planning, sales, profitability and risk. It would appeal particularly to: • Directors, senior and middle management in marketing and members of their team with key responsibilities to deliver defined marketing strategies • Creative thinkers – not just in marketing but in the whole business process, who can make an input in delivering their organisation’s mission/vision

Course Overview

This course introduces a range of processes and tools that you can use to increase the chances of a successful product launch and brand positioning.

Course Content • • • • • • • •

Ideas Analysis of the current situation Developing strategies Customer segmentation and concept testing Product, pricing and distribution options Brand positioning and promotion Managing the launch After the launch

This course has been designed for senior and middle managers who have responsibility for the success of new product developments.

It is also suitable for those with either no past product or brand development experience or for those with limited experience of managing low impact developments.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Challenge and increase your knowledge of strategic marketing thinking and planning 2. Acquaint yourself with different approaches, tools and techniques to effectively apply these in your market places 3. Help yourself to think differently and creatively about the major issues and challenges you face today

= Earned Training Hours

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Who Should Attend?

Who Should Attend?

24 Hrs

Successful Product Launching And Brand Positioning

I A

Marketing, Sales & PR

Strategic Marketing For Decision Makers

3.

Learn how to minimise the risk and maximise the opportunities from new product development by understanding how to identify real opportunities and how to segment customers and pinpoint their needs Discover how to develop tactics and plans to ensure a successful product launch and to position your product in the most advantageous position possible Explore brand positioning and communication tactics to drive sustainable revenue and to maintain product performance long after the launch

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

203

T T C E EN J O EM R P AG N A M

PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Advanced Master’s Certificate In Project Management (In Association With The George Washington University/ESI)____________________________ 208 Taking Charge Of Organizational Change _______________________________________________________________________ 208 Program Management ______________________________________________________________________________________ 209 Leading Project Managers____________________________________________________________________________________ 209 Regaining Control Of Projects – Rapid Assessment And Recovery Of Troubled Projects __________________________________ 210 Leading Complex Projects ___________________________________________________________________________________ 210 Associate’s And Master’s Certificate In Project Management

(In Association With The George Washington University/ESI) _______________________

211

Managing Projects _________________________________________________________________________________________ 211 Quality For Project Managers _________________________________________________________________________________ 212 Scheduling And Cost Control _________________________________________________________________________________ 212 Project Leadership, Management And Communications ___________________________________________________________ 213

Project Management

Table Of Contents

Contract Management Principles And Practices __________________________________________________________________ 213 Project Risk Management ____________________________________________________________________________________ 214 Project Management Applications ____________________________________________________________________________ 214 Dispute Management In Projects ____________________________________________________________________________________ 215 Executive Certificate In Festival And Event Management (In asssociation with the Edinburgh Napier University)______________________________ 215 Effective Project Coordinator________________________________________________________________________________________ 216 ILM Endorsed Project And Risk Management For Events (In association with the Institute of Leadership And Management)_______________________ 216 PMI - Certified Associate In Project Management (CAPM)® Exam Preparation_________________________________________________ 217 PMI - Program Management Professional (PgMP)® Certification Exam Preparation_____________________________________________ 217 PMI - Risk Management Professional (PMI-RMP)® Exam Preparation_________________________________________________________ 218 PMP® Exam Preparation____________________________________________________________________________________________ 218 Professional Certificate In Project Management (In Association With Bond University) includes 3 courses:________________________________ 219 Key Project Management Principles Project Leadership And Stakeholder Communication Project Quality And Risk Management Project Management For Non Project Managers ________________________________________________________________________ 219 Project Portfolio Management And The PMO __________________________________________________________________________ 220 Strategic Project Management______________________________________________________________________________________ 220 The Project Management Office_____________________________________________________________________________________ 221

207

Project Management

Advanced Master’s Certificate In Project Management (In association with The George Washington University/ESI) Programme Overview

This programme comprises high-level, strategic project management courses for experienced project managers.

Courses 1.

2.

3.

4.

Taking Charge Of Organizational Change Program Management Leading Project Managers Regaining Control Of Projects – Rapid Assessment And Recovery Of Troubled Projects 5. Leading Complex Projects

Who Should Attend?

This series has been developed for professionals who have a strong background in the field, yet wish to expand their knowledge and skills by focusing on today’s higher-level, strategic or specialist project management issues.

Benefits Of Attending

1. G ain leading edge skills and advance your career by enhancing your expertise in tackling the most demanding of projects 2. Earn Professional Development Units (PDUs) to maintain your Project Management Professional (PMP®) status of the Project Management Institute (PMI)

Taking Charge Of Organizational Change Earn 30 PDUs

Course Overview

Change is constantly occurring in our organizations and to ensure that the transitions are as smooth as possible, we need to know how changes originate, how they are planned and what the challenges and risks are inherent in the change process. Learn how to assess whether change is necessary, what needs to be changed, how to build a business case for change and how to create a mindset and organizational support for change. Explore how to create a compelling vision and strategy to ensure support from stakeholders and how to develop a winning communication plan, as well as how to help people cope with change.

Course Outline • • • • • •

Change Defined Being A Change Agent Need For Change Organisational Readiness Planning For Change Implementing Change

Who Should Attend?

Project professionals who have a strong background in the field, yet wish to expand their knowledge and skills by focusing on today’s higher-level, strategic or specialist project management issues will benefit from this course.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Make change happen within your organization and become a change agent and coach others through change Leverage organizational change for positive outcomes and create a business case for specific organizational change Apply a framework to plan and lead organizational change

.

208 = Earned Training Hours

Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Program Management

Leading Project Managers

Course Overview

Course Overview

Earn 30 PDUs

Using comprehensive and real-life case studies, experienced project, business and technical managers will learn how to succeed as a program manager by focusing on what makes them successful.

Numerous studies provide valuable information on what makes program managers successful and these are used and referenced in this course. To be sure, success is not based on technical competence; rather, it is business savvy, leadership and communication skills that separate the winners from the losers.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • •

Defining program management Linking programs to strategic goals Program management life cycle Maintenance and support Three themes of program management Program planning Program management office The program manager’s role in delivering the benefits Reporting tool Program risk identification, analysis and response Strategy PMBOK® Guide Knowledge Areas

In this highly facilitated course, you will learn soft and hard skills and approaches that lead to organizational success in the “management by projects” environment. You also will get expert perspectives and review best practices on issues critical to those who lead project managers. You will enjoy lively debate and stimulating conversation that reinforces what you know and what you’ve learned. This course provides you with a new way of thinking about the best way to lead people in conjunction with the underlying process of project management. It is a “must-attend” for anyone responsible for leading and managing project managers.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • •

The leader of project managers (LPM) role in the Project life cycle Managing in a multi-project environment Project initiation Leading and managing project managers The LPM’s role in project planning Managing relationships The LPM’s role in project implementation Project close PMBOK® Guide Knowledge Areas

Who Should Attend?

Who Should Attend?

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending

Project professionals who have a strong background in the field, yet wish to expand their knowledge and skills by focusing on today’s higher-level, strategic or specialist project management issues will benefit from this course.

1. Increase the effectiveness of your organization’s approach to program management 2. Initiate and organize a large-scale program strategy and manage stakeholder relationships effectively 3. Manage, execute and control a successful program consisting of multiple, related projects

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

A

Project Management

Earn 30 PDUs

Project professionals who have a strong background in the field, yet wish to expand their knowledge and skills by focusing on today’s higher-level, strategic or specialist project management issues will benefit from this course.

1. Define the leader’s role in each phase of the project life cycle 2. Use key performance indicators to monitor ongoing project 3. Progress and support project managers and project teams through coaching, mentoring and rewarding success

A

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

209

Project Management

Regaining Control Of Projects – Rapid Assessment And Recovery Of Troubled Projects Earn 30 PDUs

Rapid Assessment And Recovery Of Troubled Projects demonstrates a proven process project recovery. You’ll get everything you need (process, tools, techniques) to perform a rapid assessment of a project in trouble, develop a recovery plan and manage the transition to stabilization. Active participation in the case study, designed to simulate the environment and feel of an actual troubled project, will enable you to build your skills in a meaningful way. This course is a must for experienced project managers who need to know what to do when the chips are down.

Introduction to assessment methodology Planning the assessment Conducting the assessment Developing the stabilization plan Stabilizing the project PMBOK® Guide Knowledge Areas

Benefits Of Attending

1. Structure and lead the effort to assess project problems rapidly 2. Develop a recovery plan for any troubled project 3. Identify and manage signs of trouble early in a project, and determine the root causes of identified problems

= Earned Training Hours

Course Content

Understanding complexity in projects The complex project model and process Determining project complexity Communicating project complexity Designing for complex projects Leading complex projects

Who Should Attend?

Project professionals who have a strong background in the field, yet wish to expand their knowledge and skills by focusing on today’s higher-level, strategic or specialist project management issues will benefit from this course.

30 Hrs

Leading Complex Projects provides an innovative approach to assess project complexity and to deploy the best techniques to achieve success. You will learn to use ESI’s unique Complexity Indicator and Complex Project Model to increase your effectiveness in controlling the complexity in your project. The Complex Project Model provides valuable insight into the variables that create the complexity of your particular project. It enables you to select existing tools from a new point of view that both limits the level of complexity and governs how the remaining complexity is used for positive results—in short, to stack the odds of success in your favor!

• • • • • •

Course Content

Who Should Attend?

210

Earn 30 PDUs

Course Overview

Course Overview

• • • • • •

Leading Complex Projects

A

Project professionals who have a strong background in the field, yet wish to expand their knowledge and skills by focusing on today’s higher-level, strategic or specialist project management issues will benefit from this course.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Apply the concepts of complexity science to project management 2. Use ESI’s Complexity Indicator to assess your project’s complexity level 3. Create an innovative framework for managing project complexity using ESI’s Complex Project Model and Process

A

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In association with The George Washington University/ESI) Programme Overview

This course will enable delegates to efficiently implement projects.

Delegates will gain a solid understanding of project management methods, tools and techniques to manage each stage of the project life cycle, work within organisational and cost constraints, set goals tied directly to stakeholder needs, get the most from their project management team and utilise state-of-the-art project management tools to get work done on time and within budget.

Courses 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Managing Projects Quality For Project Managers Scheduling And Cost Control Project Leadership, Management And Communications Contract Management Principles And Practices Project Risk Management Project Management Applications

Who Should Attend?

This programme is ideal for project leaders, project team members, project assistants, new project managers, professionals from other areas who work with project managers or anyone seeking career development in project management.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Master fundamental project management skills, concepts and techniques, and lead and motivate teams to set realistic, measurable objectives to ensure positive results Apply project quality management tools and techniques to “real world” project management situations Deliver projects on-time, on-budget and on-specs

Managing Projects Earn 18 PDUs

Course Overview

As the flagship course in the ESI/GW Master’s Certificate In Project Management, this course opens the door to more efficient project implementation. Delegates will gain a solid understanding of project management methods with this comprehensive introductory course.

This course provides the foundation, techniques and tools to manage each stage of the project life cycle, work within organisational and cost constraints, set goals tied directly to stakeholder needs, get the most from their project management team and utilise state-of-theart project management tools to get work done on time and within budget.

Course Content • • • • •

Introduction to project management Project initiation Project planning Project implementation Project closeout

Who Should Attend?

This course is ideal for project leaders, project team members, project assistants, new project managers, professionals from other areas who work with project managers or anyone seeking career development in project management.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Master fundamental project management skills, concepts and techniques to set realistic, measurable objectives and ensure positive results 2. Link project goals and objectives to clear, compelling stakeholder needs 3. Estimate project costs and schedules using simple, proven techniques As part of your course materials, you’ll also receive a copy of Project Management Terms: A Working Glossary.

E A

18 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

Project Management

Associate’s And Master’s Certificate In Project Management

Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

211

Quality For Project Managers

Scheduling And Cost Control

Course Overview

Course Overview

Project Management

Earn 18 PDUs

Earn 30 PDUs

This course applies quality principles to project management itself, as well as to the products and services resulting from projects. It brings to the forefront the essentials of project quality management and its vital link to business success, with a focus on the tools and essentials of effective quality management that work for your organization, regardless of your industry. The course prepares the project manager to be a positive force in using project quality management to help ensure project and business success.

Course Content • • • • •

Managing project quality Planning project quality Assuring project quality Controlling project quality Putting project quality to work

This course is ideal for project leaders, project team members, project assistants, new project managers, professionals from other areas who work with project managers or anyone seeking career development in project management.

= Earned Training Hours

This course is ideal for project leaders, project team members, project assistants, new project managers, professionals from other areas who work with project managers or anyone seeking career development in project management.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Integrate project quality management into the entire project life cycle 2. Plan effectively for project quality management, and assess and improve your organization’s current quality capabilities to ensure that projects will meet specified quality standards 3. Ensure customer satisfaction by monitoring results using project quality control tools

18 Hrs

Course Content • Essential background • Estimating • Scheduling • The baseline • Managing change within the project • Evaluation and forecasting • The exit strategy

Who Should Attend?

Who Should Attend?

Benefits Of Attending

212

Develop effective measures for scheduling and controlling projects as you put the tools of project management to work. In this course, you’ll focus on managing the constraints you face in any project: limits on time, human resources, materials, budget and specifications. Discover proven ways to work within your identified constraints without letting predefined limits curtail creativity or innovation.

E I

1.

2.

3.

Use the work breakdown structure to develop a network diagram Calculate schedules using PERT/CPM Predict costs and work time using specific levels and estimate types, and plan for contingencies and anticipate variations

You will receive ESI’s Earned Valued Formula Finder, which puts the information you need to determine cost, schedule, estimate at completion and estimate to complete values for your projects right at your fingertips.

E I

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Project Leadership, Management And Communications

Contract Management Principles And Practices

Course Overview

Course Overview

This is an interactive course designed to provide a solid foundation in key leadership competencies and to provide you with the opportunity for a truly transformational leadership experience. As a participant, you will complete a self-assessment of your leadership skills, then master the basics of these leadership competencies: setting direction, aligning people, motivating and inspiring, leading teams, communicating, building relationships, facilitating ethical conduct, negotiating, and leading change.

• • • • • • • •

Leadership and management Leading effective teams Building relationships Ethics and leadership Negotiating conflict Leading change

Who Should Attend?

This course is ideal for project leaders, project team members, project assistants, new project managers, professionals from other areas who work with project managers or anyone seeking career development in project management.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Lead project teams through more effective communication and create a Leadership Development Plan to implement when you return to work Describe predictable change stages and identify appropriate leadership strategies for each stage Utilize a powerful four-stage collaborative negotiation process

18 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

Gain an overview of all phases of contracting, from requirements development to closeout. See how incentives can be used to improve contract results. This course explores these vital issues from the project manager’s perspective, highlighting your roles and responsibilities to give you greater influence over how work is performed. You will also discuss actions that can be taken to help ensure that contractors or subcontractors perform as required under the contract.

Course Content

Course Content • • • • • •

Earn 18 PDUs

E I

Understand the contract management process Teamwork – roles and responsibilities Concepts and principles of contract law Contracting methods Developing contract pricing agreements Pre-award phase Award phase Contract administration

Project Management

Earn 18 PDUs

Who Should Attend?

This course is ideal for project leaders, project team members, project assistants, new project managers, professionals from other areas who work with project managers or anyone seeking career development in project management.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Identify contract components and understand the process from start to finish Select the right contract type for your project and decipher contract ‘legalese’ Negotiate favorable terms and make revisions to the contract and apply the “10 rules of contract interpretation” in project disputes

I

18 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

213

Project Risk Management

Project Management Applications

Course Overview

Course Overview

Project Management

Earn 18 PDUs

Earn 30 PDUs

In this course, you will work through the proactive approach to threat and opportunity – based on a clear understanding of the powerful nature of both qualitative and quantitative approaches to risk management. You will also examine threat and opportunity from both a top down and bottom-up perspective, using ESI’s proven eight-step risk management process. Using effective tools, including ESI’s highly regarded risk assessment model, you will learn how to evaluate and respond to risk at the project and task levels.

Course Content • • • • • •

Course Content

The basic foundations of project risk management Risk management planning and identifying risks Analysis fundamentals Analyzing and prioritizing risk Planning for risk Execution, evaluation and update

• • • • • • •

Who Should Attend?

This course is ideal for project leaders, project team members, project assistants, new project managers, professionals from other areas who work with project managers or anyone seeking career development in project management.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Watch basic concepts come to life in this course: a comprehensive synthesis of core project management principles designed to reinforce skills learned throughout the core curriculum. Build on your new competencies and test your skills as you work in teams to complete an extensive, realistic project case study. You will propose, plan and execute a full-scale project under typical organizational constraints. Follow your project through the life cycle, resolving issues of performance, scheduling and control as you address questions of leadership and management.

Use a practical, eight-step process to manage project risk Identify threats and opportunities and weigh their relative value in your project Make risk and opportunity integral components of your next project plan

Team building Pre-proposal analysis and planning Proposal kickoff and preparation Post-award planning Negotiation/agreement Implementation Closeout

Who Should Attend?

This course is ideal for project leaders, project team members, project assistants, new project managers, professionals from other areas who work with project managers or anyone seeking career development in project management.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Select the level of staffing, resources and management support required for a project Assign tasks based on work breakdown structure Estimate time and costs and present a project plan to team members and stakeholders

You will receive a complimentary copy of ESI’s Project Management Tools CD for your use, following the classroom experience.

214

18 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

I A

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Executive Certificate In Festival And Event Management

Earn 24 PDUs from PMI Course Overview

This course focuses on the key relationship and communications skills needed to manage disputes in project expectations and succeed in conflict situations. You will learn how to create and sustain commitment and mutual trust by using influence rather than authority to achieve project and business goals.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Managing expectations The project manager’s relationships Expectation management Stakeholders and scope change management Relationship strategies in project management Analysis of the project manager’s authority and responsibility Identifying areas of strengths and weaknesses Networking for results: leveraging from sponsors and key stakeholders Special considerations for contractors and suppliers Leveraging from communication strengths Application in different project situations Dispute and conflict management Sources of conflicts in projects Understanding the power model Managing disputes in projects Effective communications for dispute and conflict management The principles of influence for dealing with conflicts Dealing with conflicts The obstacles due to resistance

Who Should Attend?

This course is invaluable to programme and project managers, senior managers, executives, line managers, project team members and consultants who seek to apply potent conflict management techniques to mitigate disputes and meet expectations in a multifunctional organisational projects environment.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Engage stakeholders and manage their expectations Proactively and reactively manage disputes and use powerful conflict management techniques Develop key relationship management skills and multiple communication techniques to build a comprehensive relationship map and establish widespread commitment

(In asssociation with the Edinburgh Napier University) Course Overview

The ECFEM is a three day intensive training course designed to provide a foundation of key skills and knowledge associated with the creation and delivery of corporate (e.g Conferences and Exhibitions), private (e.g Weddings) and public events (e.g Festivals, Sporting Events). The course outlines international industry best practices in event planning, project management, marketing and PR, human resources planning and management and the conduct and evaluation of events.

The focus of the ECFEM is on developing an understanding of the theory and practice of creating and delivering various types of events.

The course content is based on the result of an extensive survey of event management professionals. All students who undertake the course will receive a certificate from the Edinburgh Institute: Festivals, Events and Tourism (EIFET), Edinburgh Napier University.

Course Content

• Festival And Event Introduction, Planning And Initiation • Workshop: Devise a HR strategy for an event; practical implementation of project management tools • Festival And Event Production, Marketing And Sponsorship • Workshop: Produce a press release for an event; devise an event sponsorship plan • Festival And Event Financial And Risk Management, Control And Evaluation • Workshop: Produce a Risk Management Plan; examine event budgets

Project Management

Dispute Management In Projects

Who Should Attend?

This course is mainly designed for event, communication and marketing professionals who need to improve their skills and knowledge about event organisation, planning and management.

• Event professionals such as event organiser, coordinators, supervisors and managers • Festival Organisers • Conference/meeting and exhibition planner • Public event officers/coordinators and managers • Sport event organiser Also communication and marketing department staff: communication/ marketing assistants, coordinators and managers that will be in charged to plan events for their company.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the theory and practice of event planning, promotion and implementation 2. Determine and examine the importance of effective project aims, objectives and budgeting 3. Measure the importance of effective safety, security and risk management strategies

24Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I

E

18 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

215

Effective Project Coordinator

ILM Endorsed Project And Risk Management For Events

Project Management

Earn 30 PDUs

(In association with the Institute of Leadership And Management)

Course Overview

Be an asset to your project team and organisation by learning essential project management tools and techniques. This course aims to enhance your project support skills by exposing you to the full project management process using an interactive approach. You will discover the intricacies of the Project Management Body Of Knowledge (PMBOK) and explore the skills needed to boost your project management knowledge and role within the project process.

Course Content • • • • • •

Delegates from all industries working as supervisors of projects or teams, or team members providing administrative support or specialised procedure support will benefit from this course.

Benefits Of Attending 2.

3.

This course caters to the dynamic Middle East events management industry and is applicable to a wide range of occasions including conferences, product launches, corporate hospitality, sporting occasions, shopping festivals, exhibitions and much more; and most importantly, maintains a strong focus on the challenges that are important to you.

Course Content

Projects in organisations The project management process Creating project plans The project team Implementing the project Monitoring and controlling the project

Who Should Attend?

1.

Course Overview

Explore project management best practices, concepts and the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK) Create and implement successful projects using essential tools and techniques Identify, suggest and implement corrective actions to improve quality whilst supervising project teams to successfully deliver project objectives

• • • • • • • •

Practical special event preparation Event project management Project management and the management system Contracts and reporting Financing management and follow through Event finance Staging and shutdown Best practice in staging events in the gulf

Who Should Attend?

If you are an events professional working in this challenging environment or someone who occasionally organises special events, this course will keep you competitive, efficient, effective and innovative.

• Corporate and Independent Event Planners • Event Producers • PR and Communications Managers • Brand Managers • Sales and Marketing Managers • Project Managers • Exhibition Organisers • Festival and Public Event Organisers • Fundraising Managers • Sponsorship Managers • Tourism Authorities

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

216

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E

Apply the science of project management to an event to set clear objectives and measure success Understand and improve event finance, sponsorship and cost control Take away key documents from the course that can be used immediately for your next event

E I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

PMI - Certified Associate In Project Management (CAPM)® Exam Preparation

PMI - Program Management Professional (PgMP)® Certification Exam Preparation

Course Overview

The Project Management Institute’s Program Management Professional credential (PgMP)® recognises the advanced experience and skill of program managers and demonstrates proven competency to oversee multiple, related projects and their resources to achieve strategic business goals.

Earn 30 PDUs

Course Overview

This CAPM® exam training course will prepare you for the certification exam by reviewing the 4th Edition of the (PMBOK® Guide) in full details, including the five process groups, nine knowledge areas and each and every one of the 42 processes. The course will highlight the inputs, tools and techniques, and outputs of each process that the exam focuses on.

You will be supplied with customised course materials. This course includes exercises and lots of sample questions which will build your confidence and raise your chances of passing the CAPM® exam on your first attempt.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • •

Introduction and project management concepts Project integration management Project scope management Project time management Project cost management Project quality management Human resource management Project communication management Project risk management Project procurement management

Project Managers, Project Planners/Schedulers, Cost Engineers, Quality Assurance/Quality Control professionals, Event Managers and Coordinators, Procurement Officers, and anyone who is a beginner in the project world will benefit from this course and its credential.

New project practitioners who have not accumulated 1500 hours of experience (or 1 year) can simply take this course to be equipped with everything they need to know to pass the exam.

Benefits of Attending

2.

3.

By attending this course, you will be equipped with the knowledge and skills to effectively navigate the program management discipline, including the 47 processes and 12 knowledge areas of The Standard for Program Management 2nd Edition, and align your program management experience with PgMP® terminology and definitions, as well as identify the steps needed to complete your exam application and meet the required criteria.

Course Content

Who Should Attend?

1.

PgMP® credential holders typically are responsible for the success of a program and the grouping of related projects together to realise benefits not available if these projects were managed separately. It is the perfect fit for those who define projects, assign project managers and oversee programs within their role.

Gain an in-depth understanding of each component of the CAPM® certification exam and significantly improve your chances of passing the exam at the first attempt Develop complete familiarity with the structure of the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), and PMI’s project management best practice Understand the scope of a project manager’s duties and take your career to the next level – Demonstrate your understanding of project management fundamentals, terminology and processes

• • • • • • • • • •

Who Should Attend?

Professionals who are interested to learn modern applied program management and /or wish to prepare for the PgMP certification test.

This includes program and portfolio managers, department and functional managers, experienced project managers, senior executives, and PMP® certified professionals.

The course also applies to individuals working in projects of different industries such as engineering and construction, infrastructure, computer & MIS, software development, telecommunications, maintenance and operations, manufacturing, power, petrochemical, oil and gas, product development, quality implementation, military, information technology, government, educational, finance, marketing, water development, chemical, mining & mineral etc

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

Program life cycle and benefits management Program management processes Program integration management Program scope management Program time management Program communication management Program risk management Program procurement management Program financial management Program stakeholder management

Project Management

Earn 30 PDUs

Elevate your program management standards to globally accepted best practice Learn to align your projects and programs to your organisation’s strategic goals and objectives Achieve superior business benefits by efficiently managing related projects as a program instead of managing them as separate projects

I A

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

217

PMI - Risk Management Professional (PMI-RMP)® Exam Preparation

PMP® Exam Preparation

Course Overview

Course Overview

Earn 35 PDUs

Project Management

Earn 30 PDUs

PMI Risk Management Professional (PMI-RMP)® is a new credential offered by the Project Management Institute – PMI in response to the growing need of professionals who specialise in project risk management. Prepare for the PMI Risk Management Professional Certification Exam. This course offers an in-depth look at risk management through a PMI perspective, and is delivered in a combination of lectures and hands-on learning. All components of risk management will be covered including planning, identification, qualification, quantification, response planning and monitoring and controlling risks. You will learn to maximise the results of positive project events, and minimise the consequences of adverse events, both internal and external to the project.

All delegates will be supplied with customised course materials and a course workshop that will help in preparing for the exam. This workshop includes exercises and lots of sample questions that will build your confidence and raise your chances of passing the PMI-RMP® exam on your first attempt.

Course Content • • • • • • • • •

Introduction to risk management concepts Principles and concepts of risk management Introduction to PMI risk management processes Plan risk management Identify risks Perform qualitative risk analysis Perform quantitative risk analysis Plan risk responses Monitor and control risk

218

Improve accuracy of project estimates and better ability to specify and achieve project targets Achieve higher profit margins on projects as opportunities are captured and negative risks mitigated or avoided Enhance the ability to weather project risks and issues, resulting in less unhappy surprises and avoiding early project terminations

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

Project management process groups Project integration management Project scope management Project quality management Project time management Project cost management Project risk management Project human resource management Project procurement management Project communications management Professional responsibility

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending

3.

• • • • • • • • • • •

Project management professionals from all industries including engineering and construction, IT, telecommunications, maintenance and operations, manufacturing, power, oil and gas, communications and marketing who wish to prepare for the Project Management Professional (PMP) certification exam.

Anyone who is responsible for analysing risk and dealing with the various risk exposures that may affect their projects.

The PMI-RMP® demonstrates skills and competencies in the specialised area of project risk management. If you are looking to fill the risk management specialist role on your project team and if you are looking for a course that will add value to your project management skills and showcase your specialised expertise to employers, the PMIRMP credential is for you.

2.

Course Content

Who Should Attend?

Who Should Attend?

1.

Delegates will significantly improve their chances of passing the gruelling PMP® certification exam in the first attempt with this wellproven and successful course. As well as learning where you need to focus your study efforts, you will learn valuable practical exam techniques which will help you when you sit the exam. You will find out exactly what components of your project management background will be tested so you know where to focus your attention during the vital weeks of preparation.

I A

1.

2.

3.

Review the essential project management skills and techniques required for successful projects and how they relate to PMP® certification Gain an in-depth understanding of each component of the PMP® certification examination and significantly improve your chances of passing the gruelling PMP® exam at the first attempt!

Develop complete familiarity with the structure of the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), its thirty-nine processes, five process groups and nine knowledge areas, and find out exactly which components of your project management background will be tested so that you plan your study time to make the most of it

I A

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Professional Certificate In Project Project Management For Non Project Management (In Association with Bond University) Managers Course Overview

Course Overview

This Certificate has been especially designed to not only train you in project management but also to ensure your knowledge and understanding of project management is thoroughly reinforced for effective recall and application after the training. This means you get superior value in terms of effective application of key PM principles in your work-place after course completion. Bond achieves this by providing you with 20 hours of video material, presented by Prof. Alan Patching, for pre or post course review. We know of no other course that provides such a service.

The Certificate has been designed and prepared in alignment with principles of project management as defined in the PMBOK guide of the internationally respected Project Management Institute, and is accredited by PMI. To earn the Professional Certificate In Project Management, you must complete the three core courses within two years.

Courses Content

• Course One: Key Project Management Principles • Project Scope – Requirements Management • The Work Breakdown Structure • Project Cost Management And Project Schedule Management • Course Two: Project Leadership And Stakeholder Communication • Project Human Resource Management – Leadership • Basic Leadership Psychology For Project Managers • Communication In The Projects Environment • Course Three: Project Quality And Risk Management • Managing Project Quality • Managing Project Risk

This course goes over the key concepts of project management in a gentle and fun way. It walks you through all the key steps from when the project is first initiated or requested, to how it is planned, executed, monitored and then finally delivered and closed.

Course Outline • • • • • •

The project organization and you Initiating the project Planning your project scope, schedule and budget Developing your project communications, quality and risk plans Implementing your project Closing the project

Who Should Attend?

This innovative course has been specifically designed for professionals across all industry sectors working as supervisors of small projects or team members providing administrative support or specialized procedure support.

Project Management

20 POINTS, Three courses 24 PDUS each

This includes Event Managers, Coordinators, Marketing Executives, Administrative Professionals, Supervisors, Assistants, Project Administrators, Systems Analysts or Technical Coordinators.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Develop project planning and execution skills Effectively understand how project management works for you and your role Learn how to monitor and control your projects for success

Who Should Attend?

Team leaders/Office Managers/Project Managers/Engineers/Designers and Architects/People seeking P.M. training credit as a preparation for their PMP exam/IT professionals/Business Planners wanting to better understand project management/Operations Managers wanting to understand project management/ Those planning to take graduate or post-graduate professional studies in project management and/or related fields

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Understand PM concepts and their significance Deliver projects to stakeholders expectations Learn how to apply PM techniques and methods in the workplace Meet business objectives using effective project management Use PM tools and techniques to effectively schedule, monitor and control projects Gain knowledge of people management issues for project success

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

I A

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

219

Project Portfolio Management And The PMO

Project Management

24 PDUs from PMI

30 PDUs from PMI Course Overview

Course Overview

This course is articulated around an interactive workshop that will help you enhance your current project organisational environment and shape a specific PPM and PMO structure.

Strategic project management draws upon project management techniques, methods and tools to address areas such as realising business benefits, growth, profitability and competitive advantage.

All these address the key concerns of stakeholders for the increase of shareholder value and long-term business competitiveness.

Course Outline

Course Outline

Management By Programs/Projects • Business drivers and impact of change • Projects as agents of change • Strategic Planning And Portfolio Management • Converting strategy into projects • Stakeholder Management • Establishing and managing stakeholder expectations • Stakeholders and scope change management • Project Portfolio Management • Project prioritisation/ranking norms • Key factors for PMO success • The PMO And Project Management Excellence • Deploying a project management competency model • Applying a combined PPM/PMO Structure • Deploying the structure to the organisation • Project Portfolio Tracking/Control And Reporting Process • Addressing PPM/PMO challenges • Alignment of corporate strategy and project portfolios • Identifying key performance indicators • Governance monitoring and auditing and its extent

Who Should Attend?

This course is invaluable to project managers, senior managers, executives, project office staff, line managers and consultants who seek to manage their project portfolio and achieve corporate change goals and objectives. Professionals who wish to expand/enhance or establish their PMOs, project management practices and processes will also benefit from attending.

1.

2.

3.

Achieve your organisation’s strategic business objectives by selecting the right projects for the right reasons Enhance clear priorities across all projects in your portfolio and introduce a clear staging process for programmes/projects within the portfolio Understand PMO functions, roles and responsibilities and identify and respond to PMO implementation challenges

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

A

Management of change by projects Business drivers of change Impacts to the organisation, infrastructure, processes and systems Responses to change transition Communication about change Projects as agents of change Role of the project manager during change Strategic planning and Project Portfolio Management (PPM) Converting strategy into projects The project portfolio management framework Project portfolio reporting Stakeholder management Establishing and managing stakeholder expectations Stakeholder communication Managing project managers Project management organisational challenges Managing in a multi-project environment Managing project managers Leadership skills

Who Should Attend?

This course is invaluable to senior managers, executives, line managers, programme and project managers, project office staff and consultants who seek to apply solid industry-recognised techniques for the successful management of strategic change by programmes and the realisation of business value.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

Benefits Of Attending

220

Strategic Project Management

2.

3.

Identify the key approaches and tools required to develop a “management of projects strategy” to achieve corporate business goals Gain knowledge of strategic project management for use in your strategic and business related positions Discover practical techniques to support successful strategic project management

I A

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

The Project Management Office

Project Management

Earn 30 PDUs

Course Overview

The Project Management Office – Successful Implementation And Operation training course focuses on WHAT to establish and HOW to implement and operate a successful Project Management Office (PMO) that will contribute to the effective management of projects and the achievement of business benefits.

The course strongly focuses on the challenges that are important to you and explores the latest best practice to improve communication, cut costs and optimise functional user involvement. You will learn how to prioritise projects, and monitor progress and budgets on a continual basis.

Course Content • • • • • • • • •

Strategic planning and project portfolio management Purpose of a PMO Benefits of establishing a PMO PMO functions and organisation The PMO: promoter of project management excellence Planning for the introduction of a PMO Implementing the PMO roadmap Addressing PMO challenges Addressing PMO Challenges

Who Should Attend?

The course is designed for individuals who need to know how to plan and implement an appropriate PMO within their organisation, project and programme management practitioners, project and portfolio managers and individuals who need to gain an understanding of the PMO.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Maximise project performance and realise your business goals – Use the latest tools to analyse, assess and implement the Project Management Office (PMO) structure that best suits your organisation Optimise the benefits of establishing your PMO by effectively articulating and practising the PMO implementation roadmap Sustain successful PMOs across your organisation by resolving challenges and focusing on continuous improvement initiatives

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E I

221 Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

PR

E P O

Y T R

PROPERTY

Advanced Engineering Services For Buildings – Optimising Delivered Performance (Certificate course by The British Institute of Facilities Management (BIFM)__ 226 Certificate I – Certificate In Real Estate Finance And Investment (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)___________ 226 Certificate II – Certificate In Real Estate Modelling (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)_______________________ 227 Certificate III – Certificate In Real Estate Valuation (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)_______________________ 227 Certificate IV – Certificate In Real Estate Investment, Leasing And Management (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)____ 228 Certificate V – Certificate In Real Estate Development (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)___________________ 228

Property

Table Of Contents

Essentials Of Engineering Services For Buildings (Certificate course by The British Institute of Facilities Management (BIFM)________________________ 229 Managing Relocation, Fit-Outs And Moves (Certificate course by The British Institute of Facilities Management (BIFM)_____________________________ 229 Optimising Facilities Management Performance (Certificate course by The British Institute of Facilities Management (BIFM)________________________ 230 Real Estate Sales And Marketing Masterclass (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) __________________________ 230 Understanding Facilities Management (Certificate course by The British Institute of Facilities Management (BIFM)________________________________ 231

225

Property

Advanced Engineering Services For Buildings – Optimising Delivered Performance

(Certificate course by The British Institute of Facilities Management –BIFM)

This is an advanced course that deals with building services strategy and the business needs associated with it. It also focuses on contract specification and management of technical services providers. It is suitable for managers with some existing experience of managing mechanical and electrical services. It is presented in an easy to understand way.

Course Content

Building services integration Safeguarding supplies Power transmission issues Our customers Good energy control Improving lift effectiveness FM Management How can we get better service from our contractors/ suppliers?

What are the issues in your buildings?

Facilities managers/ assistants Procurement professionals Property owners/ developers Property and estate managers Maintenance managers/ contractors Building services contractors Building surveyors Letting agents Property administrators Service providers

3.

226

= Earned Training Hours

Course Content • • •

Understand the data requirements, standards and methodology of real estate valuation Gain the analytical techniques you need to be an expert in real estate including modelling and risk analysis Discover how to put across market conditions and property characteristics in terms of cash flow invested and received over time Know how to choose between direct and indirect property investment vehicles Quantify and measure financial outcomes to help investment decision making

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed to meet the needs of property and real estate professionals with responsibility for finance or investment activities. In particular, those working within the following departments will highly benefit: property development, real estate and property management, portfolio management, planning and development, investments, contract management, property consultation, finance, family offices and real estate investments.

Develop effective business – focused strategies for M & E services Maximise opportunities for efficient operation, while improving security and continuity of services Appreciate the impact of life-cycle cost planning on M & E services

12 Hrs

Investors, lenders, borrowers, valuers, property developers, government agents involved in real estate planning and financing decisions, and financial analysts of all types will greatly benefit from attending this course.

•

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

This course draws on global experience and is designed to provide you with a full background of the financial aspects of commercial and residential real estate in terms of how to calculate returns, how it is financed and how to successfully analyse leases, to invest and sell profitably.

•

Who Should Attend?

• • • • • • • • • •

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Course Overview

Course Overview

• • • • • • • • •

Certificate I – Certificate In Real Estate Finance And Investment

A

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Gain a thorough understanding of the valuation process Explore the principles behind financing a project Review the different financial instruments, how they can be used and their impact on the overall performance of the real estate project

E

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Certificate III – Certificate In Real Estate Valuation

Course Overview

Course Overview

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

This course covers how to use the automated systems and how to build an Excel real estate financial model, step-by-step, from inputs through operating income right the way through to using the model to determine risks. Actual examples of good and bad real estate financial models for office buildings, industrial buildings, residential developments, hotels, and retail will supplement the modelling techniques that will be taught in the course.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • •

Real estate as an investment class Discounted cash flow for real estate investments Alternative valuation techniques and highest and best use analysis (HBU) The cost of capital, real options

Who Should Attend?

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed to meet the needs of property and real estate professionals with responsibility for finance or investment and modelling activities. In particular, those working within the following departments will highly benefit: property development, real estate and property management, portfolio management, planning and development, investments, contract management, property consultation, finance, family offices and real estate investments.

Delegates are expected to possess basic understanding of principles of real estate finance and investment. This course would be of interest to professionals who develop, finance, manage, buy or sell real estate, and especially: • Real estate investors and analysts • Real estate developers • Real estate managers • Planning and development professionals in real estate businesses • Bankers and lenders • Mortgage brokers • Property owners • Finance managers and analysts

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending

1. Learn the techniques to develop a real estate financial model for construction and investment using Microsoft Excel 2. Understand Excel real estate financial models and their automated rivals 3. Be able to audit Excel real estate financial models

= Earned Training Hours

This course covers the methods and concepts of real estate valuation.

At this course, you will learn to value most typical forms of real estate using a variety of techniques and methods, in the same way as a chartered surveyor. The focus is on properties and market conditions in the Gulf, but with plenty of international examples, including land, properties with development potential, and different classes of property such as offices, retail, hotels, and warehouses as well as residential property valuation.

Course Content

Mechanics of financial models What makes real estate models special?

Real estate construction and investment Construction in the model Leases in the model Estimating operating expenses Estimating real estate taxes Estimating capital expenses Calculating net operating income Financing real estate investment Valuation issues in real estate Building and using a real estate model

24 Hrs

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Property

Certificate II – Certificate In Real Estate Modelling

I A

1. Understand the most widely-practiced property income valuation techniques and be able to critically analyse a real estate investment proposal 2. Identify the cost of capital for real estate and confidentially implement discounted cash flow valuation frameworks 3. Be equipped to successfully negotiate terms of a real estate transaction

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

227

Property

Certificate IV – Certificate In Real Estate Investment, Leasing And Management

Certificate V – Certificate In Real Estate Development (In association with The George

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Washington University School of Business)

Course Overview

Course Overview

Property is the most important asset in the Gulf - in the world - yet the process of how to invest profitably in real estate, and how to manage it to best effect, is quite poorly understood. This course gets to the nuts and bolts of property investing - all the practical issues of how to select and manage tenants, risks, and refurbishments, voids and void decks - but also all the financial aspects such as fund management and organisation, tax issues for those countries that have tax regimes, and accounting.

Course Content

Real estate as an investment Financing property purchase Property and conveyancing law Tenant management / property management Advanced operations and facilities management Occupational health and safety Maintenance and structural preservation Procurement and supply chain management Property life cycle planning Sustainability and real estate management Information technology Staffing / management Contracts and outsourcing Financial management principles Real estate strategy Operational property portfolio planning/portfolio analysis

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

The course will address all the actual elements of real estate development, from research and planning through to development and marketing. It contains numerous case studies from the region and around the world to focus on all the key issues developers need to know.

Course Content • • • • • • •

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for all property professionals who participate in the development process and those who finance, manage, buy or sell real estate. The course is also relevant for architects, mortgage brokers and urban planners.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

Who Should Attend?

Real estate investors and analysts/Real estate developers/Real estate managers Planning and development professionals in real estate businesses Bankers and lenders/Mortgage brokers/ Finance managers and analysts Property owners

• • • •

The stages of the development process Size and financial credibility of developers by project Site analysis and site selection Management and development The contract and negotiation process Design, architecture and building Differentiating marketing between types of real estate development

3.

Achieve a thorough understanding of the entire real estate development process Critically analyse a real estate development proposal and examine how to position your organisation in a real estate market Be better equipped to negotiate the terms of a real estate transaction

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

228

Develop a greater understanding of the role of property within the overall development and investment strategy of an organisation Create detailed knowledge of the limitations and opportunities for the property industry Enhance the management and organisational skills necessary for effective property management

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

I

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(Certificate course by The British Institute of Facilities Management- BIFM) Course Overview

This course is a standalone non-technical introduction to building engineering services aimed specifically at property professionals, facilities managers and others who need to understand how their building systems operate and how to manage their contractors. It is particularly suitable for managers new to mechanical and electrical services, or those looking to refresh their knowledge and skills.

Everything is explained in a simple, easy to understand way.

Building services fundamentals Fire systems The provision of comfort and safety Getting the design right Alternative energy sources and applications Building services fundamentals Operation and maintenance Contingency planning Energy efficiency Satisfying the occupants

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the range of building technical systems and their importance to effective operations 2. Improve occupant satisfaction and comfort through best practice design 3. Deliver cost effective and efficient solutions which support sustainability goals and targets

= Earned Training Hours

This practical and highly interactive course leads managers step by step through the processes involved in planning and project managing moves, fit-outs and relocations to achieve the optimum results for the organisation.

The course include topics of assessing space needs, identifying suitable buildings, checking organisational fit and outline space planning as well as budget and programme planning.

Course Content

• • • • • • • • • • • •

Facilities managers/ assistants Procurement professionals Property owners/ developers Property and estate managers Maintenance managers/ contractors Building services contractors Building surveyors Letting agents Property administrators Service providers

12 Hrs

Course Overview

Why moves and relocations happen Building an effective project team Space planning standards (or guidelines) Finding the right building Evaluating the building Planning the space Negotiating the Lease Communication and consultation Move management Post occupancy actions

Who Should Attend?

Who Should Attend?

• • • • • • • • • •

(Certificate course by The British Institute of Facilities Management- BIFM)

• • • • • • • • • •

Course Content • • • • • • • • • •

Managing Relocation, Fit-Outs And Moves

Property

Essentials Of Engineering Services For Buildings

E

Facilities managers/ assistants Procurement professionals Space planning managers/ facilities planners Facilities Project Managers Property owners/ developers Property and estate managers Maintenance managers/ contractors Building services contractors Building surveyors Letting agents Property administrators Service providers

Benefits Of Attending

1. Apply best practice project management techniques to ensure smooth, efficient and cost effective delivery 2. Understand how to source and select the right space for your organisation’s changing needs 3. Learn how modern innovative working arrangements are incorporated in space planning assessments to make optimum use of expensive space assets

I

12 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

229

Property

Optimising Facilities Management Performance

(Certified course by The British Institute of Facilities Management (BIFM)

This course explores how the FM service can be shaped and delivered to maximise the use of assets and resources and optimise performance for the organisation, taking account of changing needs over time.

Aimed at middle and senior managers, the programme offers practical guidance on developing FM service strategies and building an effective delivery model in the support services area.

Establishing the facilities management service Performance improvement through effective workspace management Corporate real estate performance improvement FM service performance improvement

Course Content

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for professionals who have prior knowledge and understanding of the basic principles of facilities management. It is suitable for people with some background in FM and are looking to expand their existing skills and knowledge to the next level including • Facilities Director and Managers • Building Heads and Managers • Property Owners • LEED Designers • Mechanical Electrical And Plumbing (MEP) Contractors and Consultants • Security professionals • Physical Asset Managers • Estate heads and managers • Fire Protection Buyers • Architects • Health and Safety Officers • Manufacturing Site/Plant Managers • Maintenance heads and managers

Benefits Of Attending

1. Draw the critical links between Facilities Management( FM) and core business activities for organisational success 2. Develop and manage an effective FM strategy for competitive advantage 3. Appreciate the impact of changing customer and business needs on FM operations

230

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

Real Estate Sales And Marketing Masterclass course is an essential programme for those who wish to take advantage of the changing trends in the markets. With substantial speculative capital, improvement in economic fundamentals and many of the structural issues in the property markets behind us, it is clear that the importance of brand perceptions, price positioning and a well defined sales and marketing strategy are an imperative for sustained profitability.

You will gain leading edge insights and practical applications to enhance sales results and marketing success. In addition, aspects of your personal management effectiveness will be improved. Innovative sales approaches in respect to residential, retail, industrial and commercial property will be discussed and how they may be applied will be demonstrated.

Course Content

• •

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

Course Overview

• •

Real Estate Sales And Marketing Masterclass

I

• • • • • • • • • •

Overview of real estate markets in the MENA region Thinking creatively about your business Use of social media including: Personal management Advanced sales skills Networking Advanced negotiation skills Marketing options Understanding the link between marketing and sales Sales strategies for commercial, retail and residential property

Who Should Attend?

• • • • • • •

Real Estate Brokers/Managers/Agents Sales Associates Real Estate Management Executives Sales and Property Consultants Key Account Managers Business Development Managers/Heads Marketing Managers

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Apply innovative and effective sales approaches for residential, retail, industrial and commercial property Gain valuable insights into how social media may contribute to sales and marketing success in your business Increase sales figures and profitability via an assessment of several major case studies that will challenge the delegates

E

12 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Understanding Facilities Management

Property

(Certified course by The British Institute of Facilities Management (BIFM) Course Overview

The challenges in delivering a high performing, energy efficient building that caters to the needs of the occupiers is central to day to day activities. Learning about the full range of issues you need to complete your role is important, as is receiving acknowledgement of your professional qualifications.

This course will give you a thorough understanding of the key aspects of facilities management and performance for good practice proven strategies to implement back in your office. Attend the training course and you will walk away with knowledge of developing effective FM service strategies.

Course Content • • • • • • • •

Importance of facilities management Assessing the growth of FM and the developing role of facilities managers in organisations in the UK and internationally Identifying the major qualities and skills required for best practice Building handover, commissioning and on-going management Maintenance and space management Health and safety for facilities managers Contract management, commissioning and managing contract services Energy and environmental management

Who Should Attend?

• • • • • • • • • • • • •

Facilities Managers Building Managers Property Owners Leed Designers Mep Contractors And Consultants Security Professionals Physical Asset Managers Estate Managers Fire Protection Buyers Architects Health And Safety Officers Manufacturing Site/Plant Managers Maintenance Managers

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Assess the nature of buildings and the relationship to their use by occupants Critically examine the cost implications and techniques for space management Identify maintenance requirements and cost effectively implement plans

12 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

E

231 Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

N I A T H N C E Y M L P GE P SU ANA M

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

Best Practice Procurement _________________________________________________________________________________________ 236 Certificate In Financial Tools For Procurement Professionals (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) _____________ 236 Certificate In Managing Risk In The Supply Chain (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ______________________ 237 Certificate In Stock Management, Demand Planning And Forecasting (In association with The George Washington University School of Business) ____

237

Certificate In Sustainable Supply Chain ______________________________________________________________________________ 238 Chartered Institute of Purchasing and Supply (CIPS) – Diploma In Procurement And Supply Exam Preparation ____________________ 238 Unit 1 – Contexts Of Procurement And Supply __________________________________________________________________ 239 Unit 2 – Business Needs In Procurement And Supply _____________________________________________________________ 240 Unit 3 – Sourcing In Procurement And Supply __________________________________________________________________ 240 Unit 4 – Negotiating And Contracting In Procurement And Supply __________________________________________________ 241 Unit 5 – Managing Contracts And Relationships In Procurement And Supply __________________________________________ 241 CILT Endorsed Managing Freight And Warehousing Operations (In Association With The Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport) _____________ 242 CILT Endorsed Road Fleet Management (In Association With The Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport) ________________________________ 242

Supply Chain Management

Table Of Contents

Global Supply Chain Leadership Programme __________________________________________________________________________ 243 Measuring And Monitoring Suppliers’ Performance ____________________________________________________________________ 243 Successfully Planning And Controlling Material And Inventory (In Association With The Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport) ______________ 244 The Effective Buyer _______________________________________________________________________

244

235

Supply Chain Management

Best Practice Procurement

Certificate In Financial Tools For Procurement Professionals

Course Overview

This course will provide delegates with low cost solutions for excellence in procurement. Delegates will be able to implement world class procurement strategies into their organisations whilst mastering price management techniques, and using best practice negotiation and supplier relationship management strategies.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

The evolution of procurement Best practice procurement Assessing your organisation against best practice Strategic sourcing and transactional sourcing The strategic sourcing process The Cigar Box case study Category management The seller’s view of price The top ten price management tools and techniques The price management business simulation Is negotiating in the souk the same as negotiating with suppliers?

What win/win really looks and feels like Negotiating with different cultures Outsourcing Information systems

Who Should Attend?

This course is aimed at managers and staff working in procurement, or those who have responsibility for the procurement function. It will benefit staff at all levels, from buyers to purchasing managers and directors.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand world class procurement strategies and how you can implement them into your organisation 2. Know the top ten price management tools and techniques and how you can use them to best effect 3. Evaluate best practice negotiation and supplier relationship management strategies and how you can develop real win-win partnerships with suppliers

236

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

This course will provide you with a solid foundation in the principles of finance as they apply in the real world, without resorting to jargon. You will develop an understanding of how finance works in business, how finance measures performance, how financial decisions impact upon performance, how to use finance skills to drive a business forward.

Course Content • • • • •

Financial management tools Financial and nonfinancial factors in decision-making Sources of finance available for business and major capital acquisitions and projects Effective capital purchasing plans Financial risk in procurement

Who Should Attend?

This course is a must-attend event for: • Supply Chain Managers • Procurement Managers • Senior Buyers • Contract Mangers

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand the scope, methodology and language of the finance function 2. Use financial tools to help you make appropriate buying decisions 3. Select and apply appropriate figures for different purposes, such as appraisal of suppliers, capital projects and decision-making

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business) Course Overview

This course is designed to enable delegates to undertake risk analysis and a variety of risk assessments relating to different aspects of purchasing and supply and to implement a range of appropriate risk management tools and techniques. Delegates will be able use a variety of risk assessment tools and techniques designed to provide a detailed analysis of supply chain situations, including legal, corporate social responsibility (CSR), ethical, health and safety, financial, international, innovation and a variety of other potential risk scenarios.

Course Content • • • • • • •

• •

Understanding the nature of risk in purchasing and supply Analyse potential sources of risk to organisations of both internal and external origin Analyse and explain the use of segmentation and business tools to reduce supply chain vulnerability Evaluate the role of an organisation’s stakeholders in risk management Risk management processes and structures Develop a risk management strategy Formulate an effective risk management process in the context of an organisation’s strategic objectives and a dynamic external environment Evaluate insurance as a financial means of risk protection Managing risk and vulnerability

Who Should Attend?

This course is a must-attend event for: • Supply Chain Managers • Senior Buyers • Contract Mangers

3.

= Earned Training Hours

The Stock Management, Demand Planning And Forecasting course highlights the impact and benefits demand management has on the overall profitability of an organisation.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Overview of demand planning and forecasting Challenges in organisational forecasting Advantages and disadvantages of forecasting methods What influences forecasts Accuracy on forecasting horizons Actual exercises to produce and evaluate forecasts Selecting the right model Exponential Smoothing Seasonality and multiple series Evaluating your forecasts Extending the information base and your basic models to include events Forecasts and stock levels The effect of stock Re-order levels Economic order quantities Scheduling The role of judgment in forecasting Improving forecasting in your organisation Create a plan for best practice and accuracy in forecast

This course is a must for purchasing and supply chain, stock and warehouse personnel

Analyse the nature and scope of risks for the organisation Plan and implement an appropriate risk management process to protect the organisation’s interests Explain how supplier appraisals, pre-qualification of suppliers and contract monitoring can help to mitigate risks

24 Hrs

Course Overview

Who Should Attend?

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

(In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Supply Chain Management

Certificate In Managing Risk In The Supply Certificate In Stock Management, Demand Chain Planning And Forecasting

I A

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Convert data into actionable plans to ensure accurate, detailed and timely demand planning and forecasting Overcome challenges in organisational forecasting using latest forecasting methods Ensure effective stock management to save time and cut costs, and increase employee efficiency and customer satisfaction

I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

237

Supply Chain Management

Certificate In Sustainable Supply Chain (In association with The George Washington University School of Business)

Chartered Institute of Purchasing and Supply (CIPS) – Diploma In Procurement And Supply Exam Preparation

Course Overview

This interactive course will help you capitalise on the economic recovery by critically reviewing all of the key elements within your warehousing and logistics operations. You will get a complete checklist of ‘what needs to be done and how to select the right solutions for your business’.

Course Overview

Course Content

Course Outline

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Developing your logistics strategy The role of the warehouse What is its function and how cost efficient is it?

Steps to create a productive warehouse layout and improve product flows Materials handling equipment options to maximise efficiency within the warehouse What to look for in a Warehouse Management System (WMS)?

RFID, bar-coding and voice activated systems Storage options – Traditional vs. new technology Processes for monitoring and reporting performance within warehouse operations Rapidly identify areas for improvement and cost reduction Is outsourcing an option for you?

How to develop a ‘needs specification document’ in the growth phase?

Develop cost reduction strategies to optimise your operations Accurately determine your operations and costs using industry benchmarking Managing change in the supply chain

Who Should Attend?

• • • • • • •

On completion of this series of five units students will have received assistance to gain their Diploma. This is a highly intensive training to prepare you to pass all five compulsory units of the Diploma In Procurement And Supply.

Unit 1 – Contexts Of Procurement And Supply Unit 2 – Business Needs In Procurement And Supply Unit 3 – Sourcing In Procurement And Supply Unit 4 – Negotiating And Contracting In Procurement And Supply Unit 5 – Managing Contracts And Relationships In Procurement And Supply

Who Should Attend?

Procurement and supply chain professionals who would like to significantly increase their credibility through their working knowledge of various aspects of the supply chain will benefit from attending the five units and attempting the CIPS exam for the Diploma.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

Plan, prepare and carry out effective negotiations and assess their effectiveness Apply a range of contractual terms and tenders with a strong understanding of how they affect direct and indirect expenditure Use techniques to manage relationships and understand how to exploit opportunities to maximise the effectiveness of the supply chain

Logistics Managers Warehouse Managers Supply Chain Managers Strategic Planning Managers Inventory Managers, Project Managers and others who would like a practical overview of logistics operations Business Development Managers Other experienced managers or supervisors looking for a fresh perspective and ways to reduce supply chain costs

Benefits Of Attending

1. Understand world class procurement strategies and how you can implement them into your organisation 2. Know the top ten price management tools and techniques and how you can use them to best effect 3. Evaluate best practice negotiation and supplier relationship management strategies and how you can develop real win-win partnerships with suppliers

238

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I A Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(CIPS Diploma In Procurement And Supply Exam Preparation) Course Overview

Understand the added value that can be achieved through procurement and supply chain management. Explore the stages of sourcing processes in creating added value outcomes that can be achieved with suppliers. Appreciate the main aspects of organisational infrastructure that shape the scope of a procurement or supply chain function. Understand the need for compliance with requirements when undertaking procurement activities in different sectors. Offer advice and guidance to main stakeholders on the application of the sourcing process.

Course Outline • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Explain the categories of spend that an organisation may purchase Analyse the different sources of added value in procurement and supply Compare the concepts of procurement and supply chain management Differentiate the stakeholders that a procurement or supply chain function may have Explain the main aspects of sourcing processes Analyse the main stages of a sourcing process Explain how electronic systems can be used at different stages of the sourcing process Analyse the relationship between achieving compliance with processes and the achievement of outcomes Explain the main aspects of corporate governance of a procurement or supply chain function Analyse the impact of organisational policies and procedures on procurement Compare the different structures of a procurement or supply chain function Explain the common IT systems that can be used by a procurement or supply chain function Identify different economic and industrial sectors Analyse the impact of the public sector on procurement or supply chain roles Analyse the impact of the private sector on procurement or supply chain roles Analyse the impact of the not for profit or third sector on procurement or supply chain roles

Who Should Attend?

Unit 2 – Business Needs In Procurement And Supply

(CIPS Diploma In Procurement And Supply Exam Preparation) Course Overview

Devise a business case for requirements to be sourced from external suppliers.

Understand the fundamentals of specifications and key performance indicators that are included in contractual arrangements made with suppliers. Explore the main clauses that are included in formal contracts. Appreciate the main implications of outsourced work or outsourced services for procurement. Adopt practices that help achieve value for money solutions in procurement.

Course Outline • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Analyse how business needs influence procurement decisions Explain how costs and prices can be estimated for procurement activities Explain the criteria that can be applied in the creation of a business case Explain the operation of financial budgets for the control of procurements Assess different types of specifications used in procurements of products or services Explain the content of specifications for procurements Develop examples of key performance indicators (KPIs) in contractual agreements Explain sources of contractual terms for contracts that are created with external organisations Interpret examples of contractual terms typically incorporated into contracts that are created with external organisations Assess the main types of pricing arrangements in commercial agreements Differentiate outsourcing from other types of procurement Assess how outsourcing can impact on procurement Develop a plan for procuring outsourced work or services

Who Should Attend?

Procurement and supply chain professionals who would like to adopt practices that help achieve value for money solutions in procurement will benefit from attending.

Procurement and supply chain professionals who would like to understand the scope of procurement or supply chain functions will benefit from attending.

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending

2.

1.

2.

3.

Understand the added value that can be achieved through procurement and supply chain management Understand the stages of sourcing processes in creating added value outcomes that can be achieved with suppliers Understand the main aspects of organisational infrastructure that shape the scope of a procurement or supply chain function

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I

Supply Chain Management

Unit 1 – Contexts Of Procurement And Supply

1.

3.

Understand how to devise a business case for requirements to be sourced from external suppliers Understand the fundamentals of specifications and key performance indicators that are included in contractual arrangements made with suppliers Understand the main clauses that are included in formal contracts

I

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

239

Supply Chain Management

Unit 3 – Sourcing In Procurement And Supply

(CIPS Diploma In Procurement And Supply Exam Preparation) Course Overview

Understand the main options for sourcing of requirements from suppliers. Develop a plan for sourcing goods or services from external suppliers. Assess the financial stability of potential suppliers. Adopt the main processes that can be applied to the sourcing of requirements from external suppliers. Understand compliance issues when sourcing from suppliers.

Course Outline

Explain the sourcing process in relation to procurement Compare the main approaches to the sourcing of requirements from suppliers Develop selection and award criteria that can be commonly applied when sourcing requirements from external suppliers Explain the main consequences on supply chains when sourcing requirements from suppliers Choose appropriate selection criteria to inform the identification of appropriate external suppliers in the sourcing plan Choose a balance of commercial and technical award criteria in the sourcing plan Produce a plan for the sourcing of goods or services from external suppliers Identify the main sources of information on potential suppliers’ financial performance Calculate measures of liquidity, profitability, gearing, investment from relevant financial data on potential suppliers Evaluate the financial performance of potential suppliers using relevant financial data Assess commonly used sources of information on market data that can impact on the sourcing of requirements from external suppliers Explain the main processes used for obtaining quotations and tenders Evaluate the criteria that can be commonly applied to the assessment of quotations or tenders Explain how electronic systems can be used to help the sourcing of requirements from external suppliers Analyse the main legislative, regulatory and organisational requirements when sourcing in the not for profit, private and public sectors, and international suppliers

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Who Should Attend?

Procurement and supply chain professionals who would like to understand compliance issues when sourcing from suppliers will benefit from attending.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

2.

3.

240

= Earned Training Hours

(CIPS Diploma In Procurement And Supply Exam Preparation) Course Overview

Understand the legal issues that relate to the formation of contracts.

Adopt the main approaches in the negotiation of commercial agreements with external organisations. Prepare for negotiations with external organisations. Understand how commercial negotiations should be undertaken. Recognise the use of legal terms that should regulate commercial agreements.

Course Outline • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

I

Explain the documentation that can comprise a commercial agreement for the supply of goods or services Assess the legal issues that relate to the creation of commercial agreements with customers or suppliers Explain the main types of contractual agreements made between customers and suppliers Analyse the application of commercial negotiations in the work of procurement and supply Compare the types of approaches that can be pursued in commercial negotiations Explain how the balance of power in commercial negotiations can affect outcomes Analyse the different types of relationships that impact on commercial negotiations Evaluate costs and prices in commercial negotiations Explain the economic factors that impact on commercial negotiations Explain the main variables that can be used in a commercial negotiation Analyse the resources required for a negotiation Explain the stages of a commercial negotiation Evaluate the main methods that can influence the achievement of desired outcomes Evaluate the main communication skills that help achieve desired outcomes Explain how to analyse the process and outcomes of the negotiations to inform future practice

Who Should Attend?

Procurement and supply chain professionals who would like to recognise the use of legal terms that should regulate commercial agreements will benefit from attending.

Benefits Of Attending 1.

Understand the main options for sourcing of requirements from suppliers Be able to develop a plan for sourcing goods or services from external suppliers Be able to assess the financial stability of potential suppliers

30 Hrs

Unit 4 – Negotiating And Contracting In Procurement And Supply

2.

3.

Understand the legal issues that relate to the formation of contracts Adopt the main approaches in the negotiation of commercial agreements with external organisations Understand how commercial negotiations should be undertaken and prepare for negotiations with external organisations

I

30 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

(CIPS Diploma In Procurement And Supply Exam Preparation)

Understand the dynamics of relationships in supply chains. Appreciate the legal aspects relating to the performance of contracts. Explore the main approaches to achieve the management of contracts. Use the main techniques for the management of contracts and suppliers.

• • • • • • • • • • • •

Classify types of commercial relationships in supply chains Apply portfolio analysis techniques to assess relationships in supply chains Classify the competitive forces that impact on relationships in supply chains Evaluate the elements of a legally binding agreement Compare implied and express terms that affect performance issues Explain the recourses for non-performances in contract Analyse the sources of added value that can be achieved through supply chain relationships Explain the main approaches to conflict resolution in commercial contracts Assess the main types of contractual risk Interpret financial, technical and performance data relating to the performance of contracts Compare contract management and supplier relationship management Explain the main techniques for supplier relationship management Explain the main techniques for supplier development Explain the main responsibilities of a contract manager Explain techniques for relationship improvement

Procurement and supply chain professionals who would like to adopt the main approaches and techniques to achieve the management of contracts and suppliers will benefit from attending.

Apply methods to improve supplier performance Recognise the need for a structured approach when dealing with performance and relationship issues Understand the legal aspects relating to the performance of contracts

30 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

The structure and organisation of freight Modes and modal choice Regulation and control of transport Legislation Intermodality International bodies and conventions Rates and charges Customs processes Principles of warehouse design and layout Storage and equipment Order picking Inventory issues Service and administration Waste management Safety and training

Who Should Attend?

Professionals having responsibility for buying from overseas and for forwarding/import activities • •

•

Traffic managers, forwarding managers, shipping managers, logistics/supply chain managers and expeditors Existing managers/supervisors, who need a “confirmation” of their current operation Supply, buying, purchase, logistics, materials and supply chain managers Those who are looking for business gains and benefits from managing their supply chains more effectively

Benefits Of Attending

Benefits Of Attending

3.

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

•

Who Should Attend?

1.

2.

This course looks at the essentials of international trade and freight transport and logistics management. It will give a structured approach so you can analyse and then improve your international trade and freight operations.

Course Content

Course Outline

•

(In Association With The Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport) Course Overview

Course Overview

• •

CILT Endorsed Managing Freight And Warehousing Operations

Supply Chain Management

Unit 5 – Managing Contracts And Relationships In Procurement And Supply

I

1.

2.

3.

Visit a state of the art logistics centre to see various examples of highly modern equipment Understand the legal requirements for safety of people, goods and environment Analyse and then improve our international trade and freight operations

I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

241

Supply Chain Management

CILT Endorsed Road Fleet Management

Global Supply Chain Leadership Programme

Course Overview

Course Overview

(In Association With The Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport) Public and private-sector organisations of many types and sizes operate fleets of vehicles and motorized equipment to fulfill their missions. Whether to meet the mobility needs of employees or customers; facilitate the delivery of goods and materials; underpin law enforcement or national defense missions; or support manufacturing, construction, utility, public works, or other services, fleet management is a vital but often underappreciated area for many organisations.

This course will give you the body of knowledge necessary to improve your current fleet planning, maintenance and management thinking.

It will provide you with comprehensive and detailed information, coupled with an opportunity to discuss common challenges with your peer group of fleet management professionals

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Reality Check – Internal How do we manage road fleet today?

What qualifications are required for doing the job and how does that match up in reality?

What are the training needs and how to establish them?

How does IT support contribute to road fleet management?

Reality Check – External Legal requirements of load, equipment and people Government rules and policies on fuel, traffic, borders, equipment, labour law and others HSSE as a national initiative Possibilities Today – Tomorrow Fleet management systems Vehicle tracking systems Qualifying and training people Planning as a tool

Who Should Attend?

This course is designed for professionals within transport companies, warehousing providers, companies with transport needs as well as freight forwarders. This will be highly beneficial for • Logistics managers • Transport managers • Supervisors and dispatchers • Planners and route managers • Outsourcing managers

This intensive course addresses the key strategic considerations for the application and implementation of integrated supply chain management practices. Using the latest tools and techniques, delegates will be able to develop their own organisation’s integrated SCM strategy.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Basic principles Concepts, terminology and data dictionary Supply chain design, supply chain models, define As-Is, design To-Be Processes, standard operating procedures and work instructions The front-end of the supply chain Demand management Supply management The SI and OP process The back-end of the supply chain: demand fulfilment Transport and freight forwarding Logistics Warehousing Distribution Customs and Compliance Supply Chain Integration

Who Should Attend?

This course has been specifically designed for procurement, supply chain, logistics, and materials managers and directors who wish to broaden and update their skills and knowledge. It is also beneficial for procurement and supply chain personnel seeking supply chain integration or who need to understand the impact of supply chain decisions upon their company’s performance.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Transform the competitiveness of your supply chains and your business by incorporating world class benchmarking criteria into your supply chain strategy 2. Display a critical understanding of supply chain costs, contractual risks and financial performance

Benefits Of Attending

1. Examine the link and the role of transport in your company’s operations and activities 2. Identify and understand key performance indicators essential to succeed your road fleet operations 3. Manage, recall and apply effective initiatives for improvement for work based application

242

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I

I A

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

Course Overview

This intensive course is designed to address the key strategic considerations for applying and implementing integrated procurement and supply chain management practices. The focus will be on developing procurement and supply chain strategies for effective supplier performance. This will incorporate the use of latest business process models and their relationship with segmentation and demand planning. At the end of the course you will be able to develop your own integrated supplier management strategy using the latest tools and techniques.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

World-class procurement and SCM Diagnosing process capability Developing a procurement and SCM strategy Forecasting and planning Considerations for logistics and distribution Supplier partnering The value chain model Lead times Inventory decisions Category management Aligning procurement and SCM with suppliers Procurement business management Strategic sourcing Exploring price and cost Contracting Managing resources Value engineering Benchmarking Getting the supplier to perform Develop your own strategic roadmap Developing a negotiation strategy

Develop a focused approach to create and implement your own supplier management strategy incorporating world-class benchmarking criteria Understand the impact of enhanced vendor performance on the overall profitability of your organisation Increase your understanding of costs, contractual risks and financial performance

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

This intensive four-day course is for those who want to understand and implement the essential tools for planning of material and controlling inventory in the supply chain. Delegates will be able to evaluate the procedures and make changes to the methods of improving customer service whilst achieving reductions in inventory; eliminate wasteful costs; avoid internal problems that limit performance and obtain added value for money.

The supply chain The supply chain definitions, history and key aspects Relationships and material flows in the chain Planning management Overview and evolution of material planning Material planning Replenishment methods Forecasting and stock control Demand forecasting Stock coding Stock recording Products and stock Product classification Inventory costs and service Improvements – Model for planning inventory Planning inventory

Who Should Attend?

Benefits Of Attending

3.

Course Overview

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Procurement, supply chain, logistics, and materials managers and directors who wish to broaden and update their skills and knowledge.

Procurement and supply chain personnel developing relations with suppliers for long term and strategic co-operation. Those who need to understand the impact of supply chain decisions upon their suppliers and own company’s performance.

2.

(In Association With The Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport)

Course Content

Who Should Attend?

1.

Successfully Planning And Controlling Material And Inventory

Supply Chain Management

Measuring And Monitoring Suppliers’ Performance

I

This four-day course is for inventory, stock, supply chain, logistics, purchasing, procurement, warehouse and distribution supervisors and managers. It will also be beneficial to owners, operators and directors of companies who hold stock and inventory. Those who are new to managing inventory as well as non inventory people who need to gain an awareness of the issues and key drivers of stock control operations will also benefit from the course.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Examine the link of inventory management with the supply chain operations and activities in your company 2. Identify and understand key performance indicators to succeed in improving your operations 3. Analyse the key areas of operations and ensure the movement of goods to the customer adds value

E I

24 Hrs Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

243

Supply Chain Management

The Effective Buyer Course Overview

This course will provide delegates with practical examples of developing the right strategies for procurement so that they effectively reduce costs and increase quality. Delegates will develop an insight into measuring and improving their purchasing performance.

Course Content • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Understanding the role and maximising the contribution to the business Procurement in the modern world Understanding the role and key activities Aligning procurement with the business Practical tools and approaches Planning Managing prices Managing suppliers Adopting a strategic approach Creating and implementing a procurement strategy “Marketing” the procurement function World class models of procurement Best practice contracts and agreements Supplier performance measurement Measuring procurement performance How salesmen are trained and what to do about it The major focus of sales training Negotiation approaches Latest developments and thinking

Who Should Attend?

This course would benefit anyone in the public or private sector who is responsible for cost management and reduction. By attending this innovative course, you will be able to reduce direct costs from your purchasing, hear latest proven approaches to best practice procurement and learn about cost reduction tools and techniques to take back and implement in your organisation.

Benefits Of Attending

1. Create and implement an effective procurement strategy and align your procurement processes within your business 2. Effectively manage suppliers and their prices by developing your negotiation skills

244

24 Hrs = Earned Training Hours

I Essential

Intermediate

Advanced

T: +971 4 3352437 F: +971 4 3352438 E: register-mea@informa.com W: www.informa-mea.com

+971 4 335 2437

register-mea@informa.com

www.informa-mea.com

Course Catalogue 2014

www.informa-mea.com